IBML

ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Volume 1
P. Rogers, G. Capobianco, D. Carey, N. Davies, L. Fadel, K. Hewitt,
J. Oliveira, F. Pita, A. Salla, V. Sokal, Y. F. Tay, H. Timm

International Technical Support Organization

www.redbooks.ibm.com

SG24-5597-00
IBML
SG24-5597-00
International Technical Support Organization

ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Volume 1

April 2000
 Take Note!

Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information in
Appendix D, “Special Notices” on page 303.

First Edition (April 2000)

This edition applies to OS/390 Version 2 Release 8, Program Number 5647-A01, and to all subsequent releases
and modifications.

Comments may be addressed to:

IBM Corporation, International Technical Support Organization
Dept. HYJ Mail Station P099
2455 South Road
Poughkeepsie, New York 12601-5400

When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a non-exclusive right to use or distribute the information in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

 Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2000. All rights reserved.

Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is
subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Contents

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
The team that wrote this redbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Comments welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Chapter 1. Introduction to OS/390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.1 Introduction to OS/390 fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1 OS/390 evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1.2 OS/390 software and hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1.3 OS/390 elements and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2 OS/390 products requiring customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2.1 Resource Access Control Facility (RACF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2.2 Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem (DFSMS) . . . . . . . . 10
1.2.3 ADSTAR Distributed Storage Management (ADSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2.4 Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) . . . . . . . 12
1.2.5 System Modification Program Extended (SMP/E) . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2.6 Resource Management Facility (RMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.3 OS/390 components requiring customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3.1 System Management Facility (SMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.2 Virtual Lookaside Facility (VLF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.3.3 Time Sharing Option/Extended (TSO/E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.3.4 Workload Manager (WLM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3.5 UNIX System Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.3.6 OS/390 contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4 Role of a system programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.5 OS/390 system programmer functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.1 System programmer and OS/390 operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.5.2 Requirements for install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.6 Installing OS/390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.6.1 Maintenance or service using SMP/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.6.2 Choosing an install package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.6.3 Installing OS/390 using ServerPac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.6.4 Installing OS/390 using CBPDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.6.5 Installing OS/390 using fee-based packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Chapter 2. OS/390 Storage Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

2.1 OS/390 Address Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.1.1 Subsystem definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.2 Processor Storage Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.3 Storage managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.3.1 Virtual Storage Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.3.2 Virtual Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.4 Address space storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.4.2 Real Storage Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2.4.3 Auxiliary Storage Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.4.4 Paging and Swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.5 Program execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 iii

 Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.1 Data center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2 Logical processor structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.3 Channel subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.3.1 Start Subchannel (SSCH) logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.3.2 SAP logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.3.3 Interrupt processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.4 Multiple paths to a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.5 Device number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.6 Subchannel number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.6.1 Subchannel number II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.7 Unit address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.8 Control unit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.9 Parallel channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3.10 ESCON channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.11 S/390 ESCON concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.11.1 ESCON link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.11.2 Link address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.12 Mapping device number in unit address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.13 ESCON CUADD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3.14 ESCON director (switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.15 ESCON director matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.16 ESCON channel-to-channel (CTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.17 Fiber Connection (FICON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.18 How to display channel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.19 S/390 connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.20 System-related I/O work flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.21 What is HCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.21.1 HCD functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.21.2 Dynamic I/O reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.21.3 Dynamic reconfiguration concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.22 IODF data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.22.1 Catalog considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.22.2 Production IODF backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.22.3 IODF placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.22.4 Multiple configurations in a single IODF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3.22.5 Definition order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.23 HCD primary option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3.23.1 How to create a new work IODF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3.23.2 Defining configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.24 Operating system definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3.24.1 How to define an operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.24.2 EDT and esoterics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.24.3 Select new configuration for EDTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3.24.4 How to define an EDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
3.24.5 How to define an EDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3.24.6 Define EDT identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3.24.7 How to add an esoteric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
3.24.8 Add an esoteric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.25 Defining switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.25.1 How to define a switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.26 Defining processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3.26.1 Basic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3.26.2 LPAR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3.26.3 Defining processors with HCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

iv ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 3.26.4 Information required to define a processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.26.5 How to define a processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.26.6 Work with partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
3.26.7 How to add a partition to a CEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
3.26.8 Channel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3.26.9 Reconfigurable channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3.26.10 Shared or EMIF channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3.26.11 Information required to add channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.26.12 Work with channel paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3.27 How to add a channel path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3.28 Channel path access list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.29 Channel path candidate list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.30 How to add a control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3.31 Information required to define a control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3.31.1 Adding a control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3.32 Defining a 3990-6 control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
3.32.2 Select processor for control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
3.32.3 Defining a 3990-6 control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
3.32.4 Defining processor attachment data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
3.33 Information required to define a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
3.33.1 S/390 device numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
3.33.2 How to define an I/O device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
3.33.3 Device / Processor Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3.33.4 Defining CSS definitions for a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
3.33.5 Define device to operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3.33.6 Define operating system device parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
3.33.7 Assign device to an esoteric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3.34 Defining a NIP console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.35 Build a production IODF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
3.35.1 Production IODF created . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3.36 Activating a configuration with HCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3.37 How to display active IODF from the HCD panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
3.38 How to display active IODF from an MVS console . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
3.39 How to display a device status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
3.40 Producing configuration reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3.40.2 HCD graphical reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3.41 Hardware Configuration Manager (HCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

4.1 Installation and customization facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
4.1.1 Time Sharing Option/Extended (TSO/E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
4.1.2 Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
4.1.3 JCL streams and jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
4.1.4 DD statement parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4.1.5 Submitting a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.1.6 Introduction to the Spool Display and Search Facility (SDSF) . . . . 229

Chapter 5. MVS delivery and installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

5.1 Introduction to OS/390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
5.1.1 Advantages of OS/390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
5.1.2 OS/390 delivery options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5.1.3 ServerPac service level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5.1.4 CBPDO service level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
5.1.5 System and installation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5.1.6 Reviewing your current system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Contents v
 5.1.7 The driving system and the target system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
5.2 Installing OS/390 using ServerPac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5.2.1 Load RIM tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
5.2.2 Installing the CustomPac dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5.2.3 Receiving the ServerPac order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5.2.4 Order Receive panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
5.2.5 Generate Jobstream panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
5.2.6 Select order to install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
5.2.7 Installation dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5.2.8 Selecting a configuration for the order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.2.9 Define the installation variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
5.2.10 Defining SMP/E ZONE names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
5.2.11 Define system layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.2.12 Dslist line command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
5.2.13 Select command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.2.14 Adding user-defined data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
5.2.15 Display physical volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
5.2.16 Define alias-to-catalog relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
5.2.17 Define system-specific alias names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
5.2.18 Run the ServerPac-provided installation jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
5.2.19 Save Configuration panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Appendix A. Fundamentals of OS/390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

A.1 List of Base Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
A.2 List of Optional Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Appendix B. System Programmer Customization Examples . . . . . . . . . . 277

B.1 SYS1.PARMLIB Member IEFSSNxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Appendix C. System programmers toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Appendix D. Special Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Appendix E. Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

E.1 IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
E.2 IBM Redbooks collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
E.3 Other resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

How to get IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

IBM Redbooks fax order form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

IBM Redbooks evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

vi ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figures

1. OS/390: S/390 Server Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2. Hardware/Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. OS/390 Elements and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4. Products Requiring System Programmer Customization . . . . . . . . . . 8
5. RACF - Resource Access Control Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
6. Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
7. ADSTAR Distributed Storage Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
8. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
9. System Modification Program Extended (SMP/E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
10. Resource Management Facility (RMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
11. Components Requiring System Programmer Customization . . . . . . . 15
12. System Management Facility (SMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
13. Virtual Lookaside Facility (VLF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
14. Time Sharing Option/Extended (TSO/E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
15. Workload Manager (WLM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
16. UNIX System Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
17. OS/390 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
18. OS/390 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
19. OS/390 System Programmer Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . 28
20. System Programmer and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
21. Requirements for Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
22. Installing OS/390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
23. Installing OS/390 - ServerPac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
24. Installing OS/390 - CBPDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
25. Installing OS/390 Using Fee-Based Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
26. OS/390 address spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
27. Subsystem definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
28. S/390 storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
29. Storage managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
30. Virtual storage manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
31. Virtual storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
32. Multiple address spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
33. Address space storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
34. Common versus private area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
35. System Queue Area (SQA/Extended SQA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
36. Commom service area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
37. Nucleus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
38. Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
39. Data space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
40. Multiprogramming and multiprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
41. Real storage manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
42. Auxiliary storage manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
43. Frame, slots and pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
44. Paging and swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
45. Paging operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
46. Swapping operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
47. Program execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
48. Data center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
49. Logical processor structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
50. Channel subsystem logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
51. Multiple paths to a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 vii

 52. Device number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
53. Subchannel number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
54. Subchannel number II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
55. Unit address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
56. Control unit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
57. Parallel channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
58. ESCON channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
59. S/390 ESCON concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
60. Mapping device number in unit address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
61. ESCON CUADD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
62. ESCON director (switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
63. ESCON director matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
64. ESCON CTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
65. FICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
66. How to display channel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
67. S/390 connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
68. System-related I/O work flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
69. What is HCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
70. HCD functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
71. Dynamic I/O reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
72. Dynamic I/O device types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
73. IODF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
74. Definition order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
75. HCD primary option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
76. How to create a new work IODF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
77. Defining configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
78. Operating system definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
79. How to define an operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
80. EDT and esoteric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
81. Select new configuration for EDTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
82. How to define an EDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
83. How to define an EDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
84. Define EDT identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
85. How to add an esoteric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
86. Add an esoteric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
87. Defining switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
88. How to define a switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
89. Defining processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
90. Information required to define a processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
91. How to define a processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
92. Work with partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
93. How to add a partition to a CEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
94. Channel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
95. Reconfigurable channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
96. Shared or EMIF channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
97. Information required to add channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
98. Work with channel paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
99. How to add a channel path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
100. Access and candidate lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
101. How to add a control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
102. Information required to define a control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
103. Adding a control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
104. Defining a 3990-6 control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
105. Select processor for control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
106. Defining a 3990-6 control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

viii ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

107. Defining processor attachment data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
108. Information required to define a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
109. S/390 device numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
110. Defining a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
111. Device / Processor Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
112. Defining CSS definitions for a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
113. Define device to operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
114. Define operating system device parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
115. Assign device to an esoteric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
116. Defining a NIP console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
117. Build a production IODF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
118. Production IODF created . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
119. Activating a configuration with HCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
120. How to display active IODF from the HCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
121. How to display active IODF from an MVS console . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
122. How to display a device status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
123. Producing configuration reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
124. Hardware Configuration Manager (HCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
125. OS/390 facilities for system programmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
126. TSO/E required customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
127. TSO/E TCAS start procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
128. TSO/E logon procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
129. TSO/E logon process in a VTAM environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
130. TSO/E full-screen logon panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
131. TSO/E languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
132. ISPF components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
133. Sample CLIST to start ISPF environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
134. ISPF Primary Option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
135. Allocating data sets with ISPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
136. ISPF Option 3.2 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
137. Allocate New Data Set panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
138. Edit Entry panel - option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
139. ISPF Edit panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
140. ISPF edit - some line commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
141. ISPF Edit panel - inserting lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
142. ISPF edit - repeating and deleting lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
143. ISPF edit - save and cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
144. JCL streams and jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
145. Creating jobs - an introduction to JCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
146. The job statement explained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
147. The EXEC statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
148. EXEC statement parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
149. JCL DD statements: DDname, DSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
150. The DD statement and DISP parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
151. JCL DD statement parameters: Disp, Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
152. DD statement parameters: Space, Lrecl, blksize . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
153. Submitting a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
154. ISPF option 3.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
155. Data set list for MYUSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
156. Displayed data set list commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
157. Data set member list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
158. Action option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
159. Creating a PDS member using option 3.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
160. SDSF Primary Option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
161. SDSF - Viewing the JES2 output files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Figures ix
 162. SDSF displaying the output job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
163. JES2 system messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
164. SDSF - display active users (DA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
165. SDSF output display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
166. Installation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
167. System and installation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
168. Reviewing your current system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
169. The driving and target system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
170. OS/390 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
171. The CustomPac dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
172. Receiving the ServerPac order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
173. Order Receiving panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
174. Generate Jobstream panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
175. Select order to install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
176. Installation Dialog panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
177. Create Configuration panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
178. Installation Variables panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
179. Define ZONE Information panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
180. Modify System Layout panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
181. Data Set List by Product panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
182. Logical Volume by Product panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
183. List All User Defined Data Sets panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
184. Summary of Physical Volumes panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
185. Define Catalog Data Set Name panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
186. SSA to Catalog panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
187. Installation Jobs panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
188. Generate File Tailored Jobs panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
189. Save Configuration panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
190. Sample 1 - DFSMSdss compress data sets on VOLSER=xxxxx . . . . 282
191. Sample 2 - Convert DASD volume and all its data sets to SMS . . . . 282
192. Sample 3 - DFSMSdss data set copy and re-catalog . . . . . . . . . . . 283
193. Sample 4 - DFSMSdss COPYDUMP JCL copy dump data set . . . . . . 283
194. Sample 5 - DFSMS copy ALLDATA including VOLID . . . . . . . . . . . 284
195. Sample 6 - DFSMSdss DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
196. Sample 7 - DFSMSdss JCL to DUMP data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
197. Sample 8 - DFSMSdss full volume physical dump . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
198. Sample 9 - DFSMSdss job to RELEASE unused space . . . . . . . . . . 286
199. Sample 10 - DFSMSdss logical data set restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
200. Sample 11 - DFSMSdss full volume RESTORE from tape . . . . . . . . 286
201. Sample 12 - DFSMSdss VSAM data set copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
202. Sample 13 - IDCAMS ALTER job to RENAME a data set . . . . . . . . . 287
203. Sample 14 - AMASPZAP job to ZAP a load module . . . . . . . . . . . 288
204. Sample 15 - AMBLIST job to LIST load module and CSECTs . . . . . . 288
205. Sample 16 - COBOL compile/LKED JCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
206. Sample 17 - IEBCOPY data set compress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
207. Sample 18 - IDCAMS job to define an alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
208. Sample 19 - IEFBR14 define data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
209. Sample 20 - IDCAMS job to define a VSAM data set . . . . . . . . . . . 290
210. Sample 21 - IDCAMS job to define a PAGESPACE data set . . . . . . . 291
211. Sample 22 - IDCAMS DELETE and DEFINE VVDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
212. Sample 23 - IEFBR14 job to delete a data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
213. Sample 24 - IDCAMS delete VVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
214. Sample 25 - Produce error log report from Coupling Facility . . . . . . 292
215. Sample 26 - Produce error log report from SYS1.LOGREC data set . . 293
216. Sample 27 - ICKDSF job to perform DASD volume analysis . . . . . . . 293

x ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

217. Sample 28 - ICKDSF REFORMAT can be used to change the VOLSER 293
218. Sample 29 - ICKDSF job to INITIALIZE a DASD volume . . . . . . . . . 294
219. Sample 30 - ICKDSF job to INITIALIZE a DASD volume . . . . . . . . . 294
220. Sample 31 - ICKDSF job to INSPECT a DASD device . . . . . . . . . . . 295
221. Sample 32 - ICKDSF job to BUILD an indexed VTOC . . . . . . . . . . . 295
222. Sample 33 - IEBCOPY partitioned data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
223. Sample 34 - IEBGENER to copy data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
224. Sample 35 - IEFBR14 job to allocate a partitioned data set . . . . . . . 296
225. Sample 36 - IEHINITT to tape volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
226. Sample 37 - IEHLIST job to list a VTOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
227. Sample 38 - Assembler JCL (ASMA90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
228. Sample 39 - Sample LINKEDIT job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
229. Sample 40 - IDCAMS job to review CACHE data for a volume . . . . . 298
230. Sample 41 - IDCAMS LISTCAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
231. Sample 42 - Sample job to dump the SMF RACF records and report . 299
232. Sample 43 - IDCAMS REPRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
233. Sample 44 - Stand-alone dump generation JCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
234. Sample 45 - Clear SMF data set (SYS1.MANx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
235. Sample 46 - Dump SMF SYS1.MANx data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
236. Sample 47 - IDCAMS user catalog DISCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Figures xi
xii ABCs of OS/390 System Programming
Tables

1. Base Elements in OS/390 R7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

2. Optional Elements in OS/390 R7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
3. System programmer JCL toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 xiii

xiv ABCs of OS/390 System Programming
Preface

This redbook is Volume 1 of a five-volume set that is designed to introduce the

structure of an OS/390 and S/390 operating environment. The set will help you
install, tailor, and configure an OS/390 operating system, and is intended for
system programmers who are new to an OS/390 environment.

Volume 1 gives a broad understanding of the software and S/390 architecture

and how it is used together with the OS/390 operating system.

Chapter 1 provides an introduction to the products and components that make up

an OS/390 system.

Chapter 2 describes OS/390 storage concepts.

Chapter 3 describes S/390 hardware and I/O management which includes an

introduction to HCD.

Chapter 4 describes the customization and installation products TSO/E and ISPF
and job control language (JCL).

Chapter 5 describes the OS/390 delivery options and the download process using
ServerPac option.

The team that wrote this redbook

This redbook was produced by a team of specialists from around the world
working at the International Technical Support Organization Poughkeepsie
Center.

Paul Rogers is an OS/390 specialist at the International Technical Support

Organization, Poughkeepsie Center. He writes extensively and teaches IBM
classes worldwide on various aspects of OS/390. Before joining the ITSO 11
years ago, he worked in the IBM Installation Support Center (ISC) in Greenford,
England as OS/390 and JES support for IBM EMEA.

Guillermo Capobianco is an IT Specialist in IBM Global Services PSS Argentina.

He has five years of experience working with customers on MVS, MVS-related
program products, and OS/390. He is currently leading a technical group
providing on-site customer support for the OS/390 platform.

David Carey is a Senior IT Availability Specialist with the IBM Support Center in
Sydney, Australia, where he provides defect and nondefect support for CICS,
CICSPlex/SM, MQSeries, and OS/390. David has 19 years of experience within
the information technology industry, and was an MVS systems programmer for
12 years prior to joining IBM.

T. Nigel Davies is a Systems Specialist in IBM Global Services Product Support

Services (PSS) in the United Kingdom. He has 10 years of IT experience in
various roles, ranging from operations to PC and LAN support to mainframe
systems programming. He joined IBM in 1997 with eight years of experience as
a VM/VSE systems programmer, and since joining IBM has cross-trained in
OS/390 systems skills. His areas of expertise include VM and VSE systems

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 xv

 programming, installation, and technical support, and more recently, OS/390
installation and support.

Luiz Fadel - IBM Brazil

Ken Hewitt is an IT Specialist in IBM Australia. He has over 10 years of

experience working with S/390 customers in a range of roles from CE to System
Engineer. His areas of expertise include I/O and OSA configuration.

Joao Natalino Oliveira

Joao Natalino de Oliveira is a certified I/T consulting specialist working for the
S/390 in Brazil providing support for Brazil and Latin America. He has 24 years
of experience in large systems including MVS-OS/390. His areas of expertise
include performance and capacity planning, server consolidation and system
programming. He has a bachelor degree in Math and Data Processing from
Fundação Santo André Brazil.

Fabio Chaves Pita - IBM Brazil

Alvaro Salla has 30 years of experience in OS operating systems (since MVT).

He has written several redbooks on S/390 subjects. Retired from IBM Brasil, he
is now a consultant for IBM customers.

Valeria Sokal is an MVS system programmer at Banco do Brasil. She has 11

years of experience in the mainframe arena. Her areas of expertise include
MVS, TSO/ISPF, SLR, and WLM.

Yoon Foh Tay is an IT Specialist with IBM Singapore PSS (S/390). He has six
years of experience on the S/390 platform, providing on-site support to
customers.

Hans-Juergen Timm is an Advisory Systems Engineer in IBM Global Services

PSS Germany. He has 20 years of experience working with customers in the
areas of MVS and OS/390, software and technical support, and planning and
management. He also worked six years as an MVS Instructor in the IBM
Education Centers in Mainz and Essen, Germany. His areas of expertise include
implementation support for OS/390, Parallel Sysplex, UNIX System Services, and
Batch Management.

Comments welcome
Your comments are important to us!

We want our redbooks to be as helpful as possible. Please send us your

comments about this or other redbooks in one of the following ways:
• Fax the evaluation form found in “IBM Redbooks evaluation” on page 325 to
the fax number shown on the form.
• Use the online evaluation form found at http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/
• Send your comments in an Internet note to redbook@us.ibm.com

xvi ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Chapter 1. Introduction to OS/390

OS/390 is an integrated enterprise server operating system. It incorporates into one product a
leading-edge and open communications server, distributed data and file services, Parallel Sysplex
system support, object-oriented programming, distributed computer environment (DCE), and open
application interface. As such, it is uniquely suited to integrate today′s heterogeneous and
multi-vendor environments.

By incorporating the base operating system, it continues to build on the classic strengths of MVS: its
reliability, continuous availability features, and security. This provides a scalable system that supports
massive transaction volumes and large numbers of users with high performance, as well as advanced
system and network management, security, and 24/7 availability.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 1

1.1 Introduction to OS/390 fundamentals

OS/390 Release 1 was introduced as a replacement for MVS/ESA Version 5 Release 2. There have
now been eight releases of OS/390, with a new release planned every six months. This book was
based on OS/390 Release 7; Version 2. Release 8 was made generally available in September 1999.

Before OS/390, installations used an MVS operating system that consisted of:
• The Base Control Program (BCP)
The Base Control Program (BCP) provides essential operating system services. The BCP includes
the I/O configuration program (IOCP) as well as the function that starts the OS/390 UNIX System
Services address space. This latter function was called OpenEdition System Services and was a
nonexclusive base element of OS/390 R1, was an exclusive element of OS/390 R2, was integrated
into the BCP element in OS/390 R3, and in OS/390 R6 remained as a part of the BCP but its name
was changed to OS/390 UNIX System Services.
• DFSMSdfp
• JES2 or JES3
• TSO/E and ISPF
• A collection of other software products that applications required

With OS/390, IBM integrated these products and offered a single product. With OS/390, you may order
new levels of some products but not of others; instead, you order and install an entire set of products
integrated into one functionally rich operating system.

Once positioned on OS/390, you can receive new functions and levels approximately every six months.
This predictable release cycle helps reduce planning time. Because each new level is
comprehensively tested, the quality of the operating system is improved. Once your initial migration is
complete, you can expect simplified ordering, planning, and installing, freeing you to increase the
value of your computing environment to your business and deliver better service to your end users.

2 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 1. OS/390: S/390 Server Operating System

1.1.1 OS/390 evolution

The enterprise systems hardware was transformed by the introduction of the OS/390 Parallel Servers.
Based on the complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) technology, these parallel systems
are smaller in size and larger in capacity than their predecessors and deliver performance at a lower
cost.

Now, the transformation continues with the system software for S/390. OS/390 is the S/390 server
operating system. OS/390 extends S/390′s architecture to provide the enterprise-wide client/server
infrastructure and tools that businesses need for fast, flexible deployment of new applications.

With the introduction of the S/390 Parallel Servers in 1994, the mainframe was revived. The CMOS
technology offers mainframe computing power at a lower cost. The S/390 CMOS machines can be
connected with other S/390 CMOS machines or traditional ES/9000 machines to form a Parallel
Sysplex. The sysplex offers high availability and the option to add capacity in small increments. The
S/390 CMOS technology is a modern solution.

The transformation of the mainframe hardware together with business requirements for Information
Technology (IT) are driving forces behind a change in the operating system software for the S/390
mainframes. In 1996, the OS/390 system was introduced as the S/390 server operating system.

Chapter 1. Introduction 3
Figure 2. Hardware/Software Requirements

1.1.2 OS/390 software and hardware

The base OS/390 operating systems executes in a processor and resides in the processor storage
during execution. The OS/390 operating system is commonly referred to as the system software.

The hardware consists of the processors and other devices such as a direct access storage device
(DASD), tape, and consoles. Tape and DASD are used for system functions and by user programs that
execute in an OS/390 environment. When you order OS/390, you receive your order on tape
cartridges. When you install the system from tape, the system code is then stored on DASD volumes.
Once the system is customized and ready for operation, system consoles are required to start and
operate the OS/390 system.

Not shown at this time in the visual are the control units that connect the CPU (processor) to the other
tape, DASD, and console devices.

The main concepts shown here are:

Software The OS/390 operating system consists of load modules and is often called executable
code. These load modules are placed onto DASD volumes into load libraries during a
system install process.
Hardware The system hardware consists of all the devices, controllers, and processors that make
up an OS/390 complex.
Devices Shown in the visual are the tape, DASD, and console devices. There are many other
types of devices that will be discussed later in this document.

4 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Storage Central storage, often called real or main storage, is where the OS/390 operating system
executes. Also, all user programs share the storage of the processor with the operating
system.

Chapter 1. Introduction 5
Figure 3. OS/390 Elements and Features

1.1.3 OS/390 elements and features

The OS/390 system consists of base elements that deliver essential operating functions. In addition to
the services provided by MVS/ESA, this means such functions as communications support, online
access, host graphics, and online viewing of publications.

In addition to the base, OS/390 has optional features that are closely related to the base features.
There are two types of optional features:
• One type of feature is always shipped with the OS/390 system whether they are ordered or not.
These features support dynamic enablement, which allows you to dynamically enable and disable
them.
- If such a feature is ordered, it is shipped enabled for use.
- If such a feature is not ordered, it is shipped disabled.
It can later be enabled.
• A second type of optional feature is not shipped automatically. These features must be ordered
specifically.
The idea of the OS/390 system is to have elements and features instead of program products. This
concept might be more easily explained by saying that OS/390 consists of a collection of functions
that are called base elements and optional elements. The optional elements (features) are either
integrated or nonintegrated. It is important to note that these optional features, both integrated
and nonintegrated, are also tested as part of the integration of the entire system. The intention of
this visual is to explain the difference between these terms. It is not the intention to discuss which
products are included in OS/390 and which are not.

6 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 − Shipped as part of the OS/390 system is the base operating system and the products/features
that were part of MVS/ESA SP V5.2.2, for example, UNIX System Services, SOMobjects, and
LAN services. In addition to these features, products such as VTAM, TSO/E, ISPF, GDDM
., and BookManager READ/MVS, which provide essential operating system functions are
included in the base and called base elements. The list on the visual is not a complete list.
More details will be provided later in the course. Some of the base elements can be
dynamically enabled and disabled, for example TCP/IP and DFSMS/NFS. The reason for this is
that a customer may choose to use a vendor product for TCP/IP and NFS instead of IBM′ s
products.
− In addition to the OS/390 base, there is a set of optional features. Note that there are two
types of optional features: one type is always shipped, and the other must be specifically
ordered.
- The features that support dynamic enablement are always shipped. Examples are JES3,
DFSMSdss, and DFSMShsm. If these features are ordered as part of the OS/390 system
order, they will be shipped as enabled in the system. If they are not ordered, they are
shipped as disabled. Later on, you can use them by letting IBM know and by dynamically
enabling them through a SYS1.PARMLIB member.
- The other type of features are the optional features equivalent to optional program
products. Examples are RACF, RMF, C/C++ compiler, and so on.

Some of the optional products will still be available as separate orderable products for customers that
are using MVS/ESA. However, it is IBM′s intention to provide new functions only within the OS/390
elements and features. Future releases of the OS/390 system will contain more elements and features
as more program products are included in the solution.
Note: The list of elements and features on the visual is not a complete list of what is included with the
OS/390 system.

Additional Information — There are two classifications of elements in the OS/390 system: exclusive and
nonexclusive.
• Exclusive elements:
− The functional level of an element or feature that can be ordered only as part of the OS/390
package, and is not available as an independent element or feature anywhere else.
• Nonexclusive elements:
− Those elements or features included in the OS/390 package that are also orderable as
independent products, at the same functional level, from the MVS product set.

Chapter 1. Introduction 7
Figure 4. Products Requiring System Programmer Customization

1.2 OS/390 products requiring customization

The products shown on the visual need to be installed and customized for use in an OS/390 operating
system.

When ordering products, be sure you include the following steps when planning your pre-installation
activities:
• Obtain and install any required program temporary fixes (PTFs) or updated versions of the
operating system.
• Call the IBM Software Support Center to obtain the preventive service planning (PSP) upgrade.
This provides the most current information on PTFs for RACF. Have RETAIN checked again just
before testing RACF. Information for requesting the PSP upgrade can be found in the program
directory. Although the program directory contains a list of the required PTFs, the most current
information is available from the support center.
• Verify that your installation′s programs will continue to run, and, if necessary, make changes to
ensure compatibility with the new release.

8 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 5. RACF - Resource Access Control Facility

1.2.1 Resource Access Control Facility (RACF)

The OS/390 Security Server (RACF component) is the IBM security product. The RACF component of
the OS/390 Security Server works together with the existing system features of OS/390 to provide
improved data security for an installation and provides Year 2000 support. If this product is the one to
be installed in your environment, then RACF customization must be done.

RACF helps meet the need for security by providing:

• Flexible control of access to protected resources
• Protection of installation-defined resources
• Ability to store information for other products
• Choice of centralized or decentralized control of profiles
• An ISPF panel interface
• Transparency to end users
• Exits for installation-written routines

In order for RACF to meet the specific requirements of your installation, you can customize function to
take advantage of new support after the product is installed. For example, you can tailor RACF
through the use of installation exit routines, class descriptor table (CDT) support, or options to improve
performance.

Chapter 1. Introduction 9
Figure 6. Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem

1.2.2 Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem (DFSMS)

DFSMS/MVS and MVS comprise the base MVS operating system, where DFSMS/MVS performs the
essential data, storage, program, and device management functions of the system.

DFSMS/MVS is the central component of both system-managed and non-system-managed storage

environments. DFSMS/MVS, MVS, and ESA/370 or ESA/390 hardware exploit the usability and function
available with MVS. MVS supports both 24-bit and 31-bit addressing used by components of
DFSMS/MVS. Many DFSMS/MVS components have modules or data in extended virtual storage above
16 MB, leaving more space below the 16 MB line for user applications.

The DFSMS environment consists of a set of IBM hardware and software products that together
provide a system-managed storage solution for MVS installations. DFSMS/MVS is an integral part of
this environment.

The components of DFSMS/MVS automate and centralize storage management based on

installation-defined policies for availability, performance, space, and security. The Interactive Storage
Management Facility (ISMF) provides the user interface for defining and maintaining these policies and
the Storage Management Subsystem (SMS) governs these policies for the system.

In this environment, the Resource Access Control Facility (RACF) and Data Facility Sort (DFSORT)
complement the functions of the base operating system; RACF provides resource security functions,
and DFSORT adds the capability for faster and more efficient sorting, merging, copying, reporting and
analyzing of business information.

10 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 7. ADSTAR Distributed Storage Management

1.2.3 ADSTAR Distributed Storage Management (ADSM)

ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (ADSM) is an enterprise-wide storage management application
for the network. It provides automated storage management services to multivendor workstations,
personal computers, and local area network (LAN) file servers.

This product is useful for backing up files for workstations, personal computers, LAN file servers, and
OS/390 UNIX System Services HFS files.

Chapter 1. Introduction 11
Figure 8. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

1.2.4 Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

TCP/IP is a set of protocols and applications that allow you to perform certain computer functions in a
similar manner independent of the types of computers or networks being used. When you use TCP/IP,
you are using a network of computers to communicate with other users, share data with each other,
and share the processing resources of the computers connected to the TCP/IP network.

A computer network is a group of computer nodes electronically connected by some communication

medium. Each node has the hardware and the programs necessary to communicate with other
computer nodes across this communication medium. The node can be a PC, workstation,
microcomputer, departmental computer, or large computer system. The size of the computer is not
important. The ability to communicate with other nodes is important.

Computer networks allow you to share the data and computing resources of many computers.
Applications, such as departmental file servers, rely on networking as a way to share data and
programs.

Many forms of communication media are available today. Each is designed take advantage of the
environment in which it operates. Communication media consist of a combination of the physical
network used to connect to computer nodes and the language, or protocol, they use to communicate
with each other.

12 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 9. System Modification Program Extended (SMP/E)

1.2.5 System Modification Program Extended (SMP/E)

System Modification Program Extended (SMP/E) is a tool designed to manage the installation of
software products on your MVS system, and to track the modifications you make to those products.
Usually, it is the system programmer′s responsibility to ensure that all software products and the
modifications are properly installed on the system. The system programmer also has to ensure that all
products are installed at the proper level so all elements of the system can work together. At first, that
might not sound too difficult, but as the complexity of the software configuration increases, so does the
task of monitoring all the elements of the system.

An OS/390 system may appear to be one big block of code that drives the CPU. Actually, OS/390 is a
complex system comprising many different smaller blocks of code. Each of those smaller blocks of
code perform a specific function within the system. Each system function is composed of one or more
load modules. In an OS/390 environment, a load module represents the basic unit of
machine-readable executable code. Load modules are created by combining one or more object
modules and processing them with a link-edit utility. The link-editing of modules is a process that
resolves external references and addresses. The functions on a system, therefore, are one or more
object modules that have been combined and link-edited.

Over time, you may need to change some of the elements of your system. These changes may be
necessary to improve the usability or reliability of a product. You may want to add some new functions
to your system, upgrade some of the elements of your system, or modify some elements for a variety
of reasons. In all cases, you are making system modifications. In SMP/E we refer to these system
modifications as SYSMODs.

Chapter 1. Introduction 13
Figure 10. Resource Management Facility (RMF)

1.2.6 Resource Management Facility (RMF)

Many different activities are required to keep your OS/390 running smoothly, and to provide the best
service on the basis of the available resources and workload requirements. The console operator, the
service administrator, the system programmer, or the performance analyst will do these tasks. RMF is
the tool that helps each of these people do the job effectively.

RMF gathers data using three monitors:

• Short-term data collection with Monitor III
• Snapshot monitoring with Monitor II
• Long-term data gathering with Monitor I

Data is gathered for a specific cycle time, and consolidated data record are written at a specific
interval time. The default value for data gathering is one second and for data recording 30 minutes.
You can select these options according to your requirements and change them whenever the need
arises.

Monitor I collects long-term data about system workload and resource utilization, and covers all
hardware and software components of your system: processor, I/O device and storage activities and
utilization, as well as resource consumption, activity and performance of groups of address spaces.

14 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 11. Components Requiring System Programmer Customization

1.3 OS/390 components requiring customization

The components shown on the visual are part of OS/390 and they require customization. These
components are part of the base MVS system and key components for running the OS/390 operating
system.

Chapter 1. Introduction 15
Figure 12. System Management Facility (SMF)

1.3.1 System Management Facility (SMF)

System management facilities (SMF) collects and records system and job-related information that your
installation can use in:
• Billing users.
• Reporting reliability.
• Analyzing the configuration.
• Scheduling jobs.
• Summarizing direct access volume activity.
• Evaluating data set activity.
• Profiling system resource use.
• Maintaining system security.

SMF formats the information that it gathers into system-related records (or job-related records).
System-related SMF records include information about the configuration, paging activity, and workload.
Job-related records include information on the CPU time, SYSOUT activity, and data set activity of each
job step, job, APPC/MVS transaction program, and TSO/E session.

An installation can provide its own routines as part of SMF. These routines will receive control either
at a particular point as a job moves through the system, or when a specific event occurs. For
example, an installation-written routine can receive control when the CPU time limit for a job expires

16 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

or when an initiator selects the job for processing. The routine can collect additional information, or
enforce installation standards.

Chapter 1. Introduction 17
Figure 13. Virtual Lookaside Facility (VLF)

1.3.2 Virtual Lookaside Facility (VLF)

Virtual lookaside facility (VLF) is a set of services that can improve the response time of applications
that must retrieve a set of data for many users. VLF creates and manages a data space to store an
application′s most frequently used data. When the application makes a request for data, VLF checks
its data space to see if the data is there. If the data is present, VLF can rapidly retrieve it without
requesting I/O to DASD.

To take advantage of VLF, an application must identify the data it needs to perform its task. The data
is known as a data object. Data objects should be small to moderate in size, named according to the
VLF naming convention, and associated with an installation-defined class of data objects.

Certain IBM products or components such as LLA, TSO/E, CAS, and RACF use VLF as an alternate way
to access data. Since VLF uses virtual storage for its data spaces, there are performance
considerations each installation must weigh when planning for the resources required by VLF.
Note: VLF is intended for use with major applications. Because VLF runs as a started task that the
operator can stop or cancel, it cannot take the place of any existing means of accessing data on DASD.
Any application that uses VLF must also be able to run without it.

18 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

1.3.2.1 Using VLF with LLA (Library Lookaside)

Library lookaside (LLA) is a started task system address space that improves the system′ s
performance by reducing the contention for disk volumes, the searching of library directories, and the
loading of programs. Directory entries for the primary system library, SYS1.LINKLIB, program libraries
concatenated to it in SYS1.PARMLIB(LNKLSTxx), and additional production libraries named in
SYS1.PARMLIB(CSVLLAxx) are read into the private area of the LLA address space during its
initialization. Subsequent searches for programs in these libraries will begin with the directories in
LLA, and not in the data sets on DASD. The most active modules from LLA-managed libraries are
staged into the DCSVLLA data space managed by VLF.

You will obtain the most benefit from LLA when you have both LLA and VLF functioning. You should
plan to use both.

Chapter 1. Introduction 19
Figure 14. Time Sharing Option/Extended (TSO/E)

1.3.3 Time Sharing Option/Extended (TSO/E)

TSO/E is a base element of OS/390. TSO/E allows users to interactively share computer time and
resources. In general, TSO/E makes it easier for people with all levels of experience to interact with
the MVS system.

Before OS/390, TSO Extensions (TSO/E) was a licensed program for the MVS and MVS/ESA System
Products, and it was an extension of the Time Sharing Option (TSO) of former MVS systems.

TSO/E has advantages for a wide range of computer users. TSO/E users include system programmers,
application programmers, information center administrators, information center users, TSO/E
administrators, and others who access applications that run under TSO/E.

20 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 15. Workload Manager (WLM)

1.3.4 Workload Manager (WLM)

Before the introduction of MVS Workload Manager, MVS required you to translate your data processing
goals from high-level objectives about what work needs to be done into the extremely technical terms
that the system can understand. This translation requires high skill-level staff, and can be protracted,
error-prone, and eventually in conflict with the original business goals. Multisystem, sysplex, parallel
processing, and data sharing environments add to the complexity.

MVS Workload Manager provides a solution for managing workload distribution, workload balancing,
and distributing resources to competing workloads. MVS Workload Manager is the combined
cooperation of various subsystems (CICS, IMS/ESA, JES, APPC, TSO/E, OS/390 UNIX System Services,
DDF, DB2, SOM, LSFM, and Internet Connection Server) with the MVS Workload Manager (WLM)
component.

Chapter 1. Introduction 21
Figure 16. UNIX System Services

1.3.5 UNIX System Services

Beginning with OS/390 Release 3, UNIX System Services has been merged with the BCP, and is now
part of the BCP FMID. In addition, the OMVS address space is started automatically.

BPXOINIT is the started procedure that runs the initialization process. The OMVS address space is
now started automatically at IPL by means of the OMVS= statement in the IEASYSxx parmlib member.

OS/390 UNIX interacts with the following elements and features of OS/390:
• C/ C+ + Com p i l e r, to c o mp i l e p ro g ra m s
• Language Environment, to execute the shell and utilities or any other
• XPG4-compliant shell application
• Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem/MVS (DFSMS/MVS*)
• OS/390 Security Server
• Resource Measurement Facility (RMF)
• System Display and Search Facility (SDSF)
• Time Sharing Option Extensions (TSO/E)
• eNetwork Communications Server - TCP/IP Services (called SecureWay Communications Server
with Release 8)
• ISPF, to use the dialogs for OEDIT, or ISPF/PDF for the ISPF shell

22 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

• BookManager* READ/MVS, to use the OHELP online help facility

Chapter 1. Introduction 23
Figure 17. OS/390 Contents

1.3.6 OS/390 contents

OS/390 is based upon the MVS/ESA SP V5.2.2 product, and the latest versions of associated products.
The OS/390 system provides solutions for the following major areas:
• LAN Services: Provides support for S/390 to be data and print servers in a Local Area Network
(LAN) environment, as well as a focal point for LAN administration enabling LAN workstation users
to store and share data and applications in a central location on the S/390.
• Distributed Computing: Support for distributed applications using industry solutions such as
Distributed Computing Environment (DCE), Distributed File System (DFS), and Network File System
(NFS).
• eNetwork Communications Server: (Also known as CS for OS/390 and SecureWay Communications
Server) provides connectivity to a broad set of users and vendor platforms opening OS/390 for
networking applications (called SecureWay Communications Server with Release 8).
• System Services: Provide the classic strengths of MVS, rock-solid reliability and availability,
support for high-transaction workloads and many users with optimum performance.
• Systems Management: Provide a window to enterprise-wide systems management.
• Application Enablement: Support for the new object technology and rapid development of
applications, improving time-to-market for new business function.
• UNIX System Services: Support for open standards such as Posix and XPG4.2 provides
opportunities for more applications on the S/390 platform.
• Softcopy Services: Improves productivity in systems installation and management.
• Network Computing Services: Supports Secure Access to the Internet with Domino Go Webserver.
• NetQuestion: Provides a powerful, full-text indexing and search server. It supports high-speed
searching of OS/390 Web sites, as well as documents stored on the OS/390 server.

24 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Purpose — Introduce the contents and solutions provided by the OS/390 system.

Details — The OS/390 system is based upon the MVS/ESA SP V5.2.2 system and associated products.
However, OS/390 contains functional changes in many of the base elements and features that are
exclusive to OS/390.

The Installation and Planning for Migration units present information on how to install and migrate to
OS/390.

Use this visual to show that the OS/390 system can be looked upon as an umbrella solution for all the
operating system functions in a S/390 environment. It supports several important industry standards:
CORBA for objects, OSF for open distributed applications, and XPG4.2 for open systems support. It is a
complete server system providing solutions for new technologies such as objects, client/server, and
LAN just to mention a few. Each of these areas will be briefly presented on the following visuals.

The text shows an overview of the OS/390 system as well as the structure of this course. This course
will also include some information on how to implement the server solutions.

Transition Statement — Before proceeding with an overview of each of the server areas, the next two
visuals define the base elements and features that make up OS/390.

Chapter 1. Introduction 25
Figure 18. OS/390 Operating System

1.4 Role of a system programmer

The role of the system programmer is to install, customize, and maintain the operating system. The
OS/390 operating system runs on various hardware configurations. A system programmer must also
define the hardware I/O configuration resources that are to be available to the OS/390 operating
system.

The hardware used can be either IBM or other manufacturers′ machines. The hardware can be used
in two modes:
Basic mode A central processor mode that does not use logical partitioning. With one central
processor, one copy of the OS/390 operating system runs in the machine.
LPAR mode Logically partitioned (LPAR) mode, which is a central processor complex (CPC) power-on
reset mode that enables use of the PR/SM feature and allows an operator to allocate CPC
hardware resources (including central processor central storage, expanded storage, and
channel paths) among logical partitions. OS/390 as the operating system runs in each
LPAR in the machine.

As an OS/390 system programmer, you must be aware of the following:

• Storage concepts
• Device I/O configurations
• Processor configurations
• Console definitions

26 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

• System libraries where the software is placed
• System data sets and their placement
• Customization parameters that are used to define your OS/390 configuration

Chapter 1. Introduction 27
Figure 19. OS/390 System Programmer Management Overview

1.5 OS/390 system programmer functions

As an OS/390 system programmer, you need to be involved in the customization of the items shown on
the visual. These items are as follows:
Address Spaces When you start the OS/390 operating system, OS/390 establishes system
component address spaces. The most important address space is the master
scheduler (MSTR). There are other system address spaces for various
subsystems and system components.
Paging and Swapping Page or swap data sets contain the paged-out portions of address spaces, the
common service area (CSA), and the data written to virtual I/O (VIO) data
sets.
To define the page and swap data sets, use the access method services
DEFINE command.
Dispatching Work The scheduling of address spaces and other tasks to execute in the OS/390
system is done by the MVS dispatcher. The MVS dispatcher performs two
major system functions. It is responsible for finding and dispatching the
highest priority unit of work in the system (SRB, Task, or Interrupted Local
Supervisor Routine) and saving status for locked and unlocked tasks and
SRBs.

28 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Job Flow MVS uses a job entry subsystem (JES) to receive jobs into the operating
system, to schedule them for processing by MVS, and to control their output
processing. JES is the component of the operating system that provides
supplementary job management, data management, and task management
functions such as scheduling, control of job flow, and spooling.
OS/390 Storage The system programmer must be aware of all storage considerations when
installing and customizing an OS/390 operating system environment. The
initialization process begins when the system operator selects the LOAD
function at the system console. MVS locates all of the usable central storage
that is online and available to the system, and creates a virtual environment
for the building of various system areas.
This initialization phase allocates the system′s minimum virtual storage for
the system queue area (SQA) and the extended SQA, allocates virtual storage
for the extended local system queue area (extended LSQA) for the master
scheduler address space, and allocates virtual storage for the common
service area (CSA) and the extended CSA. The amount of storage allocated
depends on the values specified on the CSA system parameter at IPL.
System Data Sets Each installation must incorporate required system data sets into the system
by allocating space for them on appropriate direct access devices during
system installation. The DEFINE function of access method service is used to
define both the storage requirements and the volume for each system data
set. Some data sets must be allocated on the system residence volume,
while some can be placed on other direct access volumes.
Operator Communication The operation of an MVS system involves the following:
• Console operations, or how operators and system programmers interact
with MVS to monitor or control the hardware and software
• Message and command processing that forms the basis of operator
interaction with MVS and the basis of MVS automation
Operating MVS involves managing hardware such as processors and
peripheral devices (including the consoles where operators or system
programmers do their work) and software such as the MVS operating control
system, the job entry subsystem, subsystems such as NetView that can
control automated operations and all the applications that run on MVS.
Security Data security is the protection of data against unauthorized disclosure,
transfer, modification, or destruction, whether accidental or intentional. A
security system must be installed in your operating system by a system
programmer to maintain the resources necessary to meet the security
objectives. It is the system programmer who has the overall responsibility,
using the technology available, to transform the objectives of the security
policy into a usable plan.
Availability The software products supporting system programmers and operators in
managing their systems heavily influence the complexity of their job and their
ability to keep system availability at a high level. Performance management
is the system management discipline that most directly impact all users of
system resources in an enterprise. You can do this with RMF.
Integrity An operating system is said to have system integrity when it is designed,
implemented and maintained to protect itself against unauthorized access,
and does so to the extent that security controls specified for that system
cannot be compromised. Specifically for MVS, this means that there must be
no way for any unauthorized program, using any system interface, defined or
undefined:

Chapter 1. Introduction 29
 • To bypass store or fetch protection
• To bypass OS Password, VSAM Password, or RACF security checking
• To obtain control in an authorized state

30 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 20. System Programmer and Operations

1.5.1 System programmer and OS/390 operations

A system programmer has to plan the following operations areas:
• Workload Manager
MVS Workload Manager provides a solution for managing workload distribution, workload
balancing, and distributing resources to competing workloads. MVS Workload Manager is the
combined cooperation of various subsystems (CICS, IMS/ESA, JES, APPC, TSO/E, OS/390 UNIX
System Services, DDF, DB2, SOM, LSFM, and Internet Connection Server) with the MVS Workload
Manager (WLM) component.
• System performance
The task of tuning a system is an iterative and continuous process. The controls offered by SRM
are only one aspect of this process. Initial tuning consists of selecting appropriate parameters for
various system components and subsystems. Once the system is operational and criteria have
been established for the selection of jobs for execution via job classes and priorities, SRM will
control the distribution of available resources according to the parameters specified by the
installation.
SRM, however, can only deal with available resources. If these are inadequate to meet the needs
of the installation, even optimal distribution may not be the answer -- other areas of the system
should be examined to determine the possibility of increasing available resources.

Chapter 1. Introduction 31
 When requirements for the system increase and it becomes necessary to shift priorities or acquire
additional resources, such as a larger processor, more storage, or more terminals, the SRM
parameters might have to be adjusted to reflect changed conditions.
• I/O device management
You must define an I/O configuration to the operating system (software) and the channel
subsystem (hardware). The Hardware Configuration Definition (HCD) component of MVS
consolidates the hardware and software I/O configuration processes under a single interactive
end-user interface. The validation checking that HCD does as you enter data helps to eliminate
errors before you attempt to use the I/O configuration. The output of HCD is an I/O definition file
(IODF), which contains I/O configuration data. An IODF is used to define multiple hardware and
software configurations to the MVS operating system. When you activate an IODF, HCD defines the
I/O configuration to the channel subsystem and/or the operating system. With the HCD activate
function or the MVS ACTIVATE operator command, you can make changes to the current
configuration without having to initial program load (IPL) the software or power-on reset (POR) the
hardware. Making changes while the system is running is known as dynamic configuration or
dynamic reconfiguration.
• Console operations
The operation of an MVS system involves the following:
− Console operations or how operators interact with MVS to monitor or control the hardware and
software.
− Message and command processing that forms the basis of operator interaction with MVS and
the basis of MVS automation.
Operating MVS involves managing hardware such as processors and peripheral devices (including
the consoles where your operators do their work) and software such as the MVS operating control
system, the job entry subsystem, subsystems such as NetView that can control automated
operations and all the applications that run on MVS.
Planning MVS operations for a system must take into account how operators use consoles to do
their work and how you want to manage messages and commands. Because messages are also
the basis of automated operations, understanding message processing in an MVS system can help
you plan MVS automation.

1.5.1.1 Managing Operations

Also involved are the business goals and policies established by the installation to allow the
installation to grow and handle work efficiently. These needs, of course, vary from installation to
installation, but they are important when you plan your MVS operations.

Managing the complexity of MVS requires you to think about the particular needs of the installation.
However, any installation might consider the following goals when planning its MVS operations:
• Increasing system availability
Many installations need to ensure that their system and its services are available and operating to
meet service level agreements. Installations with 24-hour, 7-day operations need to plan for
minimal disruption of their operation activities. In terms of MVS operations, how the installation
establishes console recovery or whether an operator must re-IPL a system to change processing
options are important planning considerations.
• Controlling operating activities and functions
As more installations make use of multisystem environments, the need to coordinate the operating
activities of those systems becomes crucial. Even for single MVS systems, an installation needs to
think about controlling communication between functional areas (such as a tape-pool library and
the master console area, for example). In both single and multisystem environments, the

32 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 commands operators can issue from consoles can be a security concern that requires careful
coordination. As a planner, you want to make sure that the right people are doing the right tasks
when they interact with MVS. If your installation uses remote operations to control target systems,
you also need to decide about controlling those activities from the host system.
• Simplifying operator tasks
Because the complexity of operating MVS has increased, an installation needs to think about the
tasks and skills of its operators. How operators respond to messages at their consoles and how
you can reduce or simplify their actions are important to operations planning. Also, your
installation needs to plan MVS operator tasks in relation to any automated operations that help
simplify those tasks.
• Streamlining message flow and command processing
In thinking about operator tasks, an installation needs to consider how to manage messages and
commands. Operators need to respond to messages. Routing messages to operator consoles,
suppressing messages to help your operators manage increased message traffic, or selecting
messages for automated operations can all help you manage system activity efficiently.
• Single system image
Single system image allows the operator, for certain tasks, to interact with several images of a
product as though they were one image. For example, the operator can issue a single command
to all MVS systems in the sysplex instead of repeating the command for each system.
• Single point of control
Single point of control allows the operator to interact with a suite of products from a single
workstation. An operator can accomplish a set of tasks from a single workstation, thereby
reducing the number of consoles the operator has to manage.

Chapter 1. Introduction 33
Figure 21. Requirements for Install

1.5.2 Requirements for install

To be able to install and customize an OS/390 operating system, a system programmer has to know
certain basic skills and functions. Using these skills is documented in this book. The visual lists the
following areas about which a programmer needs to know:
TSO/E TSO/E is Time Sharing Option Extensions. It is an option of the OS/390 operating
system that allows users to interactively share computer time and resources.
TSO/E is a base interactive interface that provides system programmers, non-DP
professionals, end users, application programmers, and administrators with an
extensive set of commands, services, facilities and programming languages to do
productive work on OS/390, and helps to ease systems management. TSO/E is an
integral part of OS/390, and serves as a platform for other elements, such as
BookManager READ/MVS, HCD, and ISPF.
ISPF/PDF The Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF) and its Program Development
Facility (ISPF/PDF) work together with TSO/E to provide panels with which users can
interact. ISPF provides the underlying dialog management service that displays
panels and enables a user to navigate through the panels. ISPF/PDF is a dialog of
ISPF that helps maintain libraries of information in TSO/E and allows a user to manage
the library through facilities such as browse, edit, and utilities.

34 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Batch JCL During the install phase of OS/390, many batch jobs are required to be submitted. The
JCL for these jobs need to be updated for your environment. Therefore, it is essential
that a system programmer be very familiar with JCL and batch job submission from
TSO/E and using ISPF.
Storage Storage concepts must be understood by the system programmer in setting up an
OS/390 environment.
Device I/O An I/O configuration is the hardware resources available to the operating system and
the connections between these resources. The resources include:
• Channels
• ESCON Directors (switches)
• Control units
• Devices
When you define a configuration, you need to provide both physical and logical
information about these resources. For example, when defining a device you provide
physical information, such as its type and model, as well as logical information such
as the identifier you will assign in the configuration definition.
You must define an I/O configuration to the operating system (software) and the
channel subsystem (hardware). The Hardware Configuration Definition (HCD)
component of MVS consolidates the hardware and software I/O configuration
processes under a single interactive end-user interface.
Processors When more than one processor exists in a complex or more than one logical partition
exists in a complex, OS/390 is required to be defined in multisystem mode or a
sysplex.
Consoles A console configuration consists of the various consoles that operators use to
communicate with OS/390. Your installation first defines the I/O devices it can use as
consoles with the hardware configuration definition (HCD). HCD manages the I/O
configuration for the OS/390 system. Once you have defined the devices, indicate to
OS/390 which devices to use as consoles by specifying the appropriate device
numbers in the CONSOLxx parmlib member.

Chapter 1. Introduction 35
Figure 22. Installing OS/390

1.6 Installing OS/390

Because the base elements and optional features of OS/390 are integrated into a single package with
compatible service levels, you must install, with few exceptions, the entire OS/390 product.

You can install OS/390 using one of several IBM packages. Two of these packages are available at no
additional charge when you license OS/390:
• ServerPac
• CBPDO

Other installation packages and offerings are available for a fee.

When you order a new system or a new release of OS/390, you also receive all the new maintenance
or service that is applicable to the release.

1.6.1 Maintenance or service using SMP/E

All executable operating system code is subject to errors. Any errors in the code are fixed by IBM and
made available to installations in the form of either an authorized program analysis report (APAR) or
program temporary fix (PTF). IBM provides a product to help you maintain or apply maintenance to
your system. It is called System Modification Program Extended (SMP/E).

SMP/E is a tool designed to manage the installation of software products on your OS/390 system, and

36 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

to track the modifications you make to those products. Usually, it is the system programmer′ s
responsibility to ensure that all software products and their modifications are properly installed on the
system. The system programmer also has to ensure that all products are installed at the proper level
so all elements of the system can work together. At first, that might not sound too difficult, but as the
complexity of the software configuration increases, so does the task of monitoring all the elements of
the system.

1.6.2 Choosing an install package

The best installation method is usually the one that requires the least amount of work for you. IBM
recommends the following:
• If you are new to OS/390 and never had a previous system, use either a fee service or ServerPac′ s
full system replacement option.
• If you′re migrating from VM or VSE, use a fee service.
• If you′re migrating from a level of products available before the general availability of MVS/ESA SP
4.3 (June of 1992), or if you′re running unsupported levels of products, use a fee service or
ServerPac′s full system replacement.
• If you′re migrating from MVS/ESA SP 4.3 or above, or any release of OS/390, use any method
(ServerPac, CBPDO, or fee service).

Chapter 1. Introduction 37
Figure 23. Installing OS/390 - ServerPac

1.6.3 Installing OS/390 using ServerPac

ServerPac is a software delivery package consisting of products and service for which IBM has
performed the SMP/E installation steps and some of the post-SMP/E installation steps. To install the
package on your system and complete the installation of the software it includes, you use the
CustomPac Installation Dialog.

An OS/390 ServerPac order contains an Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF) dialog that you
use to install OS/390. This dialog is called the CustomPac Installation Dialog because it is used to
install all of IBM′s CustomPac offerings, for example, ServerPac, SystemPac, FunctionPac, ProductPac,
and ServicePac.

When ordering a ServerPac:

• IBM selects the products that were ordered.
• IBM integrates products and selected service into target and distribution libraries and their SMP/E
zones.
• IBM enables the features that you ordered that use dynamic enablement.
• IBM verifies the resulting system for the specific package by doing an IPL, submitting a job, logging
on to TSO/E, and checking the job′s output. IBM performs this test using the operational data sets
supplied with the ServerPac. If you use the software upgrade path when installing a ServerPac,
you will use your own existing operational data sets, so this test will not assure that the system

38 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 will IPL in your environment. However, it does make sure that the software itself can be used to
IPL given a usable set of operational data sets.
• IBM selects all unintegrated service for products ordered and includes it on a service tape.

Chapter 1. Introduction 39
Figure 24. Installing OS/390 - CBPDO

1.6.4 Installing OS/390 using CBPDO

The Custom-Built Product Delivery Option (CPBDO) is a software delivery package consisting of
uninstalled products and unintegrated service. You must use SMP/E to install the individual OS/390
elements and features, and their service, before you can IPL.

To order CBPDO, use an order checklist (available from an IBM representative, the OS/390 Web site,
or IBMLink via the configurator). The order is for a unique system release identifier (SREL). IBM
recommends that you order all products that you maintain in the same OS/390 product set.

To order CBPDO, use an order checklist (available from an IBM representative, the OS/390 Web site,
or IBMLink via the configurator). The order is for a unique system release identifier (SREL). IBM
recommends that you order only OS/390 elements and features (or their equivalent stand-alone
products) in your CBPDO order. (Ordering equivalent levels of nonexclusive elements does not
increase the size of the CBPDO because the FMIDs are the same, but it does enable the IFAPRD00
PARMLIB member to be built correctly.) If you need to update other products, place a separate
CBPDO order for these products.

When ordering a ServerPac:

• IBM selects the products that were ordered.
• IBM selects service for the products you order and for products that are already licensed under the
same customer number you use to place your order.

40 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

• IBM builds a customized job stream to enable the features that you ordered that use dynamic
enablement.
• IBM builds a customized job stream to enable selected features that use the registration service.

Chapter 1. Introduction 41
Figure 25. Installing OS/390 Using Fee-Based Packages

1.6.5 Installing OS/390 using fee-based packages

Instead of using ServerPac or CBPDO to install OS/390, you could, for an additional fee, use one of the
following services:
• SystemPac tailors OS/390 to your environment (such as DASD layout, migration of MVSCP/IOCP to
IODF, and naming conventions) based on information provided to IBM. With this offering, selected
non-IBM products can be integrated. This offering can be delivered in IEBCOPY dump-by-data-set
format or in full volume dump format.
• SoftwareXcel Installation Express (SIE), available in the U.S. only, provides prebuilt OS/390 system
packages in full volume dump format, tailored to customer hardware and software configurations.
SIE includes on-site planning, installation, and package testing. SIE creates a compatibility
research report for up to 70 non-IBM software products if requested. SIE can also include selected
non-IBM software products integrated into the system package.
• The Entry Server Offering (available in some countries) is a packaged solution that includes
hardware, software, installation services, maintenance and financing to help customers get to
current technology.
• Other fee-based help includes Washington System Center services, customized solutions,
hardware services, and software services.

42 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Chapter 2. OS/390 Storage Concepts

This chapter describes many of the OS/390 storage concepts that system programmers need to know
to do their job. Many of the concepts needed by system programmers to do their job are as follows:
• Address spaces
• Subsystem definitions
• Virtual storage layouts for address spaces
• How storage in managed by OS/390
• How processor storage is managed

The initialization process begins when the system operator selects the LOAD function at the system
console. MVS locates all of the usable central storage that is online and available to the system, and
creates a virtual environment for the building of various system areas.

Processor storage consists of central storage plus expanded storage. The system uses a portion of
both central storage and virtual storage. To determine how much central storage is available to the
installation, the system′s fixed storage requirements must be subtracted from the total central storage.
The central storage available to an installation can be used for the concurrent execution of the
paged-in portions of any installation programs.

To tailor the system′s storage parameters, you need a general understanding of the system
initialization and storage initialization processes.

The system initialization process prepares the system control program and its environment to do work
for the installation. The process essentially consists of:
• System and storage initialization, including the creation of system component address spaces.
• Master scheduler initialization and subsystem initialization.

When the system is initialized and the job entry subsystem is active, the installation can submit jobs
for processing by using the START, LOGON, or MOUNT command.

In addition to initializing system areas, MVS establishes system component address spaces. MVS
establishes an address space for the master scheduler (the master scheduler address space) and
other system address spaces for various subsystems and system components. Some of the component
address spaces are:
• Program call/authorization for cross-memory communications
• System trace
• Global resource serialization
• Dumping services.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 43

Figure 26. OS/390 address spaces

2.1 OS/390 Address Spaces

When you start OS/390, master scheduler initialization routines initialize system services such as the
system log and communications task, and start the master scheduler address space, which becomes
address space number one (ASID=1). Other system address spaces are then started during the
initialization process of OS/390.

Then the subsystem address spaces are started. The master scheduler starts the job entry subsystem
(JES2 or JES3). JES is the primary job entry subsystem. Then other defined subsystems are started.
All subsystems are defined in SYS1.PARMLIB, member IEFSSNxx. These subsystems are secondary
subsystems.

The visual shows four types of address spaces as follows:

System The system address spaces are started following initialization of the master scheduler.
These address spaces perform functions for all the other types of address spaces that
start in an OS/390 system.
Subsystem You cannot run OS/390 without a primary job entry subsystem, either JES2 or JES3.
TSO logon These address spaces start when a user issues a logon to TSO/E. Each user executes in
a separate address space.
Batch job These address spaces are started by JES when a JCL stream is passed to JES and a job
is created and then subsequently scheduled into execution.

44 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 27. Subsystem definitions

2.1.1 Subsystem definitions

Subsystem initialization is the process of readying a subsystem for use in the system. IEFSSNxx
members of SYS1.PARMLIB contain the definitions for the primary subsystems, such as JES2 or JES3,
and the secondary subsystems, such as SMS and DB2. For detailed information about the data
contained in IEFSSNxx members for secondary systems, refer to the installation manual for the specific
subsystem. IEFSSNxx allows you to specify the following:
• The subsystem initialization routine to be given control during master scheduler initialization.
• The input parameter string to be passed to the subsystem initialization routine.
• A primary subsystem name and whether you want it started automatically.

The order in which the subsystems are initialized depends on the order in which they are defined in
the IEFSSNxx parmlib member on the SSN parameter. Unless you are starting the storage
management subsystem (SMS), start the primary subsystem (JES) first.
Note: The storage management subsystem (SMS) is the only subsystem that can be defined before
the primary subsystem.

Some subsystems require the services of the primary subsystem in their initialization routines.
Problems can occur if subsystems that use the subsystem affinity service in their initialization routines
are initialized before the primary subsystem. If you are starting SMS, specify its record before you
specify the primary subsystem record.

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 45

Note: In general, it is a good idea to make the subsystem name the same as the name of the member
of SYS1.PROCLIB used to start the subsystem. If the name does not match, you may receive error
messages when you start the subsystem.

The SSN parameter in IEASYSxx identifies the IEFSSNxx member that the system is to use to initialize
the subsystems, as follows:
SSN= {aa }
{(aa,bb,...) }

The two-character identifier, represented by aa (or bb, and so forth), i appended to IEFSSN to identify
IEFSSNxx members of parmlib. If the SSN parameter is not specified, the system uses the IEFSSN00
parmlib member.

The order in which the subsystems are defined on the SSN parameter is the order in which they are
initialized. For example, a specification of SSN=(13,Z5) would cause those subsystems defined in the
IEFSSN13 parmlib member to be initialized first, followed by those subsystems defined in the IEFSSNZ5
parmlib member.
Note: If you specify duplicate subsystem names in IEFSSNxx parmlib members, the system issues
message IEFJ003I to the SYSLOG, the master console, and consoles that monitor routing code 10
messages.

46 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 28. S/390 storage

2.2 Processor Storage Overview

Processor storage consists of central storage plus expanded storage. The system uses a portion of
both central storage and virtual storage. To determine how much central storage is available to the
installation, the system′s fixed storage requirements must be subtracted from the total central storage.
The central storage available to an installation can be used for the concurrent execution of the
paged-in portions of any installation programs.
Note: Each installation is responsible for establishing many of the central storage parameters that
govern RSM′s processing.
Central Central storage often referred to as main storage, provides the system with directly
addressable fast-access storage of data. Both data and programs must be loaded into
central storage (from input devices) before they can be processed. Main storage may
include one or more smaller faster-access buffer storages, sometimes called caches. A
cache is usually physically associated with a CPU or an I/O processor. The effects,
except on performance, of the physical construction and use of distinct storage media are
not observable by the program.
Expanded Expanded storage may be available on some models. Expanded storage, when available,
can be accessed by all CPUs in the configuration by means of instructions that transfer 4
KB blocks of data from expanded storage to main storage or from main storage to
expanded storage. Each 4 KB block in expanded storage is addressed by means of a
32-bit unsigned binary integer called an expanded-storage block number.

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 47

CPU The central processing unit (CPU) is the controlling center of the system. It contains the
sequencing and processing facilities for instruction execution, interruption action, timing
functions, initial program loading and other machine-related functions.
The physical implementation of the CPU may differ among models, but the logical function
remains the same. The result of executing an instruction is the same for each model,
providing that the program complies with the compatibility rules.
The CPU, in executing instructions, can process binary integers and floating-point
numbers of fixed length, decimal integers of variable length, and logical information of
either fixed or variable length. Processing may be in parallel or in series; the width of the
processing elements, the multiplicity of the shifting paths, and the degree of simultaneity
in performing the different types of arithmetic differ from one CPU to another without
affecting the logical results.
Auxiliary An installation needs auxiliary direct access storage devices (DASD) for placement of all
system data sets. Enough auxiliary storage must be available for the programs and data
that comprise the system. Auxiliary storage used to support basic system requirements
has three logical areas as follows:
• System data set storage area
• Paging data sets for backup of all pageable address spaces
• Swap data sets used for LSQA pages and private area pages that are swapped in
with the address space (also called the working set )

48 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 29. Storage managers

2.3 Storage managers

In an OS/390 system, storage is managed by the following storage components managers:

Real The real storage manager (RSM) controls the allocation of central storage during
initialization and pages in user or system functions for execution. Some RSM functions:
• Allocate central storage to satisfy GETMAIN requests for SQA and LSQA
• Allocate central storage for page fixing
• Allocate central storage for an address space that is to be swapped in
• Allocate and initialize control blocks and queues related to expanded storage
Virtual Each installation can use virtual storage parameters to specify how certain virtual storage
areas are to be allocated. These parameters have an impact on central storage use and
overall system performance.
Auxiliary The auxiliary storage manager code controls the use of page and swap data sets. As a
system programmer, you are responsible for:
• Page and swap operations
• Page and swap data set sizes
• Space calculation
• Performance of page and swap data sets
• Estimating the total size of the paging data sets

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 49

Figure 30. Virtual storage manager

2.3.1 Virtual Storage Manager

Virtual storage is managed by the virtual storage manager (VSM). Its main function is to distribute the
virtual storage among all requests.

Virtual storage is requested with the GETMAIN or STORAGE OBTAIN macro and returned to the virtual
storage manager with the FREEMAIN or STORAGE RELEASE macro.

50 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 31. Virtual storage

2.3.2 Virtual Storage

Virtual storage is normally larger than main storage (called real storage in OS/390). The size of real
storage depends on the CPU type. In a computing system without virtual storage, a program cannot
be executed unless there is enough storage to hold it. In addition the complete storage used is
allocated until it is finished.

An OS/390 program resides in virtual storage and only parts of the program currently active need to be
in real storage at processing time. The inactive parts are held in auxiliary storage, DASD devices,
called page data sets. An active virtual storage page resides in a real storage frame. An inactive
virtual storage page resides in a auxiliary storage slot. Moving pages between frames and slots is
called paging .

2.3.2.1 Estimating Virtual Storage

Estimating the virtual storage allocated at an installation is important primarily because this storage
must be backed up by central storage in some ratio (for example, 25%). This backup storage
contributes significantly to an installation′s total central storage requirements.

Virtual storage must also be backed up by expanded storage or auxiliary storage. Each installation
can use virtual storage parameters to specify how certain virtual storage areas are to be allocated.
These parameters have an impact on central storage use and overall system performance.

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 51

2.3.2.2 Virtual Storage Address Space

A two-gigabyte virtual storage address space is provided for:

• The master scheduler address space
• JES
• Other system component address spaces, such as allocation, system trace, system management
facilities (SMF), and dumping services
• Each user (batch or TSO/E).

The system uses a portion of each virtual address space. Each virtual address space consists of:
• The common area below 16 megabytes
• The private area below 16 megabytes
• The extended common area above 16 megabytes
• The extended private area above 16 megabytes.

52 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 32. Multiple address spaces

2.3.2.3 Multiple Address Spaces

The system uses a portion of each virtual address space.

Each virtual address space consists of:

• The common area below 16 MB
• The private area below 16 MB
• The extended common area above 16 MB
• The extended private area above 16 MB

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 53

Figure 33. Address space storage

2.4 Address space storage

Estimating the virtual storage allocated at an installation is important primarily because this storage
must be backed up by central storage in some ratio (for example, 25%). This backup storage
contributes significantly to an installation′s total central storage requirements.

Virtual storage must also be backed up by expanded storage or auxiliary storage. Each installation
can use virtual storage parameters to specify how certain virtual storage areas are to be allocated.
These parameters have an impact on central storage use and overall system performance. The
following overview describes the function of each virtual storage area.

A two-gigabyte (2-GB) virtual storage address space is provided for:

• The master scheduler address space
• JES
• Other system component address spaces, such as allocation, system trace, system management
facilities (SMF), and dumping services
• Each user (batch or TSO/E).

The system uses a portion of each virtual address space. Each virtual address space consists of:
• The common area below 16 MB
• The private area below 16 MB
• The extended common area above 16 MB
• The extended private area above 16 MB

54 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

The common area contains system control programs and control blocks. The following storage areas
are located in the common area:
• Prefixed storage area (PSA)
• Common service area (CSA)
• Pageable link pack area (PLPA)
• Fixed link pack area (FLPA)
• Modified link pack area (MLPA)
• System queue area (SQA)
• Nucleus, which is fixed and nonswappable

Each storage area in the common area (below 16 MB) has a counterpart in the extended common area
(above 16 MB) with the exception of the PSA.

Each address space uses the same common area. Portions of the common area are paged in and out
as the demands of the system change and as new user jobs (batch or time-shared) start and old ones
terminate.

The private area contains:

• A local system queue area (LSQA)
• A scheduler work area (SWA)
• Subpools 229, 230, and 249 (the authorized user key area)
• A 16 KB system region area
• Either a V=V (virtual = virtual) or V=R (virtual = real) private user region for running programs
and storing data

Except for the 16 KB system region area and V=R user regions, each storage area in the private area
below 16 MB has a counterpart in the extended private area above 16 MB.

Each address space has its own unique private area allocation. The private area (except LSQA) is
pageable unless a user specifies a V=R region. If assigned as V=R, the actual V=R region area
(excluding SWA, the 16 KB system region area, and subpools 229, 230, and 249) is fixed and
nonswappable.

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 55

Figure 34. Common versus private area

2.4.1.1 Common Area

The common area contains system control programs and control blocks. The following storage areas
are located in the common area:
• Prefixed storage area (PSA)
• Common service area (CSA)
• Pageable link pack area (PLPA)
• Fixed link pack area (FLPA)
• Modified link pack area (MLPA)
• System queue area (SQA)
• Nucleus, which is fixed and nonswappable
Each storage area in the common area (below 16 MB) has a counterpart in the extended common area
(above 16 MB) with the exception of the PSA.

Each address space uses the same common area. Portions of the common area are paged in and out
as the demands of the system change and as new user jobs (batch or time-shared) start and old ones
terminate.

56 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

2.4.1.2 Private Area
The private area contains:
• A local system queue area (LSQA).
• A scheduler work area (SWA).
• Subpools 229, 230, and 249 (the authorized user key area).
• A 16 KB system region area.
• Either a V=V (virtual = virtual) or V=R (virtual = real) private user region for running programs
and storing data.

Except for the 16 KB system region area and V=R user regions, each storage area in the private area
below 16 MB has a counterpart in the extended private area above 16 MB.

Except for the 16 KB system region area and V=R user regions, each storage area in the private area
below 16 MB has a counterpart in the extended private area above 16 MB.

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 57

Figure 35. System Queue Area (SQA/Extended SQA)

2.4.1.3 System Queue Area (SQA/Extended SQA)

This area contains tables and queues relating to the entire system. Its contents are highly dependent
on configuration and job requirements at an installation. The total amount of virtual storage and
number of private virtual storage address spaces are two of the factors that affect the system′s use of
SQA.

The SQA is allocated directly below the nucleus; the extended SQA is allocated directly above the
extended nucleus.

The size of the SQA can be specified through the:

• SQA parameter in the IEASYSxx member of SYS1.PARMLIB
• NIP or operator′s console
Virtual SQA is allocated as a number of 64 KB blocks to be added to the minimum system
requirements for SQA. If the SQA required by the system configuration exceeds the amount that has
been reserved through the SQA parameter, the system attempts to allocate additional virtual SQA from
the CSA area. If less than eight frames (below 16 MB) remain for allocation purposes, the systems
stops creating new address spaces. When SQA is in use, it is fixed in central storage.

The size of the SQA cannot be increased or decreased by the operator during a restart that reuses the
previously initialized PLPA (a quick start). The size will be the same as during the preceding IPL.

58 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 36. Commom service area

2.4.1.4 Common Service Area (CSA/Extended CSA)

This area contains pageable and fixed data areas that are addressable by all active virtual storage
address spaces. CSA normally contains data referenced by a number of system address spaces,
enabling address spaces to communicate by referencing the same piece of CSA data.

CSA is allocated directly below the MLPA; extended CSA is allocated directly above the extended
MLPA. If the virtual SQA space is depleted, the system will allocate additional SQA space from the
CSA. The size of the CSA is specified by:
• The SYSP parameter at the operator′s console to specify an alternative system parameter list
(IEASYSxx) that contains a CSA specification.
• The CSA parameter at the operator′s console during system initialization. This value overrides the
current system parameter value for CSA that was established by IEASYS00 or IEASYSxx.
Note: If the size allocated for extended SQA is too small or is used up very quickly, the system
attempts to steal space from extended CSA. When both extended SQA and extended CSA are used
up, the system allocates space from SQA and CSA below 16 MB. The allocation of this storage could
eventually lead to a system failure. Ensuring the appropriate size of extended SQA and extended CSA
storage is critical to the long-term operation of the system.

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 59

Figure 37. Nucleus

2.4.1.5 Nucleus
The nucleus area contains the nucleus load module and extensions to the nucleus that are initialized
during IPL processing.

The modules to be added to the nucleus region, or deleted from it, must reside in members of
SYS1.NUCLEUS. To add or delete modules, simply specify the members on INCLUDE or EXCLUDE
statements in NUCLSTxx.

The nucleus is always fixed storage.

60 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 38. Region

2.4.1.6 Region
The portion of the user′s private area within each virtual address space that is available to the user′ s
problem programs is called the user region.

In MVS, the storage available for a program is virtual storage or centra storage (also called real
storage):
Virtual storage Virtual storage is addressable space that appears to the user as central (real)
storage. Instructions and data are mapped from virtual storage into central storage
locations, where they are executed.
Central storage Central (real) storage is the storage from which the processor can directly obtain
instructions and data and to which it can directly return results.

The virtual storage address space is 2 gigabytes. The address space contains the commonly
addressable system storage, the nucleus, and the private address space, which includes the user′ s
region. When a program is selected, the system brings it into virtual storage and divides it into pages
of 4K bytes. The system transfers the pages of a program into central (real) storage for execution and
out to auxiliary storage when not needed. Paging is done automatically; to the programmer the entire
program appears to occupy contiguous space in central storage at all times. Actually, not all pages of
a program are necessarily in central storage at one time. Also, the pages that are in central storage
do not necessarily occupy contiguous space.

For a complete explanation about region, refer to OS/390 Initialization and Tuning Guide , SC28-1751,
and OS/390 Initialization and Tuning Reference , SC28-1752.

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 61

Figure 39. Data space

2.4.1.7 Data Space

Another type of address space is called a data space . A data space has a range up to 2 GB of
contiguous virtual storage that a user can ask the system for. Within a data space, all addresses,
except the first 4 KB (PSA), are available because there are no common areas as in the nucleus, SQA
or LSQA. A data space can hold only data; it does not contain MVS control blocks.

62 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 40. Multiprogramming and multiprocessing

2.4.1.8 Multiprogramming
Many programs may be in the system at the same time, each in its own address space. In a single
processor only one of these programs can be active at a time. However, the active program may lose
control anytime because of interrupts. The SCP selects which program should get control next.

2.4.1.9 Multiprocessing
Multiprocessing is a logical expansion of multiprogramming. It means the execution of more than one
program (task) simultaneously on more than one processor. All processors operate under a single
SCP.

Remember:
• Each processor has a current PSW, its own set of registers, and assigned storage locations.
• When a single processor shares real storage with other processors, then all of them are controlled
by a single SCP. This is called a tightly coupled multiprocessing complex .
• When a single processor shares a common workload with others, but does not share real storage,
this is called a loosely coupled multiprocessing complex .

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 63

Figure 41. Real storage manager

2.4.2 Real Storage Manager

The task of the Real Storage Manager (RSM) is to control the usage of real storage frames. RSM acts
together with the auxiliary storage manager to support the virtual storage concept, and with VSM to
ensure that a GETMAINed page will be backed up with a real storage frame. Furthermore, RSM
establishes many services to other components and application programs to manipulate the status of
pages and frames.

RSM controls the allocation of central storage during initialization and pages in user or system
functions for execution. Some RSM functions are to:
• Allocate central storage to satisfy GETMAIN requests for SQA and LSQA
• Allocate central storage for page fixing
• Allocate central storage for an address space that is to be swapped in
• Allocate and initialize control blocks and queues related toexpande expanded storage

If there is storage above 16 megabytes, RSM allocates central storage locations above 16 megabytes
for SQA, LSQA, and the pageable requirement of the system. When non-fixed pages are fixed for the
first time, RSM:
• Ensures that the pages occupy the appropriate type of frame
• Fixes the pages and records the type of frame used

64 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

2.4.2.1 Expanded Storage

Expanded storage can be thought of as an expansion of central storage. The purpose of expanded
storage is to reduce the paging and swapping of pages between central storage and auxiliary storage,
and thus enhance system performance. Because moving a page between central storage and
expanded storage is much faster than I/O, use of expanded storage can provide a significant
performance advantage.

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 65

Figure 42. Auxiliary storage manager

2.4.3 Auxiliary Storage Managers

Auxiliary storage manager (ASM) is the component of the OS/390 system that is responsible for
transferring virtual pages between real and auxiliary storage. This is done as either a paging
operation (one page at time) or as a swapping operation (an address space at a time). AMS manages
the transfer by initiating the I/O and by maintaining tables to reflect the current status of auxiliary
storage.

Enough auxiliary storage must be available for the programs and data that comprise the system.
Auxiliary storage used to support basic system requirements has three logical areas:
• System data set storage area.
• Paging data sets for backup of all pageable address spaces.
• Swap data sets used for LSQA pages and private area pages that are swapped in with the address
space (also called the working set )

For more information, see OS/390 Initialization and Tuning Guide , SC28-1751.

66 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 43. Frame, slots and pages

2.4.3.1 Frames, Pages and Slots

The parts of a program executing in virtual storage must be moved between real and auxiliary storage.

To allow this, OS/390 breaks the storage into blocks:

• A block of real storage is a frame .
• A block of virtual storage is a page .
• A block of virtual storage is a slot .

A frame, page and slot are all of the same size, 4 KB.

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 67

Figure 44. Paging and swapping

2.4.4 Paging and Swapping

The paging and swapping controllers of the auxiliary storage manager (ASM) attempt to maximize I/O
efficiency by incorporating a set of algorithms to distribute the I/O load as evenly as is practical. In
addition, every effort is made to keep the system operable in situations where a shortage of a specific
type of page (swap) space exists.

RSM uses expanded storage as an extension of central storage. When a page is to be removed from
central storage, RSM first considers moving it to expanded storage instead of auxiliary storage. When
a page that is needed is not in central storage, RSM first checks expanded storage for the page. If the
page is in expanded storage, RSM synchronously retrieves the page. If the page is not in expanded
storage, RSM calls ASM to schedule asynchronously the paging I/O to retrieve the page from auxiliary
storage.

When contention for expanded storage increases, the system removes pages from expanded storage
to free expanded storage frames. RSM first moves the pages from expanded storage to central
storage. RSM then calls ASM to schedule the paging I/O necessary to send these pages to auxiliary
storage. This process is called migration. Migration completes when the pages are actually sent to
auxiliary storage.

RSM is responsible for reclaiming the central storage allocated to an address space when the address
space is to be swapped out of central storage. RSM is also responsible for building the control
structures necessary to efficiently swap the address space back into central storage. When an address
space is swapped out of central storage, RSM works with SRM to identify the working set pages that
will be swapped back into central storage.

68 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 45. Paging operation

2.4.4.1 Paging
To page efficiently and expediently, ASM divides the pages of the system into classes, namely PLPA,
common, and local. Contention is reduced when these classes of pages are placed on different
physical devices. Although the system requires only one local page data set, performance
improvement can be obtained when local page data sets are distributed on more than one device,
even though some devices may be large enough to hold the entire amount of necessary page space.
The PLPA and common page data sets are both required data sets, and there can be only one of each.
Spillage back and forth between the PLPA and common page data sets is permissible, but, in the
interest of performance, only spilling from PLPA to common should be tolerated.

The pages data sets are:

• PLPA page data set: this contains pageable link pack area. (There is only one.)
• Common page data set: this contains the non-PLPA virtual pages of the system common area.
(There is only one.)
• Local page data set: this contains the private area (address space) pages, and space for any VIO
data sets. Local page data sets can be dynamically added to and deleted from the paging
configuration without re-IPLing the system.(There are one or more.)
• Duplex page data set: this is an optional data set, used when duplexing of the common area is
requested.

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 69

Figure 46. Swapping operation

2.4.4.2 Swapping

Swapping is the primary function used by SRM to exercise control over distribution of resources and
system throughput. Using information specified by the installation through IPS and OPT parameters,
and system status information that is periodically monitored, SRM determines which address spaces
should have access to system resources.

In addition to the swapping controls described in the following text, SRM also provides an optional
swap-in delay to limit the response time of TSO/E transactions.

There are several reasons for swapping. Some swaps are used for control of domains and the
competition for resources between individual address spaces within a domain, while others provide
control over system-wide performance and help increase the throughput.

ASM sends LSQA and private area working set pages to swap data sets as long as the data sets are
defined and contain free space. A swap data set consists of groups of 4096-byte slots called swap sets .
Each swap set consists of 12 contiguous slots. Swap data sets use only one seek per swap set. To
ensure this seek efficiency, ASM prevents the swap set from crossing cylinder boundaries and uses
the direct access device multi-track feature.

If ASM finds no swap sets, it uses a local page data set.

ASM frees swap sets immediately upon swap-in; that is, swap pages are valid on the swap data set
only for that period between swap-out and swap-in.

70 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 47. Program execution

2.5 Program execution

An OS/390 system may appear to be one big block of code that drives your CPU. Actually, OS/390 is a
complex system comprised of many different smaller blocks of code. Each of those smaller blocks of
code perform a specific function within the system.

Each system function is composed of one or more load modules. In an OS/390 environment, a load
module represents the basic unit of machine-readable executable code. Load modules are created by
combining one or more object modules and processing them with a link-edit utility. The link-editing of
modules is a process that resolves external references and addresses. The functions on your system,
therefore, are one or more object modules that have been combined and link-edited.

Chapter 2. OS/390 Concepts 71

72 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming
Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management

This chapter provides guidelines for setting up the hardware and software configuration to eliminate
single points of failure. The hardware and software components provide the foundation for continuous
availability, but only when the configuration is set up in a way that provides redundancy of critical
elements, and eliminates inhibitors to the built-in system recovery mechanisms.

This chapter provides considerations for:

• System programmers responsible for defining the hardware configuration to OS/390
• Operators responsible for the availability of the system
• HCD definitions
• Parmlib coding

For I/O management you should understand all the tasks executed in an MVS operating system that
have to do with accessing, storing, and managing for availability and performance. In a sense it
includes the functions executed by the channel subsystem and the I/O control units. This chapter
covers all these items.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 73

Figure 48. Data center

3.1 Data center

This visual shows a typical S/390 data center. As you can see, the complex consists of separate I/O
devices and networks connected through high speed data buses to the central electronic complex
(CEC), which comprises processors, processor storage, and channels. It shows connections among
CECs as well. S/390 architecture provides up to 256 high speed data buses called channels or CHPIDs
per CEC. The different types of channels, including the ones connecting the coupling facility (CF), a
special sort of device, to be covered later in this book are:
• Parallel (S/390 I/O)
• Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON) (S/390 I/O)
• Fiber Connection (FICON) (S/390 I/O)
• Multiprise 2003 and 3000 Internal DASD channels
• Open Systems Adapter-2 (OSA-2) (Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Token-ring, Fiber Distributed Data
Interface (FDDI), 155 Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM))
• OSA Express (Gb Ethernet)
• CF-Link - ISC single mode to coupling facility, which has two types: CFS (the adapter in MVS side)
and CFR (the adapter in the coupling facility side)
• ICB (single mode, low distance, high rate to coupling facility), which has two types: CBS (the
adapter in MVS side) and CBR (the adapter in the coupling facility side)

74 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

In order to communicate with the I/O devices attached to the channels, both the operating system
(MVS) and the channel subsystem (formed by the System Assisted Processor (SAP) and channels)
need to know the I/O configuration, which contains the following types of information:
• What devices are attached to each channel
• The device types
• The device addresses: subchannel number, device number, and device address (also called unit
address)
• What protocols to use
• Channel type

This information is provided by the installation and is mainly stored in unit control blocks (UCB) for
MVS and unit control words (UCW) for the channel subsystem. The hardware configuration definition
facility (HCD) is an MVS component used to create or update the I/O configuration.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 75

Figure 49. Logical processor structure

3.2 Logical processor structure

This visual shows the logical design for the 9672 G6 components. The design is bi-nodal, with two
identical sets of processors. Each of the two sets contains:
• Seven PUs (dual execution units in each) with L1 cache sharing L2 cache.
• 8 MB L2 cache (four chips) for data and instructions.
• Two memory cards.
• Two Memory Bus Adapters (MBAs) connecting six self-timed interconnects (STIs) each.
• 12 STI busses (data pipes) to gather or send I/O data. The STI bandwidth of 333 MB/sec
bidirectional allows I/O data to be moved very fast. The STI busses connect MBA with the ESCON,
Parallel, OSA, ISC, FICON, and ICB channels; then, through the channels, MBA connects to the
CUs, switches, networks, and CFs.
• FICON and OSA-Express are connected to STI in a daisy chain topology. ICB has a dedicated STI,
and for the other channel types, each STI may serve four channels.

76 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 50. Channel subsystem logic

3.3 Channel subsystem

The S/390 channel subsystem contains:

• A special processor unit (PU) called an SAP. A PU is a 9672 processor. SAP is a PU that runs I/O
licensed internal code (LIC). SAP alleviates the CPU involvement during the execution of an I/O
operation. It schedules an I/O operation, but is not in charge of the movement between central
storage (CS) and the channel. SAPs also control data movement between CS and expanded
storage (ES), when the Asynchronous Data Mover Facility (ADMF) is used. ADMF is a fast way to
move data between these two memories (used by DB2 for hiperpool support).
• Channels, which are special processors able to communicate with I/O control units and manage
the movement of data between central storage and these control units. Being more specific, the
channels can:
− Send channel commands from the processor to a CU via electrical signals
− Transfer data during read and write operations
− Receive status at the end of operations
− Receive sense information from control units

An I/O operation starts when a Start Subchannel (SSCH) instruction is executed by the Input Output
Supervisor (IOS), an MVS component, which issues the instruction on behalf of an MVS process. It
ends when an I/O interrupt is received by the CPU (forcing the execution of IOS code again).

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 77

3.3.1 Start Subchannel (SSCH) logic
The Start Subchannel (SSCH) is a privileged instruction issued by the Input Output Supervisor (IOS), an
MVS component, used to start an I/O operation. SSCH has two operands:
• Subchannel number, which is an index to the UCW associated with the I/O device
• Operation Request Block (ORB) address. The ORB contains information about what do to during
the I/O operation; among other fields it contains the channel program address.

The SSCH microcode moves the ORB contents into the respective UCW and places the UCW in an
specific Hardware System Area (HSA) queue named the initiative queue . After that process completes,
the next IOS instruction is executed, allowing the use of the CPU in another task. HSA is a piece of
central storage not addressable by MVS. It is allocated at power-on reset (POR) and contains
microcode work areas, and the I/O configuration (UCWs are stored in HSA) used by the channel
subsystem.

3.3.2 SAP logic

The SAP finds the UCW in the initiative queue and tries to find a channel that succeeds in initial
selection (connects to a control unit and starts the I/O operation). Initial selection may be delayed if:
• All channel paths (serving the device) are busy.
• The ESCON director port is busy.
• The control unit interface is busy.
• The device is busy, due to shared DASD activity or a previous not ended Write Format operation.

During all of these delays, the request is serviced by SAP without MVS awareness. When the I/O
operation finishes (device-end status is presented) SAP queues the UCW (containing all the I/O
operation final status) in the I/O interrupt queue.

SAP uses the I/O configuration information described in the Hardware Configuration Definition (HCD) to
determine which channels and control units can reach a target device.

3.3.3 Interrupt processing

S/390 is an I/O interrupt-driven architecture, as opposed to a polling mechanism. The only exception
to this rule is the handling of the MVS/Coupling Facility communication, where polling is used.

When a CPU I/O interrupt is enabled and the CPU detects the UCW in the interrupt queue, the I/O
interrupt is accepted and the I/O PSWs are asynchronously swapped passing the control back to IOS.
An Interrupt Response Block (IRB) is moved to storage describing the final status of the I/O operation.
Another way to receive this interrupt is by IOS synchronously issuing the test pending interrupt (TPI)
instruction.

Usually, IOS then posts the MVS process waiting for the I/O operation.

In certain error situations the I/O interrupt is not generated within an expected time frame, then the
MVS component Missing Interrupt Handler (MIH), a timer-driven routine, alerts IOS about this
condition.

78 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 51. Multiple paths to a device

3.4 Multiple paths to a device

I/O devices are attached through control units to the channel subsystem. A path is simply a route to a
device.

Control units may be attached to the channel subsystem via more than one channel path, and an I/O
device may be attached to more than one control unit (if the cache is common as in the two halves of
a 9390).

An I/O device may be accessed by an MVS image through as many as eight different channel paths.
Also an I/O device may be accessible to a CEC (channel subsystem) by as many as eight different
channel paths.

The total number of channel paths provided by a channel subsystem depends on the model and the
configuration; the maximum number of channel paths is 256 per CEC.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 79

Figure 52. Device n u m b e r

3.5 Device number

The device number is a kind of nickname for the device. It is assigned at HCD creation by the
installation. It is used to reference the device during the communication by MVS and human beings,
as well as in messages and console commands, JCL, RMF device reports, and at IPL to indicate the
SYSRES device.

A device number is contained in a 16-bit value field, whose valid range is 0000-FFFF, which allows for a
maximum of 65,536 devices. The device number is stored in the UCW (HSA) at power-on reset (POR)
and in UCB at IPL. UCW represents the device from the channel subsystem point of view; a UCB
represents the device from the IOS point of view.

80 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 53. Subchannel n u m b e r

3.6 Subchannel number

The subchannel number is another way for addressing an I/O device. It is a value that is assigned to
the subchannel (UCW) representing the device at POR time. It indicates the relative position of the
UCW in the UCW table. The specific value depends on the position of the statement IODEVICE in the
IOCP.

It is used to reference the device during the communication between MVS and the channel subsystem
as well as during the SSCH instruction and the interrupt processing. The subchannel number was
designed to speed up the search of a UCW during the SSCH processing. The same device accessed
by different logical partitions has one UCW per image. In a G6 the maximum number of UCWs is
80,000.

The subchannel number is expressed in a 16-bit value, whose valid range is 0000-FFFF, allowing for a
maximum of 65,536 devices per MVS image. Stored in the UCB at IPL, it is not declared during HCD
initialization.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 81

Figure 54. Subchannel n u m b e r II

3.6.1 Subchannel number II

This visual shows the offset concept of the subchannel number in the UCW table.

82 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 55. Unit address

3.7 Unit address

The unit address (UA) or device address is used to reference the device during the communication
between a channel and the control unit serving the device. The UA is two-hex digits in the range
00-to-FF stored in the UCW as declared in HCD, and it is transmitted over the I/O interface to the
control unit by the channel.

Each parallel channel supports the full unit address range of 00-to-FF and so allows connection of up to
256 devices. For an ESCON interface, architecturally the control unit supports the full unit-address
range of 00-to-FF and may support up to 256 devices.

The UA has no relationship to the device number or the subchannel number for a device, but care
must be taken during device definition since in HCD the unit address defaults to the last two digits of
the device number, if not explicitly specified. Some control units (3990 control units for example)
attached to S/390 ESCON serial interfaces require a unit address range starting at X ′ 00′ .

The unit address defined in HCD must match the unit address on the control unit where the device has
been physically installed by the hardware service representative.

In the example, the operator issues the V PATH command for device number 2004. A separate I/O
operation must be started for each device. The device number 2004 corresponds to the UA 04 and this
is the address that the channel sends to the control unit.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 83

In summary, the device number is used in communication between an operator and MVS; the
subchannel number is used in communication between MVS and channel subsystem; and the unit
address is used in communication between the channel and the control unit.

84 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 56. Control unit function

3.8 Control unit function

All I/O channels connect to a control unit prior to connecting to the I/O device. The role of the control
unit is to regulate the I/O-device operation. It provides the caching and buffering capabilities
necessary to operate the associated I/O device. It also does error recovery. Today′s control units are
very complex and sometimes are called I/O subsystems. From the programming point of view, most
control unit functions merge with I/O device functions.

The control unit function may be:

• Integrated with the I/O device
• In the CPU
• In a separate control unit

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 85

Figure 57. Parallel channel

3.9 Parallel channel

A parallel channel is the communication protocol and media specification link between a central
electronic complex (CEC) and an I/O control unit (CU) with a parallel interface. It is designed for S/370
or ESA/390 modes. There are two types of parallel channels: byte multiplexor and block multiplexor.

Parallel channels use the parallel S/370 or ESA/390 I/O interface which defines two cables, called
bus-and-tag cables. A bus cable carries information (one byte each way), and a tag cable indicates
the meaning of the information on the bus cable. Bus and tag cables are connected sequentially to the
control units (one after the other control unit). This is often referred to as daisy chaining . The last
control unit on the string is equipped with terminator blocks.

The architectural limit to the number of control units in the chain is 256, but due to physical limitations,
it is restricted to a maximum of eight control units on a channel.

Daisy chaining better utilizes a channel for slow control units, but a single failing control unit or a bad
cable connection can influence other control units chained on the channel. As only one data transfer
can occur up or down a given channel at any one time, daisy chained control units can cause
contention on the channel which can slow down I/O operations and degraded performance. Up to 256
I/O devices can be addressed on a single parallel-I/O interface.

The maximum length of a parallel channel interface is restricted to 400 feet from the processor to the
last control unit in the chain. This is due to electrical skew on the cable.

86 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 58. ESCON channel

3.10 ESCON channel

An ESCON channel, in a general sense, performs the same functions as a parallel channel, as
described in 3.9, “Parallel channel” on page 86.

Going into more detail, we may say that ESCON is essentially a point-to-point (or one to one)
architecture, which establishes a serial protocol and media specification for the communication among
channels and control units. The ESCON channel implementation uses fiber optic technology, ideally
suited for high-speed operation over long distances.

Optical technology is less susceptible to errors caused by electrical noise. Optics also have very low
radiation properties, which make them more secure than electrical cables.

An ESCON channel is made of three pieces:

• ESCON channel itself (a card in the CEC)
• An ESCON port; that is, a connector
• An ESCON link—an optical cable
The point-to-point architecture lets you route data using dynamic switches.

These switches are called 9032 ESCON Directors (ESCD). They can be used to connect multiple
channels to the same control unit, or multiple control units to the same channel. Also, it allows
connecting channels to other channels, and control units to other control units. ESCDs allow longer

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 87

distances and high flexibility in an I/O reconfiguration, mainly in a failure recovery situation. The
directors can be controlled and managed from host-based functions such as ESCON Manager and
HCD. Host systems (when controlling ESCDs) and the ESCDs communicate using channel connections
assigned to specific unit addresses in the ESCD.

ESCON provides bidirectional (not concurrently) serial-bit transmission, in which the communication
protocol is implemented through sequences of special characters and through formatted and
architected defined sets of characters. A sequence is a set of characters in a predefined order used to
signal specific states or transition to states, such as a port entering offline state. The ESCON I/O
interface defines two types of frames, one to control the link and associated elements, and another to
control device operation. Each frame contains addressing information that uniquely identifies the
sender and the receiver.

As stated before, the transmission medium for the ESCON I/O interface is a fiber optic cable.
Physically, it is a pair of optical fibers that provide two dedicated unidirectional serial bit transmission
lines. Information in a single optical fiber always flows in the same direction. Thus, one optical fiber is
used to receive data while the other is used to transmit data.

ESCON Multiple Image Facility (EMIF) allows the same physical channel to be shared among multiple
images from an LPAR.

The ESCON architecture of the S/390 channel subsystem provides:

• Communication from the processors to peripherals
• Multiple path connections to peripherals
• Processor-to-processor communication using serial channel-to-channel connections
• Routing information
• Detection of media connection and disruption
• Identification and verification of paths
• Assists for error recovery
• Support for logical channels
• A logical path to devices

88 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 59. S/390 ESCON concepts

3.11 S/390 ESCON concepts

ESCON and the S/390 architecture introduce extensions to the device addressing scheme described
previously, however, most of the changes are transparent to the application program. The S/390
ESCON changes are made in support of the new channel interfaces, and essentially, the interface
between MVS and the channel subsystem remains the same as for the old S/370 XA architecture.

This visual shows the changes introduced in the ESCON device path structure. The daisy-chained
parallel channel connecting to two different control units is shown for comparison.

3.11.1 ESCON link

An ESCON channel may connect either directly to an ESCON-capable control unit, called a
point-to-point connection, or connect to an ESCON-capable control unit through an ESCON director,
called a switched connection.

The ESCON environment provides increased connectivity by providing for each ESCON channel to
connect to up to 256 links. Each link may attach to a control unit. This visual shows one ESCON
channel connecting to two different ESCON links and hence two different physical control units. One of
them is a CTC (connected to another CEC) and the other refers to a control unit with different images.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 89

3.11.2 Link address
The link address is a two digit hex number, in the range 01-to-FE, that identifies the sender and the
receiver during the communication between an ESCON channel and its control units. In other words,
link addresses are used in the ESCON frame to identify both destination and source link-addresses.
Link addresses 00 and FF are reserved by hardware.

Each port in a ESCD has a port number from 01-FF.

The link address (when the channel is connected to a ESCD) corresponds to the ESCON director port
number where the ESCON link attaches. If the channel is not connected to an ESCD port the link
address is FE.

Imagine for example, a channel (sender) starting a conversation with a control unit (receiver), sending
an ESCON frame through an ESCD. The receiver address is made up of the following elements:
• Link address associated with the ESCD port number of the control unit (passed by the installation in
HCD). This information is used by the ESCD to route a frame originating in the channel port to the
appropriate link port where the physical control unit is connected. The link address value in the
visual is 3A.
• Control unit image (CUADD value). Some physical control units that support single-path devices,
such as the ESCON capable 3174 models 12L and 22L, allow concurrent connections to multiple
hosts through the same physical interface, or control unit adapter. This support is provided
through the use of different Control Unit Images (CUI). As with the link address, the CUI, also
known as the control unit address (cuadd), forms part of the device selection scheme in an ESCON
environment. The control unit image value in the visual is 01.
• Device unit address The device address in the visual is C3.

The sender (or source) address indicates the:

• Channel link address (port number in the ESCD), this information is not provided by the HCD, the
channel obtains this value from the ESCD at initialization.
• LPAR system image ID , to allow the implementation of EMIF.

When responding to the channel, the control unit swaps the receiver address and the sender address
in the new frame.

There are no MVS commands available to display the ESCON components of a path to a device. Only
ESCON Manager commands can display the link addresses used by channels supporting the paths to a
device.

90 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 60. Mapping device n u m b e r i n unit address

3.12 Mapping device number in unit address

This visual shows how in an ESCON environment the device number is mapped to the device address.

The UNIT parameter in the DD card specifies the device number through an esoteric or generic name.
Also, a specific device number may be specified. This information is used to allocate the data set
associated with this DD card.

Allocation of a data set in MVS terms means to associate the data set DD card (through a TIOT, a
control block) with the UCB of the device containing the data set. The UCB has all the information
needed for the preparation of the SSCH instruction by IOS, including the subchannel number.

The channel subsystem, through the SAP, will find in the UCW (through the subchannel number) the
receiver address (link, control unit, and unit address) to be placed in the ESCON frame.

The visual also shows that any operator command that refers to a device uses the device number.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 91

Figure 61. ESCON CUADD function

3.13 ESCON CUADD function

The ESCON I/O interface allows physical control units to define multiple images that can be addressed
separately. These control unit images can control a shared or independent set of devices. The control
unit image can be considered to operate independently from all other control unit images, for example,
each can establish communication with its own channels.

The ESCON models of the 3174 control unit can be configured in either non-SNA or SNA mode. The
visual shows that when the 3174 is configured in non-SNA mode, it operates in single-host mode. That
is, it supports only one logical control unit image. Only one host can establish an ESCON logical path
with the control unit.

When the 3174 is configured in SNA mode, it operates in multi-host mode. It supports up to eight
logical control unit images (do not mix this concept with the logical control unit in channel subsystem)
and therefore up to eight hosts can establish an ESCON logical path with the control unit. Each display
can have from one-to-five sessions. Host session selection is managed by the jump key of the displays
attached to the 3174. Each host must establish an ESCON logical path with the 3174, and the host
session switching is then managed at the ESCON director.

MVS supports a console (NIP or MCS) attached to an ESCON 3174, but only when it is configured in
non-SNA mode. Therefore, it is not possible to share a console device between more than one MVS
image.

92 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

As you can see the 3174 used the CUADD feature to enable single path devices to connect to multiple
hosts.

The RAMAC Virtual Array also uses the CUADD function, but for a different reason. It uses CUADD to
enable its 256 device address to be converted into four CUADD statements with 64 address defined in
each. The effect of the CUADD function in this scenario is to allow the control unit to address more
devices on a channel.

Another use of CUADD is to implement EMIF CTC. Refer to 3.16, “ESCON channel-to-channel (CTC)”
on page 97 for more information about CTC ESCON.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 93

Figure 62. ESCON director (switch)

3.14 ESCON director (switch)

To implement the switching functions of ESCON, a new class of product was introduced. This product,
called ESCON director (ESCD), dynamically connects channels and control units only for the duration of
an I/O operation. The connection is dynamic because it is only held during the conversation. After
that the same port can be used to connect to a different control unit. ESCDs do not introduce delays
and can switch millions of connections per second. ESCDs are the centerpiece of the ESCON topology.

ESCDs switch connections between ports under the direction of the link address as provided by the
channel and the attached ESCON control units within the frames.

Because the ESCD redrives the light signal, it can be used as a channel extender, to communicate
over long distances.

Apart from dynamic switching, the ESCD can also be used for static switching (also called dedicated),
where a port is always connected to another port. When a channel and a control unit are connected
through two ESCDs (for longer distance purposes) one of the connections must be static. The reason is
that in the frame there is just one sender link address and just one receiver link address.

In order to store configurations and handle errors, for example, the director has an integrated control
unit, addressed by the host like any other control unit. The channel subsystem can communicate with
the ESCD just like any other control unit in the ESCON subsystem. The director dynamically switches
I/O requests for itself to its own internal port.

94 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

The director consists of multiple bidirectional ports to which channels and control units may be
attached. The ports are capable of any-to-any connection, but the installation may restrict this access
by:
• Blocking ports (allowing no access at all)
• Prohibiting port-to-port connections
• Dedicating port-to-port connections
• Allowing connections (opposite of prohibiting)
These restrictions can be used for example, to prevent a test MVS system from accessing the
production DASD, but if a disaster happens, automation acting upon the port′s state may reverse the
situation.

The port configuration is held in a switch port matrix in the ESCON director. The port matrix can be
read and written from an attached host using the ESCON Manager. An initial port matrix is held on the
disk of a PC directly-attached to the director; however, this disk data is not directly addressable by the
ESCON Manager and hence cannot be changed remotely.

HCD uses the ESCON Manager to communicate with ESCON directors, and can effect changes only
through the ESCON Manager. There are two types of ESCDs:
• 9032 ESCD has from 28 to 60 external ports (in four-port increments). Each 9032 port provides for
the attachment of any ESCON channel, ESCON extended-distance channel, control unit, 9034 or
9035 ESCON Converter, or another ESCD. The 9032 model 5 may contain the FICON bridge card.
• 9033 ESCD has from 8 to 16 external ports. Each 9033 port provides for the attachment of any
ESCON channel or control unit, 9034 or 9035 ESCON Converter, or another ESCD.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 95

Figure 63. ESCON director matrix

3.15 ESCON director matrix

This foil shows an example of an ESCON switch matrix. The ESCON switch matrix can be stored in a
number of places:
• The active switch data is in the ESCD itself.
• The switch may have a copy of the active configuration on its support console disks.
• The ESCON Manager may have a copy of the active configuration in its working storage, being
worked on as an ISPF table.
• The ESCON Manager may have saved copies of possible configurations in ISPF tables.
• HCD may have configurations stored in the active production IODF.
• HCD may have configurations stored in other production IODFs.
• HCD may have configurations stored in work IODFs.

The recommendation for matrix configuration is to protect all ports and only allow access where
required. This simplifies I/O problem determination and reduces overhead in event notification.

96 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 64. ESCON CTC

3.16 ESCON channel-to-channel (CTC)

An ESCON CTC channel is a standard ESCON channel that is defined in HCD as TYPE=CTC. During
the initialization of the CHPID, the microcode is loaded into the channel to enable it to support the CTC
function on top of the ESCON channel function. There are no external ESCON CTC control units or
devices.

As shown in the visual, an ESCON CTC channel must communicate with an ESCON CNC channel—that
is, a standard ESCON channel. Note that an ESCON CNC channel communicating with an ESCON CTC
channel can also support other ESCON control units, such as DASD through the ESCD.

ESCON CTCs are used to allow inter-processor communications (connects central storage of one MVS
image with central storage of another MVS image). This communication can be among different logical
partitions in the same CEC, or among different CECs (locally or at long distances).

An ESCON CTC can also be connected point-to-point to an ESCON CNC channel on another processor.

Each ESCON CTC fiber can support up to 512 independent device addresses, each one allocated by a
distinct application but sharing the same physical link.

For educational purposes let′s imagine an I/O operation running through the CTC path represented in
the visual by the CHPID 2A from SYS1 and CHPID 31 from SYS2. An application in SYS1 wants to send
data (write) to its peer application in SYS2 which wants to receive such data (read). This operation
follows these steps:

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 97

 • IOS in SYS1 issues a SSCH in CHPID 2A—the channel program has a Write command. The data
transfer is halted.
• IOS in SYS2 receives an I/O interrupt (named attention) in CHPID 31.
• IOS in SYS2 issues a SSCH in CHPID 31—the channel program has a Sense command. The
response for that is the information received by IOS in SYS2, that CHPID 2A is issuing a Write
command.
• IOS in SYS2 issues a SSCH in CHPID 31—the channel program has a Read command. The data
transfers starts.

98 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 65. FICON

3.17 Fiber Connection (FICON)

Fiber Connection (FICON) is a new channel protocol introduced in the 9672 G5. This protocol is an
ANSI standard that IBM implemented to alleviate:
• ESCON limitations in bandwidth and in the number of devices and control units
• S/390 architecture limit of 256 channels per CEC

FICON supplements, but does not replace ESCON. In a 9672 G6 you may have up to 24 FICON
channels. FICON channels use the same fiber optic cables as ESCON channels.

FICON bandwidth is 100 MB/sec full duplex, with 60 to 80 MB/sec expected total data rate. FICON
supports more than 4,000 IOs/sec per channel compared to 500 IOs/sec per channel in ESCON. FICON
channels have a negligible data rate droop up to at least 43 km, compared to 9 km in ESCON; this
means that the FICON data rate does not vary with the distance up 43 km.

FICON allows a distance (between CEC and control unit) of up to 10 km or 29 km (RPQ) with no
repeater to a 9032 ESCD; or distances of up to 100 km with a repeater.

Up to 16,384 devices and up to 256 CUs (per channel) with much fewer connections as less channels,
ports, cables, patch panel ports, and so on are required.

At the 9672 G6 announcement time frame, there are no FICON control units yet available; the only type
of FICON channel available is the FICON Bridge, also called FCV. The FCV channel is connected to an

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 99

ESCD model 5 via a special bridge port card. The bridge converts FICON to ESCON protocol to reach
ESCON CUs. One FICON bridge links to eight ESCON switch ports. An FCV channel can multiplex up
to eight distinct data transfers from eight ESCON control units. One FCV is equivalent (performance
wise) to eight ESCON channels.

In the visual the FICON FCV has a CHPID of FC and connects to bridge port number C4, which connects
to eight control units ports.

IBM has a statement of direction for FICON CUs and full FICON ESCDs.

100 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 66. How to display channel types

3.18 How to display channel types

The DISPLAY MATRIX CHPID operator MVS command provides information about the status and type of
channels. There are two parts to the display:
1. The first section displays the channel path status. The channel path status is relative to the system
where the command is issued. That is, a CHPID may be displayed as being offline, but if this
CHPID is shared, using EMIF, by other logical partitions, it may not be offline physically.
2. The second section displays the channel path type. Note that where the first section only displays
the status of channels available to the MVS image, the second section provides information about
all channels installed on the processor.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 101

Figure 67. S/390 connectivity

3.19 S/390 connectivity

This visual summarizes the three different types of channel technology available on S/390 systems.

102 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 68. System-related I/O work flow

3.20 System-related I/O work flow

This visual shows the flow of an I/O operation from the request done by an application until the
operation completes.
1. The user program accesses a data set by issuing an OPEN macro instruction. To request either
input or output of data it uses an I/O macro instruction like GET, PUT, READ, or WRITE, and
specifies a target I/O device. An I/O macro instruction invokes an access method. An access
method has the following functions:
• Writes the channel program (with virtual addresses)
• Implements buffering
• Guarantees synchronization
• Executes I/O recovery
The user program could bypass the access method, but it would then need to consider many
details of the I/O operation, such as the physical characteristics of the device.
2. There are several MVS access methods, each of which offers differing functions to the user
program. The selection of an access method depends on how the program plans to access the
data (randomly, or sequentially, for example)
3. To request the movement of data, either the access method or the user program presents
information about the operation to an I/O driver routine (usually the EXCP driver) by issuing the
EXCP macro instruction. The I/O driver translates the channel program from virtual to real (a

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 103

 format acceptable by the channel subsystem) fixes the pages containing the CCWs and the data
buffers, guarantees the volume extents, and invokes the I/O Supervisor (IOS).
4. IOS, if there is not a pending I/O operation for the required device (originated previously in this
system), issues the Start Subchannel (SSCH) instruction to the channel subsystem. Then, the CPU
continues with other work (the task executing the access method is probably placed in wait state)
until the channel subsystem indicates with an I/O interrupt that the I/O operation has completed. If
the device is busy the request is queued in the UCB control block.
5. The SAP selects a channel path to initiate the I/O operation. This channel executes the channel
program controlling the movement of data between device, control unit, and central storage.
6. When the I/O operation is complete, SAP signals the completion by generating an I/O interrupt.
7. IOS processes the interruption by determining the status of the I/O operation (successful or
otherwise) from the channel subsystem. IOS indicates that I/O is complete by posting the waiting
task and calling the dispatcher.
8. When appropriate, the dispatcher dispatches the task returning to the access method code.
9. The access method returns control to the user program, which can then continue its processing.

104 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 69. What is HCD

3.21 What is HCD

The channel subsystem (CSS) and the IBM OS/390 operating system need to know what hardware
resources are available in the computer system and how these resources are connected. This
information is called hardware configuration.

Before HCD was available, you had to use IOCP to define the hardware configuration to the channel
subsystem and the MVS Configuration Program (MVSCP) to define the hardware configuration to the
MVS operating system (also called software definition).

The configuration you define with HCD may consist of multiple processors, each containing multiple
partitions. HCD stores the entire configuration data in a central repository, the input/output definition
file (IODF). The IODF as single source for all hardware and software definitions for a multi-processor
or multi-partition system eliminates the need to maintain several independent MVSCP or IOCP data
sets. That means, that you enter the information only once using an interactive dialog.

HCD is part of OS/390. It needs a running OS/390 system before it can be used to define a hardware
configuration. Therefore, an installation should first load an OS/390 system, using an old IODF, or a
ServerPac Starter IODF to IPL the OS/390 system for the first time. Existing MVSCP configuration data
has to be migrated into an IODF and is then used to IPL the system. HCD can be used on that system
to define the full configuration.

Hardware Configuration Definition (HCD) provides an interactive interface that allows you to define the
hardware configuration to both the channel subsystem and the operating system.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 105

HCD combined with the Dynamic I/O Reconfiguration Management function allows you to make
changes to either the hardware or software configurations without the need of a power-on reset (POR)
or an IPL. This greatly enhances overall system availability by making possible the elimination of
scheduled outages that were previously necessary when parts of the configuration were changed.
Note: This section on HCD illustrates the many panels used in creating a new I/O configuration. It is
not a complete definition and does not show all of the panels and the various options needed. It is an
attempt to make you familiar with the concepts available with HCD.

See OS/390 Hardware Configuration Definition: User ′ s Guide , SC28-1848, and OS/390 Hardware
Configuration Definition Planning , GC28-1750, for how to use HCD.

106 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 70. HCD functions

3.21.1 HCD functions

Single point of control : With HCD you have a single source, the IODF production data set, for your
configuration data. This means that hardware and software definitions as well as ESCON director
definitions can be done from HCD and can be activated with the data stored in the IODF. However, to
change the ESCD matrix switch configuration, HCD needs the ESCON Manager product.

Increased system availability : HCD checks the configuration data when it is entered and therefore
reduces the chance of unplanned system outages due to inconsistent definitions.

Changing hardware definitions dynamically : HCD offers dynamic I/O reconfiguration management.
This function allows you to change your hardware and software definitions on the fly—you can add
devices, or change devices, channel paths, and control units, without performing a POR or an IPL. You
may also perform software-only changes, even if the associated hardware is not installed.

Sysplex-wide activate : HCD offers you a single point of control for systems in a sysplex. You can
dynamically activate the hardware and software configuration changes for systems defined in a
sysplex, if the CECs are in the same HMCplex (also called an S/390 Microprocessor Cluster).

Accurate configuration documentation : The actual configuration definitions for one or more processors
in the IODF are the basis for the reports you can produce with HCD. This means that the reports are
accurate and reflect the up-to-date definition of your configuration. HCD provides a number of textual
reports and graphical reports, that can be either printed or displayed. The printed output can be used

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 107

for documentation purposes providing the base for further configuration planning tasks. The display
function allows you to get a quick overview of your logical hardware configuration.

Guidance through interactive interface : HCD provides an interactive user interface, based on ISPF, that
supports both the hardware and the software configuration definition functions. The primary way of
defining the configuration is through the ISPF dialog. HCD consists of a series of panels that guide you
through all aspects of the configuration task. The configuration data is presented in lists. HCD offers
extensive online help and prompting facilities. Help includes information about panels, commands,
data displayed, available actions, and context-sensitive help for input fields. A fast path for
experienced users is also supported.

Batch utilities : In addition to the interactive interface, HCD also offers a number of batch utilities. You
can use these utilities, for instance, to migrate your existing configuration data; to maintain the IODF;
or to print configuration reports.

Cross operating system support : HCD allows you to define both OS/390 and VM/ESA configurations
from OS/390.

Support for controlling CECS in HMCPlex : HCD provides functions for IOCDS and IPL attributes
management, which simplify the configuration and operational support for those CECs which service
elements that are in the same HMC LAN. IOCDS are data sets allocated in the service DASD from the
Service Element in a 9672. The I/O configuration is copied from an IOCDS at Power-on Reset time to
HSA.

108 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 71. Dynamic I/O reconfiguration

3.21.2 Dynamic I/O reconfiguration

Dynamic I/O reconfiguration is the ability to select a new I/O configuration definition without having to
perform a power-on reset (POR, the load of a processor′s microcode plus the load of the I/O
configuration) of the hardware or an IPL of the OS/390 system. It allows an installation to add, delete,
or modify the definitions of channel paths, control units, and I/O devices to the software and hardware
configurations. You can change the I/O configuration definitions for both software and hardware or for
software only. It also allows you to dynamically change:
• Eligible device table (EDT), where you associate a set of devices with an esoteric name.
• Device preference List, where you define a sequenced priority of device types, to be used if you
are allocating a new data set and you have more than one possible device type as candidate.
To use dynamic I/O reconfiguration, HCD must be used to define the configuration.

To implement a dynamic I/O reconfiguration you need to do the following steps:

1. Define an IODF production with the full new configuration, including the devices that will not be
changed, the new ones, and the ones to be changed. The deleted devices are omitted.
2. Issue the ACTIVATE command (through the MVS console or HCD). MVS reads the new configuration
and generates a delta list, that includes the new elements and the ones to be deleted. MVS
synchronously updates the software configuration and the hardware configuration (using a special
instruction able to update the HSA).

Dynamic I/O reconfiguration has the following benefits:

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 109

 • It increases system availability by allowing you to change the I/O configuration while OS/390 is
running, thus eliminating the POR and IPL for selecting a new or updated I/O configuration.
• It allows you to make I/O configuration changes when your installation needs them, rather than
waiting for a scheduled outage to make changes.
• It minimizes the need to logically define hardware devices that do not physically exist in a
configuration (also known as over-defining a configuration).

110 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 72. Dynamic I/O device types

3.21.3 Dynamic reconfiguration concepts

This section introduces and explains a number of dynamic reconfiguration management concepts.
These concepts and terms are used in subsequent sections of this chapter when discussing dynamic
I/O reconfiguration:
• Unit Information Module (UIM)
IOS does not understand the peculiarities of each possible device type. Each device type that
exists has an associated software routine called the unit information module (UIM), which is
included in the IOS code. UIM contains the device support code. UIMs are invoked by IOS at
device initialization and by HCD for testing a specific I/O configuration that you may have. One of
the functions of UIM is to specify whether or not the device type supports dynamic I/O
configuration.
• Device types
OS/390 treats device control information (for example UCBs) differently depending upon whether
the device can be dynamically reconfigured or not. This state may be also declared by you
through the DYNAMIC parameter at IODEVICE in IOCP. The possible device types are:
Static A static device is a device whose type as defined in its UIM does not support
dynamic I/O reconfiguration. A static device cannot be dynamically added,
deleted, or modified in the software configuration definition. Therefore, the
device is not available for use until the next IPL of MVS. However, the device
can be added, deleted, and modified in the hardware configuration definition,
but its channel path information cannot be modified.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 111

 Installation-static An installation-static device is a device whose type as specified in its UIM
supports dynamic I/O configuration, but which you have defined as
DYNAMIC=NO (default is NO) in the HCD definition. You might specify
DYNAMIC=NO if your installation has programs, including customer programs,
supplier programs and products, that depend on device-related data structures
such as UCB and EDT, or use existing old MVS services which access these
data structures, and are unprepared to handle dynamic changes to these
structures.
Installation-static devices can be dynamically added to the software I/O
configuration, but can not be deleted or modified while OS/390 is running.
Devices can be dynamically added, deleted, and modified in the hardware
configuration definition, but their channel path information cannot be modified.
The control information for installation-static devices can be accessed using
either old UCB services or the new ones. Defining devices as installation-static
should be considered as an interim measure until all the programs accessing
their UCBs have been converted to the new UCB services.
Note: Modifying or deleting an installation-static device requires two separate
dynamic I/O configuration changes:
1. Change the installation-static device to dynamic (by activating a new IODF
that defines the device as dynamic). No other device characteristics for
that device can be changed on the redefinition activation.
2. Delete or modify the dynamic device (by activating another IODF that
contains the appropriate changes to the device). If the device is being
modified, and you want it to be changed back to installation-static after the
change, you can do this at the same time that other changes are being
activated by specifying DYNAMIC=NO as part of the change.
Dynamic A dynamic device is a device whose device type as defined in its UIM supports
dynamic I/O configuration (in software and hardware). In order to dynamically
add, modify, or delete such a device while OS/390 is running, it is also
necessary that the device be defined as dynamic in HCD (DYNAMIC=YES).
• Hardware System Area (HSA)
When you perform a POR, the hardware I/O configuration definition is loaded from an IOCDS into
the HSA. HSA is a non-software addressable piece of CS, used for a microcode work-area, LPAR
processing, and I/O configuration data. When you activate a new configuration, HSA is updated to
reflect the new hardware I/O configuration definition.
If you plan to use dynamic I/O reconfiguration to add equipment to your configuration, you must
specify an expansion factor for the HSA size before initiating the POR. The expansion factor
defines how much additional HSA storage is reserved for future dynamic I/O configuration changes.
• Eligible device table (EDT)
During dynamic I/O reconfiguration it is possible to also change the EDT. Usually, OS/390 uses
one EDT to process allocation requests. However, when you dynamically change your system′ s
software I/O configuration definition, OS/390 may have to use two EDTs to process the change:
− The primary EDT processes all current and new allocation requests. OS/390 runs with only the
primary EDT until you make a dynamic I/O configuration change. OS/390 activates a new
primary EDT for the new I/O configuration, which makes the former primary EDT the secondary
EDT.
− The secondary EDT receives no new allocation requests. The system deletes the secondary
EDT when it finishes the allocation requests issued before the dynamic I/O change.

112 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 73. IODF file

3.22 IODF data set

The I/O definition file (IODF) is a VSAM linear data set that is built and maintained by HCD. There are
two types of IODF data set:
• Work IODF
A work IODF allows you to create a new I/O configuration definition or modify an existing one. You
can have multiple work IODFs, each with a unique name.
All work IODF names must conform to the following convention:
′ hhhhhhhh.IODFxx.yyyyyyyy.yyyyyyyy′
Where:
hhhhhhhh High level qualifier—up to eight characters
xx Hexadecimal number in the range of 00 through FF
yyyyyyyy Optional qualifiers—up to eight characters each
HCD provides considerable flexibility in the choice of work IODF names. It is, however,
recommended that you be more stringent in your naming conventions. It is recommended that you
use the following convention when choosing a name for an IODF:
′ hhhhhhhh.IODFxx.WORK′
In this manner, you can easily ascertain the nature of the IODF.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 113

 • Production IODF
A production IODF is the data set used to obtain the definitions needed to run the system. A
production IODF is a read-only data set, which preserves the integrity of the IODF.
The naming convention of the production IODF is more restrictive. If the IODF is to be used for IPL
and dynamic activation, the production IODF must have the following format:
′ hhhhhhhh.IODFxx′
Where:
hhhhhhhh The high-level qualifier
xx The IODF suffix.
The production IODF is an IPLable image of the work IODF. The device number of the device
where the IODF is located is specified in the load parm at the HMC console. In the LOADxx
parmlib member you specify:
xx: The suffix
hhhhhhhh The high level qualifier
The following naming convention is a good way to relate the current production IODF to its work
IODF, and is easily extendable as new IODF versions are created:
ACTIVE PRODUCTION IODF: ′ hhhhhhhh.IODF30′
SUBSEQUENT WORK IODF: ′ hhhhhhhh.IODF31.WORK′
RESULTING NEW PRODUCTION IODF: ′ hhhhhhhh.IODF31′

3.22.1 Catalog considerations

In a multisystem environment, a single IODF can define several processor software configurations.
Because an IODF is a VSAM data set, it can be cataloged in only one catalog. Therefore, if you wish to
share an IODF data set among multiple systems and each system is using a separate master catalog,
you must define (in the master catalog of each system) an alias that relates to the user catalog on
DASD that is shared among the systems. Define aliases and the user catalog before using HCD to
define IODF data sets.

3.22.2 Production IODF backup

It is suggested that you maintain a backup copy of your production IODF on a separate volume that is
accessible to all systems that are sharing the backup. When the primary IODF volume is inaccessible
or the IODF itself is corrupted, the system can be IPLed through a backup IODF on the alternate IODF
volume.

3.22.3 IODF placement

The production IODF to be used during IPL processing must be placed on the IODF device. The IODF
device is pointed to by the load parm (L2) value on the IPL window of your hardware management
console.

In an SMS environment, care should be taken to ensure that either:

• The production IODF data set name is not managed by SMS. You can then specify the IODF
volume serial number when creating a production IODF.
• The ACS routines are set up to automatically place the production IODFs on the IODF volume.

114 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

3.22.4 Multiple configurations in a single IODF
The installation must decide whether to create one IODF for each CEC or to combine the I/O definitions
for two or more CECs in a single IODF. The advantage of including two or more CECs with shared
devices in one IODF is that the information for shared devices has to be entered only once.

A second reason to consider maintaining I/O configuration definitions for several CECs in one IODF is
that it allows you to easily move I/O configurations from one partition to another (in either the same
CEC or separate CECs).

The general recommendation is to create one IODF for a logical processor complex ; that is a group of
processors that share I/O devices, as a sysplex. In this way, one MVS system can be used for
updating the IODF with the configuration changes, which minimizes the chance of error.

If you previously have had multiple IODFs defining your complex, the HCD copy/merge function can be
used to copy relevant parts of configuration data from a source to a target IODF, or even from areas
within an IODF.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 115

Figure 74. Definition order

3.22.5 Definition order

You can define the objects of a configuration in almost any order but at one point you have to connect
objects together. You can only connect objects that are already defined; therefore, it is useful to define
the objects in a logical order. For example, when defining I/O devices during the hardware definition,
you are prompted to add devices to existing operating system definitions. Therefore, it is useful to
define the operating system before the devices.

The suggested sequence to define a configuration is shown in this visual.

116 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 75. HCD primary option menu

3.23 HCD primary option menu

HCD provides an action bar-driven interface that exploits many of the usability features of the Common
User Access (CUA) interface.

To select an item from a numbered selection list, type the number you want to select in the input field
(left of the first list item) and press the Enter key. An example of a numbered list is the HCD primary
task selection panel, shown in the visual. This panel is displayed when you start an HCD session.

To create a new IODF, specify as follows:

I/O definition file . . . ′ SYS6.IODF27.WORK′
Then, enter 1 in the input field and press the Enter key.

On entering HCD, you are presented with the HCD primary menu panel. The first time you use HCD,
you must enter the IODF data set name that you wish to use. If this is not the name of an existing
IODF, HCD creates a new work IODF for you.

If you have a production IODF, it is advisable to start from the active production IODF as a base. This
is mandatory for a dynamic environment.

After entering the new IODF name enclosed in quotes, for example:
′ SYS6.IODF27.WORK′

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 117

HCD then displays the Create Work IODF Definition File panel.

The following visuals will step you through an IODF creation.

118 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 76. How to create a n e w work IODF

3.23.1 How to create a new work IODF

Specify the volume you wish the IODF to be allocated to (prompting is available for this field) and press
F4 for a list of volumes. If you are working within an SMS-managed environment, the volume serial
number is not required.

Specify whether you want activity logging to be enabled. If you opt for this function, then the activity
log will be displayed as the last panel when exiting following an update to the IODF.

At this time you must also specify the size of the new work IODF in terms of the number of 4 KB
blocks.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 119

Figure 77. Defining configuration data

3.23.2 Defining configuration data

The next panel displayed after choosing Option 1 from the primary option menu is shown in the visual.
This panel displays all the objects for which the HCD dialog provides action lists where you can define
the characteristics and the relation between the objects.

From this panel, you can go step-by-step to define, change, prime, or delete the following:
• Operating system configurations
• EDTs
• Generics
• Esoteric groups
• Processors
• Partitions (LPARs)
• Channel paths
• Control units
• Devices
• Consoles

Before using the dialog of HCD to define a hardware configuration, you should have a plan of what
your configuration should look like, and what you have to do to accomplish that. Preferably, the
requirements of your configuration should be established in a configuration plan. Refer to OS/390
Hardware Configuration Definition Planning , GC28-1750, for an OS/390 or MVS configuration.

120 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 78. Operating system definition

3.24 Operating system definition

It is recommended to define the operating system configuration before you define anything else. An
operating system (OS) configuration defines the data that is used by MVS, to build its IO control blocks.
An IODF can contain more than one OS configuration. At IPL time one of them is selected.

This visual shows the OS elements (I/O devices, EDTs, Esoteric, and NIP consoles) and their
relationship within the MVS operating system. A NIP console is the console used by the nucleus
initialization program (NIP), an MVS code running at IPL time. NIP is in charge of initializing all MVS
components and subsystems. At early stages of this initialization there are no MCS consoles available
for communication with the operator. The NIP console is then used for such communication. The
message Specify System Parameter is displayed on this device.

At IPL the LOADxx parmlib member identifies the operating system configuration (you may have more
than one per IODF) and the EDT identifier.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 121

Figure 79. How to define an operating system

3.24.1 How to define an operating system

From the HCD primary menu, shown in Figure 75 on page 117 select:

1 Define, modify, or view configuration data

When the next panel appears, then select:

1 Operating system configurations.

The visual shows two configurations already defined. To add a new configuration, use F11.

3.24.1.1 Add Operating System Configuration panel

Complete the Add Operating System Configuration panel with the name of the operating system you
would like to define. In the visual, we have defined MVSNEW.

Having defined the operating system you can now define the EDTs.

122 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 80. EDT and esoteric

3.24.2 EDT and esoterics

An EDT is a list of devices with esoteric names. It is used at allocation time to generate a list of the
devices that are candidates to receive the data set. An MVS operating system may have more than
one EDT but only one can be active at any one time. In the visual, the EDT would have an esoteric list
of SYSDA, PRODDSK, and TESTDSK.

3.24.2.1 Understanding I/O device allocation in MVS

When you submit a job, you identify I/O devices required by the job. The device information can be
obtained from either a catalog (if the data set already exists), SMS overrides, or specific UNIT
parameters on DD statements (for new data sets). Before the job can continue execution, an MVS
initiator must allocate all those devices to the job.

There are three ways to specify device allocation for a job using the UNIT parameter on a DD card.
• An specific device number
• A generic device type
• An esoteric device group

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 123

3.24.2.2 Indicating a specific device for allocation

To request a device explicitly for a job, specify a device number on the UNIT= parameter or on the
corresponding dynamic allocation parameter. If that device is available, MVS allocates the device to
the job. However, if the device is unavailable (for example, a tape drive allocated to another job), your
job must wait until the device is available for allocation.

3.24.2.3 Specifying a generic device type for allocation

MVS logically groups device types with similar characteristics and assigns the group a generic name.
Such a group is called a generic device type. MVS, for example, groups the 3390-1 and 3390-2 into a
generic device type named 3390. Any time a program allocates a 3390, MVS interprets it to mean any
of the devices in that generic device type.

To request a device allocation, you can specify a generic device type on the UNIT= parameter. MVS
allocates a device from the specified generic device type. For example, if you code the following DD
statement:
//OUTPUT DD UNIT=3390,...
MVS allocates a device from generic device type 3390. Generic device type 3390 should not be
confused with specific device number 3390. To avoid having your specification misinterpreted as a
specific device number use the following notation for the device number:
//OUTPUT DD UNIT=/3390,...

3.24.2.4 Specifying an esoteric device group for allocation

A job that specifies an esoteric device group is requesting MVS to allocate a device from that group.
An esoteric device group can include devices of different generic device types.

The device preference list indicates the preferred sequence of device types candidates to allocate the
data set. It is used when the esoteric definition has more than one device type.

All of the devices that you assign to an esoteric device group must be of the same device class with
the following exception: you can define esoteric device groups that contain devices from both DASD
and tape device classes.

Devices belong to one of the following classes:

• Channel-to-channel adapters
• Communication devices
• Direct access devices
• Display devices
• Character readers
• Tape devices
• Unit record devices

To request device allocation, you can specify an esoteric device group on the UNIT= parameter on the
DD JCL statement.

In this visual SYSDA is the esoteric group name for three 3380s (device numbers 181, 182, and 183) and
four 3390s (device numbers 190 through 193). When UNIT=SYSDA appears on a DD statement, units
181, 182, 183, 190, 191, 192, and 193 are eligible candidate devices.

TESTDSK is the esoteric group name for two 3390 DASDs (device numbers 191 and 192).

PRODDSK is the esoteric group name for three 3380 DASDs (device numbers 181, 182, and 183).

124 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 81. Select n e w configuration for EDTs

3.24.3 Select new configuration for EDTs

Before you can define EDTs, you must have defined an operating system. You define an EDT as
follows:
• On the primary task selection panel, select Define, modify, or view configuration data and on the
resulting panel the object Operating system configurations. HCD displays the operating system
configuration list of all operating system configurations currently defined in the IODF.
• On the Operating System Configuration List panel, select the OS configuration, shown in the visual
as MVSNEW. The next panel displayed allows you to select to work with EDTs, as shown in
Figure 82 on page 126.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 125

Figure 82. How to define an EDT

3.24.4 How to define an EDT

You define an EDT as follows:
• On the primary task selection panel, select Define, modify, or view configuration data and on the
resulting panel the object Operating system configurations. HCD displays the operating system
configuration list of all operating system configurations currently defined in the IODF.
• On the Operating System Configuration List panel, select the OS configuration and the Work with
EDTs action from the context menu (or action code s). HCD displays the EDT List panel.
• Select an operating system from the OS Configuration List panel, using the / action key and then
select Work with EDTs Option 5 from the context menu. This displays the panel shown in Figure 84
on page 128.

126 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 83. How to define an EDT

3.24.5 How to define an EDT

For an MVS operating system, you have to define at least one eligible device table (EDT). An EDT can
consist of one or more esoteric device groups and names of the generic device types. Esoteric device
groups are installation-defined groupings of I/O devices.

An OS configuration can contain more than one EDT; OS/390 is told which one to use at IPL time. For
background information about I/O device allocation in MVS that you need to understand before defining
EDTs and esoteric groups, refer to OS/390 Hardware Configuration Definition Planning , GC28-1750.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 127

Figure 84. Define EDT identifier

3.24.6 Define EDT identifier

• On the EDT LIST panel, press F11 to add an EDT.
• Enter the EDT identifier (any two alphanumeric characters) and the description for the EDT.
• Pressing Enter redisplays the EDT List panel with the just defined EDT.

128 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 85. How to add an esoteric

3.24.7 How to add an esoteric

An esoteric device group identifies the I/O devices that are included in that group. The name you
assign to an esoteric device group is called the esoteric name. To request allocation of a device from
an esoteric device group, specify the esoteric name on the UNIT parameter of a JCL DD statement.
The name esoteric device group is often shortened to esoteric group or simply esoteric.

To add an esoteric, select Option 5 Work with EDTs shown in Figure 82 on page 126. Then select the
EDT identifier using the / action key. Then select Work with Esoterics from the context menu.
Continue with Figure 86 on page 130.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 129

Figure 86. Add an esoteric

3.24.8 Add an esoteric

The Esoteric List panel appears. Press F11 to add an esoteric. The visual shows SYSDA.

3.24.8.1 Esoteric token

The esoteric token is an optional value. In the past there have been access problems with data sets
cataloged with an esoteric device group name. HCD arranges esoterics alphabetically, but the catalog
contains the EDT index entry pointing to the esoteric. After HCD has reordered the esoterics,
allocation searches the incorrect device for a data set. If you specify an esoteric token, this token will
be used as the entry point to the catalog. Specify the token such that your existing esoteric or
non-alphabetic order is maintained.

3.24.8.2 Virtual I/O (VIO)

VIO refers to data set allocations that exist in paging storage only. MVS does not use a real device
unless MVS must page out the data set. If MVS must page out the data set, MVS writes it to a paging
device. Programs that use VIO data sets access them just as if the data sets were allocated to a real
I/O device. VIO is usually only set on for the user-defined esoteric called VIO.

130 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 87. Defining switches

3.25 Defining switches

To define switches and their associated ports, you need to:

• Define switch characteristics
• Define connections to CHPIDs, CUs, and other switches
• Define switch configuration data (port matrix)

On the primary task selection panel, select Define, modify, or view configuration data and on the
resulting panel the object Switches. HCD displays the list of all switches currently defined in the IODF,
as shown in the visual.

The Switch List panel (left part), lists one switch control unit and device. If there are more than one
switch control unit and device, the list entry gets an indication ( ′ > ′ ) . With the F20=Right key, you can
scroll to the right part of the Switch List panel. Up to five switch control units and devices can be
shown. If there are more, an indication is given for the corresponding entry (′Yes′ in column ′More?′
on the right part of the Switch List panel). These additional switch control units and devices can be
viewed, for example, on the Port List for port FE.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 131

Figure 88. How to define a switch

3.25.1 How to define a switch

The switch definition process is as follows:

Select Switches from the Define, Modify or View Configuration Data panel.

Press F11 to add a switch. This displays the panel shown in the visual.

Adding a 9032 or 9033 ESCD with the Add Switch function results in HCD optionally generating the
switch′s control unit and I/O device definitions used for host communication. The device can later be
defined to the appropriate operating system configurations.

On this panel, HCD allows you to define the switch itself, the range of ports installed on your ESCON
director, the switch device, and the switch control unit. The control unit is automatically connected to
port FE and the switch device is connected to the control unit. This ensures that the definitions of
switch control unit and switch device are consistent. Likewise, when deleting a switch, the switch
control unit and switch device is deleted as well. However, you have still to perform the following
steps:
1. Connect the switch control unit to the processor (this also establishes the switch device-processor
connection).
2. Connect the switch device to the operating system.
After you have entered the new switch definition data, all defined switches are displayed in the HCD
Switch List panel.

132 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 89. Defining processors

3.26 Defining processors

A CEC can run in either of two ways:

• Basic mode
• LPAR (partitioned) mode

3.26.1 Basic mode

In basic mode you run only one operating system image on the CEC and it controls all the resources
(memory, channels, and so forth) of the processor.

3.26.2 LPAR mode

The Processor Resource/Systems Manager (PR/SM) feature allows a single CEC to run multiple
operating system images (including the coupling facility control code (CFCC), the operating system of a
coupling facility) in logically partitioned (LPAR) mode.

Each operating system has its own logical partition, which is a separate set of system resources
including:
• A portion of storage (central, or central and expanded).

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 133

 • One or more CPUs. The CPU can be dedicated or shared. When the CPUs are shared you assign
a weight to guarantee the use for each partition of a certain CPU share or to impose a limitation
(capping).
• Channels, which can be shared or dedicated.

3.26.3 Defining processors with HCD

You can define more than one processor in an IODF and for each defined processor you can configure
processor-related data for further use by the channel subsystem.

HCD allows you to define and control I/O configurations for a local as well as for all other processors
that are part of an S/390 microprocessor cluster.

For processors that are physically partitioned, you must define each physical partition as an individual
processor.

On the primary task selection panel, select Define, modify, or view configuration data and on the
resulting panel the object Processors. HCD displays the Processor List of all processors currently
defined in the IODF.

134 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 90. Information required to define a processor

3.26.4 Information required to define a processor

To define processors in your configuration, you need to know:
• Processor ID : An eight-byte alphanumeric name that you assign to identify the CEC in HCD, such
as, BIGBLUE.
• Support Level : Depending on the processor type/model, there may be more than one support level
for the processor type. The support level defines the supported channel path types, and the
features such as dynamic I/O reconfiguration, EMIF, and coupling facility support. If the processor
has several support levels, HCD displays another panel showing a list of available support levels
for the processor.
• Processor Type and Model , such as 9672 R65
• Configuration Mode : BASIC or LPAR. If a processor is in LPAR mode, you must define partitions
in your configuration.
• Serial number : If you specify a serial number, the system uses the number to verify that it is
updating the correct CEC during IOCDS download.
• Description : Text that you use to describe the processor.
• SNA address (Network Name) and CPC name : For a CEC located in an S/390 microprocessor
cluster, that is, several CECs connected in a token-ring hardware management console (HMC)
LAN, you need the system network architecture (SNA) address of its support element in that LAN
and its central processor complex (CPC, that is a synonym of CEC) name, usually the same as the
processor ID.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 135

Figure 91. How to define a processor

3.26.5 How to define a processor

You see in this visual the panel used to define a processor (CEC). From the Define Modify or View
Configuration Data panel select Process Processor. This displays the list of the processors that have
been defined. From the Processor list panel, press F11 to add a processor. The data entry fields are
shown with sample data.

On the Add Processor panel, you can specify the network name and the CPC name, when the
processor is configured in an S/390 microprocessor cluster. Use Prompt on the Add Processor panel
for the SNA addresses for those CPCs that are currently configured in the S/390 microprocessor
cluster.

Depending on the processor type/model, there may be more than one support level for the processor
type. The support level defines the supported channel path types, and the features such as Dynamic
I/O Reconfiguration, EMIF, and coupling facility support. If the processor has several support levels,
HCD displays another panel showing a list of available support levels for the processor. Select the
appropriate support level. HCD uses this level when validating the configuration for this processor. It
relates to the installed microcode.

136 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 92. Work with partitions

3.26.6 Work with partitions

Define partitions as follows:
• On the primary task selection panel, select Define, modify, or view configuration data and on the
resulting panel the object Processors. HCD displays the Processor List of processors currently
defined in the IODF.
• On the Processor List panel, select the processor and the Work with partitions action from the
context menu (or action code p ). HCD displays the Partition List panel showing the currently
defined partitions for the designated processor.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 137

Figure 93. How to add a partition to a CEC

3.26.7 How to add a partition to a CEC

If the CEC is defined in LPAR mode you now define partitions for the configuration. The 9672 supports
up to 15 separate partitions. To define partitions, you need to decide on:
• Partition name, such as MVSPROD or TEST.
• Partition number, if partitions share channel paths. A partition number is used by the channel
subsystem to direct I/O operations to the correct partition on shared channels.
• Whether it is to be used by an operating system, such as MVS (OS option), or by a CFCC partition
(CF option).
Partitions are added as follows:
1. Select a processor from the Processor List panel and the Work With Partitions action from the
context menu.
2. On the Partitions List panel, press F11 to add a partition, and then fill in the required information.
3. Press the Enter key. HCD will then display the updated Partition List.

138 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 94. Channel types

3.26.8 Channel types

This visual shows the different types of channels available on an OS/390 system. A channel may be
dedicated, reconfigurable, or shared depending on its type. All channel types can be defined as
dedicated; in this mode the channel is assigned to only one LPAR or CEC (if running in basic mode).

3.26.8.1 ESCON channels

An ESCON channel-to-channel (CTC) channel path has an ESCON CTC connection at one end, and
either an ESCON (CNC) or FICON (FCV) channel connection the other end. For any two processor
complexes to communicate through an ESCON channel path, the ESCON CTC connection can be at
either processor complex.

In each logical partition that can communicate with another processor complex through a shared
ESCON CTC channel path, you must specify the logical address of the ESCON CTC control unit. You
can specify partition numbers when defining partitions, and you can specify these partition numbers as
the logical address for a CTC control unit.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 139

3.26.8.2 FICON channel paths

FICON (fibre connection) channels increase the capacity of the channel subsystem; each FICON
channel is the equivalent of eight ESCON channels.

The FCV (FICON bridge channel) channel path offers a migration path for ESCON CNC channels; using
the FICON Bridge Feature on the 9032-005 ESCON director, you can attach ESCON devices to the
FICON channel.

An FCV channel path occupies eight port addresses on the switch. To model the FCV bridge within
HCD, consider the following: whenever you connect an eligible port address to an FCV channel path,
you must set all other port addresses occupied by the FCV bridge to uninstalled.

The FC (FICON channel) channel path requires a FICON interface at the control unit. An FC channel
path requires a FICON interface at the control unit, or needs to be connected to a fiber channel switch
port.

140 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 95. Reconfigurable channels

3.26.9 Reconfigurable channels

This visual lists the channel types that can be defined as reconfigurable.

Reconfigurable channels are available to one logical partition at a time, but can be manually moved
from one to another logical partition. Because some types of channels cannot be shared, such as
parallel and CFR, you may define them as reconfigurable.

When defining a reconfigurable channel, you decide which logical partition will be assigned to it at
POR time and the logical partitions that can be given access to the channel later on. This is indicated
through Access and Candidate lists. Refer to 3.28, “Channel path access list” on page 146, to get more
information on such lists.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 141

Figure 96. Shared or EMIF channels

3.26.10 Shared or EMIF channels

The ESCON Multiple Image Facility (EMIF) provides the capability to share control units connected to
ESCON channels among multiple logical partitions for a CEC operating in LPAR mode.

Though device sharing was available prior to EMIF, the only way to accomplish this was to define a
separate dedicated or reconfigurable channel to each control unit from each logical partition that
needed to share the associated devices. With EMIF, logical partitions can share the same device
through a single shared physical channel or set of shared channels. The major advantage of EMIF is
that it reduces the number of channels, which allows a cheaper and simpler I/O configuration.

With EMIF, the CEC channel subsystem provides physical path sharing by extending the logical
addressing capability of the ESCON architecture to host images (PR/SM logical partitions).

Each partition has its own logical channel subsystem (logical CSS), and its own view of each shared
channel (logical channel path image) and each control unit connected to the shared channel
(subsystem image).

The property of being shared among logical partitions is extended to non-ESCON channels such as CF
links, FICON channels, and OSA channels.

When defining the shared channel you decide which logical partition will be assigned to the channel.
This is indicated through Access and Candidate lists. Refer to 3.28, “Channel path access list” on
page 146, to get more information on such lists. The default with HCD for shared channels is to have
all the partitions in the access list so the channel is online to all LPARs on the processor.

142 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 97. Information required to add channels

3.26.11 Information required to add channels

To define channel paths in your configuration, you first make your physical layout decisions such as
your CHPID numbers for channels, number of channel paths, channel path type, and switch (ESCD)
information if channel path(s) are connected to a switch. The switch information includes entry switch
ID, ports, and dynamic switch ID.

Then you need to decide on an operation mode (dedicated, reconfigurable, or shared) and the
associated access and candidate lists.
Note: The ICONs shown are for the instances and defined channel types displayed on the 9672
hardware management console (HMC).

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 143

Figure 98. Work with channel paths

3.26.12 Work with channel paths

On the primary task selection panel, select Define, modify, or view configuration data and on the
resulting panel the object Processors. HCD displays the Processor List of processors currently defined
in the IODF.

On the Processor List panel, select the processor and the Work with attached channel paths action
from the context menu (or action code s ). HCD displays the Channel Path List panel showing all
channel paths defined for the selected processor.

Channel paths can be dedicated, reconfigurable, or shared. The following list explains when to use
which channel path operation mode:
DED Dedicated; if you want only one logical partition to access a channel path, specify that channel
path as dedicated. You cannot reconfigure a dedicated channel path. This is the default mode.
REC Reconfigurable; if you want only one logical partition at a time to access a channel path and you
want to be able to reconfigure the channel path from one partition to another, specify that
channel path as reconfigurable.
SHR Shared; if you want more than one logical partition to access a channel path simultaneously,
specify that channel path as shared.

On the Add Channel Path panel, enter a channel path type and use F4=Prompt for the operation mode
to find out the allowed operation modes for the specified type.

144 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 99. How to add a channel path

3.27 How to add a channel path

Having defined the partitions, you can now define the channel paths.

The following example shows how to add a shared channel. This is a two step process:
• Define the channel path characteristics.
• Define the channel path access to logical partitions.
1. Select a processor from the Processor List panel, and the Work with attached channel paths from
the context menu.
2. Press F11 on the channel list to add a channel path.
HCD distinguishes between the dynamic and entry switch when defining a channel path. The
dynamic switch is the switch holding the dynamic connection; the entry switch is the switch to
which the channel path is physically plugged.
Note: You can define multiple channels in one step. If you do so and have also specified an entry
switch and entry port for the channel path, HCD displays another panel where you can specify the
entry switch and port number for the subsequent channel paths.
3. You must specify the connection between channels and partitions in the subsequent panels.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 145

Figure 100. Access and candidate lists

3.28 Channel path access list

A logical partition that is on a channel path′s access list can access the channel path when the logical
partition is initially activated at POR. When a channel path is dedicated or reconfigurable, you specify
one logical partition on the channel path access list. When a channel path is shared, you can specify
more than one logical partition on the channel path access list.

This information is taken from the IOCDS written from the IODF that contains the definition. This
information remains the same as long as no configuration changes are made while the IOCDS is
active.

3.29 Channel path candidate list

A logical partition that is on a channel path′s candidate list can eventually access the channel path. A
logical partition on this list can access the channel path when the channel path is manually configured
online to the logical partition.

HCD automatically considers a logical partition in an access list to be in the candidate list so you do
not need to also enter a logical partition in the access list into the candidate list. This is valid as long
as no configuration changes are made while the IOCDS is active.

In this example we will add CHPID 9C to the access list of MVSPROD and the candidate list of TEST.
You use the / key to select the the partitions.

146 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 101. How to add a control unit

3.30 How to add a control unit

The configuration being defined in this example is a 3990-6 using channels attached to two ESCON
directors and EMIF channels to the processor.

The steps are:

1. Define the ESCON channels to the complex, sharing them between partitions and connecting them
to the ESCD switches. In this example the channels have already been defined.
2. Define the two 3990 control units, specifying the channel paths.
3. Define the DASD devices and connect them to the logical control units.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 147

Figure 102. Information required to define a control unit

3.31 Information required to define a control unit

To define a control unit you should specify:

• Control unit type and model, such as, 9343-1
• Control unit number, such as 0060 (just for HCD correlation)
• Connections to ESCD switches
• Channel path IDs (CHPIDs) where the control unit can connect
• Link address (ESCD port numbers where the control unit is connected with the respective channel,
as paired in CHIPDs)
• Control unit serial number
• Description: Which is text that you use to describe the control unit
• Processor(s) to which the control unit connects
• Information to attach the control unit to the channel path of the processor:
− Unit address ranges that the control unit recognizes
− Protocol (only for parallel control units)
− I/O concurrency level: classification of a control unit based on its ability to concurrently operate
and control the activity of attached devices without causing loss of control or data
− Logical address: Which is known as the CUADD value

148 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 103. Adding a control unit

3.31.1 Adding a control unit

On the primary task selection panel, select Define, modify, or view configuration data and on the
resulting panel the object Control units. HCD displays the Control Unit List panel showing all control
units currently defined in the IODF.

Use F11=Add to define a new control unit.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 149

Figure 104. Defining a 3990-6 control unit

3.32 Defining a 3990-6 control unit

To define a 3990-6 control unit, do the following:

1. Select Control Units from the Define, Modify or View Configuration Data panel.
2. Press F11 to add a new control unit.
3. After typing in the details press Enter to display the Select Processor / Control Unit panel.
4. Select the processor you wish to attach the control unit to by typing a slash (/), pressing Enter, and
then selecting the S select (connect, change) action from the context menu.
5. After filling in the details press Enter to display the Select Processor / Control Unit panel.
6. Pressing Enter validates and saves the entered data and redisplays the Select Processor / Control
Unit panel, as shown in Figure 105 on page 152.
7. Press F11 to add the second control unit 1701.
8. After filling in the details press Enter to display the Add Control Unit panel.
9. Pressing Enter again returns you to the Control Unit List panel.

3.32.1.1 Defining switch connections

The Add Control Unit panel can also be used to specify the switches and ports the control unit is
attached to. If you specify Yes for Auto-assign and the control unit is connected to least one switch,
HCD proposes CU-processor attachment parameters (channel path/link addresses and the unit range)
based on the switch/ports the control unit is connected to. HCD will propose up to eight channel
path/link address pairs, starting with the channel path that has the lowest number of devices attached

150 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

to it. On the following Select Processor / Control Unit panel you can type over the fields that are
different from the proposed attachment values.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 151

Figure 105. Select processor for control unit

3.32.2 Select processor for control unit

After pressing the Enter key on the Add Control Unit panel, HCD displays a list panel, shown in the
visual, that shows all the defined processors. You can then define how the control unit is attached to
one or more processors.

A Yes in the Att. column indicates that the CU is attached to the processor.

When you place a / next to the processor, you select the panel shown in Figure 106 on page 153.

152 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 106. Defining a 3990-6 control unit

3.32.3 Defining a 3990-6 control unit

Select a processor and the Select (connect/change) action from the context menu (or action code s ).

When a control unit is attached to multiple processors, you can use the Group connect action from the
context menu (or action code g ). This group action is particularly useful when performing symmetric
changes, for example, on CPCs defined in an S/390 microprocessor cluster. The changes are applied
to all selected processors when you issued the change action against a group of processors.

The next panel, shown in Figure 107 on page 154, is the result of using the options shown in the
visual.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 153

Figure 107. Defining processor attachment data

3.32.4 Defining processor attachment data

On the Add Control Unit panel specify the channel paths that connect the control unit to the processor.

If the control unit is attached to a switch, you have to define a link address for each channel path. The
link address is the port to which the control unit attaches. If the control unit attaches only to one port,
the link address is the same for each channel.

You must also specify the unit address and the number of units, that is the unit address range of I/O
devices that the control unit recognizes. Serial control units may have specified only one unit address
range starting with 00.

If the path to the control unit is not unique, you have to specify a logical address. A logical address
can be from 0 to F, that means, you can specify up to 16 serial control units for one unique path. If the
control unit is not connected via a switch, the link address is ** for all control units and cannot be
specified. You have to specify a logical address if more than one serial control unit connects to the
same channel path ID.

Press the Enter key. HCD displays the updated Select Processor / Control Unit panel.

Repeat defining processor attachment data for all processors the control unit should be attached to.

Press the Enter key to return to the Control Unit List panel.

154 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 108. Information required to define a device

3.33 Information required to define a device

Before you define a device that should be defined to an operating system and to the channel
subsystem (CSS), you must have defined the operating system configuration, processor, channel path,
and control unit. HCD omits some steps if data is missing. For example:
• You cannot define the processor data for the device if the device is not attached to a control unit or
the control unit is not attached to a processor.
• You cannot define the EDT/esoteric group data for the device until you have defined an EDT for the
OS.

To define I/O devices in your configuration, you need to define:

• Device type and model, such as 3390-3.
• The device number and unit address you want assigned to the device.
• Number(s) of the control unit(s) to which the device attaches.
• Device parameters and features for defining the device to an operating system, including whether
the device supports dynamic configuration or whether a tape device is automatically switchable.
• For esoteric device groups (that you named in the EDT as part of defining operating system data)
which I/O devices you include in each group.
• The I/O devices that you will allow MVS to use as NIP consoles.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 155

 • Device parameters such as preferred channel path ID; for example, when SAP is selecting which
channel should be tested first in order to start the I/O operation, the standard algorithm of rotate
(distribute the device load by all channels reaching the device) is replaced for this device by a
preferred algorithm. The same designated channel is always tried first. The preferred scheme is
recommended for 3490 tapes.

156 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 109. S/390 device numbering

3.33.1 S/390 device numbering

Operating systems need I/O device data to address the devices. The channel subsystem (CSS) also
needs the data to provide the required information for performing I/O operations to a specific device.

A device number is the number you assign to identify a device in HCD. You assign a device number to
each device to identify it in the configuration. A device number may be any hexadecimal number from
X′ 0000′ to X ′ FFFF′ .

You need three steps to define an I/O device:

• Define device characteristics and control unit connection.
• Define CSS-related definitions for a device.
• Define OS-related definitions for a device (including EDT and esoteric group assignment).

Before you define a device that should be defined to an operating system and to the channel
subsystem (CSS), you must have defined the operating system configuration, processor, channel path,
and control unit. HCD omits some steps if data is missing. For example:
• You cannot define the processor data for the device if the device is not attached to a control unit or
the control unit is not attached to a processor.
• You cannot define the EDT/esoteric group data for the device until you have defined an EDT for the
OS.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 157

3.33.1.1 Device numbers for a parallel access volume

As shown in the visual, when you define a parallel access volume in HCD, you define a control unit
type that provides parallel access volume capability, for example ′200 A′. You define the devices for
the control unit with parallel access volume device types. Base devices are defined using a base
device type, for example ′3390 B′ or ′3380 B′. Alias devices are defined using an alias device type, for
example ′3390 A′, or ′3380 A′. The device numbers are associated with unit addresses on the control
unit using the ′unit address′ parameter, which specifies the starting unit address for the set of devices
being defined. The number of consecutive device numbers and unit addresses to be assigned is
specified with the ′number of devices′ parameter.

3.33.1.2 Four-digit device numbers

Since MVS/ESA SP Version 5, HCD supports the definition of four digits (numbers higher than ′0FFF′)
for device numbers for the MVS operating system. The four-digit device numbers make it easier for
large installations to use unique device numbers across their installation. The device numbers for
MVS/ESA SP 4.3 and lower versions are still restricted to three digits. If you use four-digit definitions,
these are ignored when you IPL or dynamically activate an MVS/ESA SP 4.2 or 4.3 system. The
software products installed need to support four-digit device numbers as well.

158 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 110. Defining a device

3.33.2 How to define an I/O device

You can define, in one operation a group of I/O devices of the same type and with consecutive device
numbers. You define the group by specifying the first device number and the number of devices in the
group. Then HCD applies the definition to all devices in the group. On the I/O Device List panel you
can type over the values that should be different.

HCD allows you to assign the same device number to more than one I/O device; that is, device
numbers alone do not uniquely identify a device in an IODF. To clearly identify devices, HCD keeps
track of each occurrence of the same device number by appending an internal suffix to the device
number.

In the visual, attaching devices to the two control unit pairs completes the logical definition. The
devices are defined once for all the connected control units and defined to the relevant operating
system. The correlation of operating system to partition is important only when making changes to the
hardware and software definitions.

The devices are defined as follows:

1. Select Devices from the Define, Modify or View Configuration Data panel.
2. Press F11 to add a new device. Complete the panel by specifying the device number, number of
devices, device type, and control unit numbers the devices are attached to for the devices you are
adding.
3. Press F11 to add the 3390 devices to the 3990 control unit pair. Complete the panel by specifying
the device number, number of devices, device type, and control unit number.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 159

4. After specifying the details, pressing Enter displays the Device/Processor Definition definition
panel.
5. After confirming the responses on this panel, press Enter. You then receive the panel shown in
Figure 111 on page 161.

160 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 111. Device / Processor Definition

3.33.3 Device / Processor Definition

On the Device / Processor Definition panel you can specify the CSS-related definitions by either typing
over the fields in each column or by selecting a processor and pressing the Enter key. The Define
Device / Processor panel is displayed.
• After confirming the responses on this panel, press Enter to display the Define Device to Operating
System Configuration panel.
• Select the operating system to define the devices to, and select the Select (connect, change) action
from the context menu (you can select all the operating systems at this time and HCD will take you
though the appropriate panels in order).

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 161

Figure 112. Defining CSS definitions for a device

3.33.4 Defining CSS definitions for a device

This visual shows the Define Device/Processor and Define Device to Operating System Configuration.

You can restrict logical partition access to an I/O device on a shared channel path by using the explicit
device candidate list to select which logical partitions can access that I/O device. On the Define
Device / Processor panel, enter Yes or No in the Explicit device candidate list field to specify whether
you want to restrict logical partition access to an I/O device:
YES Specifies that only your selected logical partitions can access this I/O device. Note that the
partition must also be in the channel path access or candidate list to access the device. On the
Define Device Candidate List panel, place a slash (/) character to the left of each selected
Partition Name.
NO Specifies that all logical partitions can access this I/O device. NO is the default; all logical
partitions are in this I/O device′s candidate list.

If you specify YES in the Explicit device candidate list field, that panel is displayed. This is done if your
processor is in LPAR mode.

When you press Enter, the panel shown in Figure 113 on page 163 is displayed.

162 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 113. Define device to operating system

3.33.5 Define device to operating system

After pressing the Enter key on the Define Device / Processor panel, the Device / Processor Definition
panel is displayed again. Select another processor or press the Enter key again to display the Define
Device to Operating System Configuration panel that shows all the defined OS configurations. You can
then define the data about device parameters and features that is required by the operating system
configuration.

Select an operating system and the Select (connect/change) action from the context menu (or action
code s ). The panel that is displayed is shown in Figure 114 on page 164.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 163

Figure 114. Define operating system device parameters

3.33.6 Define operating system device parameters

The Parameter/Feature fields vary depending on the I/O device type and operating system type.

A plus sign (+) in the P column indicates that you can use F4=Prompt to get a list of possible values
for the parameter/feature in the same row.

A Yes in the Req. field indicates that a value for the parameter/feature in the same row is required.

You accomplish the change by accepting the default values or by changing the Value entries and
pressing the Enter key. The default values are set in the UIM for the device type. For parameters you
can specify different default values via the OS_PARM_DEFAULT keyword in the HCD profile.

After you have defined the device parameter and feature data and pressed the Enter key, HCD displays
the Assign/Unassign Device to Esoteric panel, as shown in Figure 115 on page 166.

The following device-related MVS operating system features should be reviewed:

• The OFFLINE feature defaults to the value specified in the UIM (which may not be appropriate for
tape devices and ESCON directors). The offline value specified here means the device is not
available in the MVS (UCB) and channel subsystem (UCW) point of view in relation to the
associated MVS image.
• The DYNAMIC feature defaults to Yes for devices that allow dynamic reconfiguration. Check your
subsystems and applications that manage their own devices to make sure they support
dynamically modified device control blocks (UCBs).

164 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 The status of a device may be changed from DYNAMIC=YES to DYNAMIC=NO, and vice versa, by
a software-only dynamic change to a configuration. When changing from DYNAMIC=NO to
DYNAMIC=YES, this must be the only change made to the device at that time. You are allowed,
however, to make changes to a device that is currently defined as DYNAMIC=YES and at the same
time change it to DYNAMIC=NO.
Note: The DYNAMIC parameter is shown only when the appropriate device supports the dynamic
I/O configuration function.
• The SHARED feature defaults to No . Since many MVS installations have more than one image, this
parameter should be carefully checked and changed to Yes if appropriate

Press Enter to assign the esoterics:

1. Specify Yes or No to assign or unassign devices to the esoteric. If you do not want to assign all
the devices currently being defined to this esoteric, you can limit the devices being assigned by
specifying a starting device number and the number of devices to be assigned.
2. Pressing Enter returns you to the I/O Device List panel.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 165

Figure 115. Assign device to an esoteric

3.33.7 Assign device to an esoteric

On the Assign/Unassign Devices to Esoterics panel, overwrite the values in the Assigned column to
assign (Yes) or unassign (No) devices to the selected esoterics.

If you do not want to assign a complete group of devices, you can limit the range by specifying a
starting number and the number of devices. If you omit the number of devices, 1 is assumed.

166 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 116. Defining a NIP console

3.34 Defining a NIP console

Before you can define consoles you must have defined these I/O devices to the operating system.
• On the primary task selection panel, select Define, modify, or view configuration data and on the
resulting panel the object Operating system configurations. HCD displays the Operating System
Configuration List panel showing all OS configurations currently defined in the IODF.
• Select an OS configuration and the Work with consoles action from the context menu (or action
code n ). HCD displays the NIP Console List panel (depending on the type of the selected operating
system).

To define consoles, proceed as follows:

1. Define a console device and connect it to the operating system.
2. Select an Operating System Configuration and the Work with consoles action from the context
menu.
3. Press F11 to add an NIP console definition.
4. On the Add NIP Console panel enter the device number of the device you want to define as a NIP
console and the order number of this console. Pressing Enter again displays the panel, showing
the console just defined.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 167

Figure 117. Build a production IODF

3.35 Build a production IODF

Although HCD validates configuration data as it is entered, a complete validation may not be
performed, because data may not be defined at this time. Therefore, a “post-validation” is performed
at “Build Production IODF” time. This validation might issue messages you have to deal with,
according to their severity. The production IODF is not created if any errors with a severity higher than
′warning′ are produced.

During the validation HCD invokes the IOCP program to perform checking o the channel packaging
rules. Therefore, note that the correct version of the IOCP program must be accessible.

Depending on what is defined in the configuration, the work IODF must contain a definition for at least
one operating system, or one processor or one switch.
• For an MVS operating system, the IODF must contain at least one EDT and one device.
• For a processor the IODF must contain a definition for at least one channel path, one control unit,
and one device. If only channel path(s) of type CFR (coupling facility receiver channel path) are
defined for a processor, control unit and device definition(s) can be omitted.

To build a production IODF, perform the following steps:

• On the primary task selection panel, select Activate or process configuration data.

168 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

• From the resulting panel select Build production I/O definition file, which is now shown in the
visual. Enter the production IODF name and volser and HCD validates the configuration data in the
work IODF.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 169

Figure 118. Production IODF created

3.35.1 Production IODF created

After the production IODF has been built, HCD informs you that the production IODF has been created.

170 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 119. Activating a configuration with HCD

3.36 Activating a configuration with HCD

On the primary task selection panel, select Activate or process configuration data, and from the
resulting panel select Activate or verify configuration dynamically. HCD displays the Activate or Verify
Configuration panel.

Select what you want to activate. The visual shows that you selected task 1. Activate new hardware
and software configuration. The panels when you select the other tasks are similar.

A configuration change is rejected if it includes a hardware delete for an I/O component that is online
to the logical partition from which you are making the change. This is true even if you have entered
YES in the Allow Hardware Deletes option field.

Therefore, you should vary offline any affected I/O component in all logical partitions. For example,
when changing a channel path from unshared to shared, you must allow hardware deletes, and you
must configure the channel path offline and vary offline the associated I/O devices before you activate
the configuration.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 171

Figure 120. How to display active IODF from the HCD

3.37 How to display active IODF from the HCD panels

HCD allows you to view the name and status of the IODF that has been used for IPL or for the last
dynamic activation. The operating system configuration and EDT identifier and, if applicable, the
configuration token, which is currently active in the HSA (hardware system area), are shown. Use the
view active configuration function for an overview of the actual status for dynamic activation, indicating
whether hardware and software changes are allowed.

On the primary task selection panel, select Activate or process configuration data and then View active
configuration.

The View Active Configuration panel is shown in the visual.

172 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

′.

Figure 121. How to display active IODF from an MVS console

3.38 How to display active IODF from an MVS console

You can display the active IODF and HSA usage from an MVS console with the D IOS command as
shown in this visual.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 173

Figure 122. How to display a device status

3.39 How to display a device status

The recommended sequence of display commands to determine the status of a device is:
1. D U,,,ddd,1
This command shows whether the device is online. No I/O operations are performed to present
the display for this command. Therefore, the status displayed by the DISPLAY UNIT command shows
the last known state of the device, and may not represent the actual physical status.
2. D M=DEV(ddd)
If the device is not online, it may be necessary to bring online a path to the device. This command
displays the channels that are defined to access the device, and the state of the paths over those
channels. The output of this command may also display PATHS NOT VALIDATED. This text means that
the path status to the displayed device has not been tested.
3. DS P,dddd
This command displays the actual physical state of the paths to a DASD or tape device. If the path
is not operational, then it is necessary to determine the state of the ESCON link and channel
supporting the path.
4. D M=CHP(cc)
This command displays the state of the paths to devices defined as accessible by this channel.
5. D M=CHP

174 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

This command displays the state (online or offline) of the CHPID. Note that the display is relative
to the logical partition supporting the operating system where the command is entered. Therefore,
a channel shown as offline in this display may only be logically, not physically, offline.

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 175

Figure 123. Producing configuration reports

3.40 Producing configuration reports

With HCD you can create and print the following reports about the configuration data in an IODF:
• Channel Subsystem (CSS) Report
• Switch Report
• Operating System (OS) Report
• CTC Connection Report
• IODF Compare Report

These reports give you a printed overview of your configurations. You can create or build reports
either with HCD panels or batch jobs.

3.40.1.1 Channel Subsystem Report

The Channel Subsystem Report contains all configuration data that is used by the channel subsystem.
This consists of data, in summary and detail, about your processors, partitions, IOCDS, CHPIDs,
switches, control units, and I/O devices.

If you have more than one processor defined in your IODF, you can limit the report to the data for one
processor or partition. When limiting the report to one partition, only those channels are reported that
have the designated partition in their access list. Likewise, only control units and devices that can be
reached through these channels are reported.

176 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

3.40.1.2 Switch Report

The Switch Report contains details about your switch definition, the switch configurations for each
switch, and port definitions.

If your IODF contains data for more than one switch, you can limit the report to the data for one switch
and the configurations for that switch.

3.40.1.3 Operating System Report

The Operating System Report contains the configuration data that is used by the OS/390 operating
system. If your IODF contains data for more than one operating system, you can limit the report to the
data for one operating system.

The Operating System Report function can produce three principal types of reports: The Device Report
contains data about devices and has two parts:
• The Device Detail Report contains detailed data about the devices.
− The Device Report contains summary data. The operating system summary report is not
printed if you limit the OS device report to the data for one operating system.
• The EDT Report contains data about all the EDTs of your configuration.
• The Console Report contains data about all NIP consoles for MVS

3.40.1.4 CTC Connection Report

The CTC Connection Report shows CTC connections in your configuration that are defined through an
ESCON director. In the case of incorrect definitions, the report contains a list of messages with
diagnostic information.

If the IODF contains more than one processor or logical partition, you can limit the report to data for
one processor or partition.

3.40.1.5 Compare IODFs

You can use the Compare IODFs function to compare two IODFs and report the differences between
them. For greater clarity, you can limit the compare reports to certain perspectives of the IODF:
• The Processor Compare Report shows differences in the properties of partitions, CHPIDs, control
units, and devices.
• The Switch Compare Report shows differences in the properties of switches and switch
configurations.
• The OS Configuration Compare Report shows differences in device parameters, in features, in
EDTs, in esoterics, in generics defined for EDTs, and consoles.

3.40.2 HCD graphical reports

It is possible with HCD to view and print graphical representations of your configuration. These may
be stored in a data set for later printing, or viewed on a graphics-capable terminal.
Note: Prerequisite software is required for these functions. Refer to OS/390 Hardware Configuration
Definition: User ′ s Guide , SC28-1848, for details.

Five graphical reports may be obtained as follows:

• LCU Report

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 177

 Shows the CHPIDs, control units, and devices building one or more LCUs for a designated
processor.
• CU Report
Takes a control unit as focal point and shows all attachments of the control unit via switches up to
the processor. It also shows the devices attached to the control unit.
• CHPID Report
Shows, for a given processor, all defined channel paths and what is attached to the CHPID
(switches, CUs, and devices).
• Switch Report
Takes a switch (ESCON director) as focal point and shows everything attached to the switch. Free
ports of the switch are also shown. If the switch is connected to another switch, that switch is
shown as well.
• CF Connect Report
Takes a coupling facility as focal point and shows all connections (CFS/CFR channel pairs) that
exist between the coupling facility and the other processors defined in the IODF.

If Include partitions has been specified, the partitions are shown above each accessible CHPID.

178 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 124. Hardware Configuration Manager (HCM)

3.41 Hardware Configuration Manager (HCM)

HCM is an optional feature of OS/390 and extends the scope of configuration management provided by
HCD.

HCM is a PC-based graphical user interface that allows you to easily navigate through the
configuration diagrams and make changes in the configuration. HCM uses a client/server interface to
HCD that combines the logical and physical aspects of OS/390 hardware configuration management.

All updates to your configuration are done via HCM′s intuitive graphical user interface and, most
important, due to the client/server relationship with HCD, all changes of the logical I/O configuration
are written into the IODF and fully validated and checked for accuracy and completeness by HCD, thus
avoiding unplanned system outages due to incorrect definitions.

The logical information in the IODF represents the operating system and the channel subsystem
definitions; the physical information cabinets, patchports, crossbar switches, cables, locations, and so
on adds the infrastructure to the logical data.

Furthermore, the logical and physical information for each object in the configuration match because
they are created by the same process.

When you create an object, you add its logical and physical information at the same time. When you
connect, for example, a control unit to a processor, the selected control units are logically defined to

Chapter 3. S/390 hardware and I/O management 179

the selected CHPID through a control unit channel interface; the physical connection, including the
cable, is displayed visually in the configuration diagram.

180 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL

Time Sharing Option/Extensions (TSO/E) provides programming services that you can use in system or
application programs. These services consist of programs, macros, and CLISTs.

TSO/E services support a wide range of functions that are useful in writing system programs as well as
application programs that exploit the full-screen capabilities of TSO/E.

CLISTs, REXX execs, servers, and command processors are specific types of programs that you can
write to run in the TSO/E environment.

The Interactive System Productivity Facility/Program Development Facility (ISPF/PDF) is a set of panels
that helps you manage libraries of information on the MVS system. The libraries are made up of units
called data sets that can be stored and retrieved. You can have different kinds of information in data
sets. Some examples are:
• Programs written in languages such as assembler language, COBOL, or PL/I.
• Data such as inventory records, personnel files, or a series of numbers to be processed.

For your program to execute on the computer and perform the work you designed it to do, your
program must be processed by your operating system. Your operating system consists of a base
control program (BCP) with a job entry subsystem (JES2 or JES3) and Data Facility Storage
Management Subsystem Data Facility Product (DFSMSdfp) installed with it.

For the operating system to process a program, programmers must perform certain job control tasks.
These tasks are performed through the job control statements, which are listed in this chapter. The job
control tasks are introduced in the second chapter as well as introductory information about JCL. The
charts in the third chapter divide these task into detailed subtasks. The tasks are:
• Entering jobs
• Processing jobs
• Requesting resources

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 181

Figure 125. OS/390 facilities for system programmers

4.1 Installation and customization facilities

The following products are used to install and customize an OS/390 operating system:
• Time Sharing Option/Extended (TSO/E)
• Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF)
• Job Control Language (JCL)
• Spool Display and Search Facility (SDSF)

As a system programmer, you should be familiar with the basic tools you will use in your daily job.
They are:
• TSO/E and ISPF which are used to:
− Install and customize OS/390 and other products
− Communicate interactively with the operating system
− Define and maintain user definitions
− Create data sets and JCL, and submit jobs
− Communicate with other TSO/E users
− Develop and maintain programs in languages such as assembler, COBOL, FORTRAN, PASCAL,
PL/I, REXX, and CLIST
− Manipulate data
• SDSF which is used to manage and monitor jobs and systems resources

182 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

• JCL which enables you to submit jobs and allocate resources

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 183

Figure 126. TSO/E required customization

4.1.1 Time Sharing Option/Extended (TSO/E)

TSO/E is a base element of the OS/390 operating system that allows users to interactively work with
the system. After the required customization, users will be able to log on and issue commands from
TSO/E.

Each user is defined to TSO/E by storing its user ID, logon procedure name, and the TSO/E resources
which it has authority to use. This can be done in two ways:
• User Attribute Data Set (UADS), using ACCOUNT command, or
• RACF database
If RACF is installed, it can be used to control access to the system and store information about each
TSO/E user. The RACF data base contains profiles for every entity (user, data set, or group) defined to
RACF. For more information about the RACF, see OS/390 Security Server (RACF) System
Programmer ′ s Guide , SC28-1913.

As optional in the TSO/E customization, you can:

• Customize VTAM or TCAM (depending on what access methods are used in your installation):
− VTAM: change VTAM session protocols, provide substitute characters for unavailable
keyboard characters, and override default values used to start VTAM.
− TCAM: override the default values used to start TCAM.
• Define logon limits, customizing the logon process

184 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 • Make commands and programs available
• Specify commands not supported in the background
• Specify commands and programs to run on the command/program invocation platform
• Customize HELP data
• Make host services or ISPF/PDF available
• Set performance objectives
• Monitor and protect TSO/E resources
• Customize TSO/E for different languages
For more details about customization, refer to OS/390 TSO/E Customization , SC28-1965.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 185

Figure 127. TSO/E TCAS start procedure

4.1.1.1 TCAS start procedure

Before a user can log on to TSO/E, both VTAM and the terminal control address space (TCAS) must be
active in the system. The system operator enters the START command to start VTAM. Once VTAM has
been started, the system operator enters the START command to start TSO/E and activate TCAS. TCAS
accepts logons from TSO/VTAM users and creates an address space for each user.

The TCAS start procedure is usually stored at SYS1.PROCLIB. In the start procedure you specify the
TSOKEYxx SYS1.PARMLIB member that contains the parameters to be used by TCAS to control the
time-sharing buffers, maximum number of users, and other operational variables.

When a user logs on, the VTAM terminal I/O coordinator (VTIOC) is initialized. VTIOC controls the
movement of data between TSO/E and VTAM. SYS1.PARMLIB member TSOKEY00 or an
installation-defined alternate member contains parameters that are used during VTIOC initialization. If
a member other than TSOKEY00 is used, the operator must include the member name either on the
START command or in the procedure that the START command invokes. For a description of TSOKEY00,
see OS/390 Initialization and Tuning Reference , SC28-1752.

186 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 128. TSO/E logon procedure

4.1.1.2 TSO/E logon procedure

A TSO/E logon procedure contains JCL statements that execute the required program and allocate the
required data sets to enable a user to acquire the resources needed to use TSO/E. To logon to TSO/E,
a user must have access to at least one logon procedure.

The logon procedure is usually located in data set SYS1.PROCLIB, or another library identified in the
PROCxx concatenation in the JES2 startup procedure or in the IATPLBxx DD statement in the JES3
startup procedure. TSO/E provides a logon procedure in SYS1.PROCLIB called IKJACCNT for system
programmers to access the system, for example, during the initial installation or if there are problems
with the RACF data base. The foil shows a sample logon procedure. The statements specify:
PGM=IKJEFT01 Identifies the program to executed. IKJEFT01 is the TSO/E supplied Terminal Monitor
Program (TMP) that provides an interface between the user command processors,
and the TSO/E control program. It obtains commands, gives control to command
processors, and monitors their execution. This program can also be executed in the
background by submitting JCL. Instead of the IKJEFT01 program, an installation can
use the Session Manager program (ADFMDF03) or its own terminal monitor program.
PARM You can pass to IKJEFT01 a command, CLIST, REXX, or a program to be interpreted
as the first line of input from the terminal after the user has logged on. In the
example, it executes a CLIST or a REXX named BRDCST.
DYNAMNBR Defines the number of data sets that can be dynamically allocated at the same time.
A constant of 2 is always added to the DYNAMNBR value you specify. It allows data
sets to be more quickly reallocated because control blocks for data sets remain in

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 187

 storage, even after the data sets have been de-allocated. You should choose the
value for DYNAMNBR carefully. The value should be large enough so that it is not
readily exceeded by the number of dynamic allocation requests made during the
user′s session. However, the larger the value you specify for DYNAMNBR the more
virtual storage is used. The actual amount of virtual storage depends on the number
of data sets the user allocates and de-allocates in a session. The value cannot
exceed the number of concurrently-allocated resources specified in the
SYS1.PARMLIB member ALLOCxx, parameter TIOT SIZE. For details, refer to OS/390
MVS Initialization and Tuning Reference , SC28-1752.
SYSIN Specifies that SYSIN is the user′s terminal.
SYSPRINT Specifies that SYSPRINT is to be directed to the user′s terminal.

Additional data sets can be allocated dynamically during the user′s session or can be defined in the
logon procedure. The following DD statements have special meaning and can be included in the logon
procedure:
SYSPROC Defines the current REXX exec or CLIST library to be searched when the user uses the
implicit form of the EXEC command. The visual shows the explicit form of the EXEC
command and the library name is specified in the command. The implicit form would be
BRDCST.
SYSEXEC Defines the current REXX exec library concatenation to the EXEC command when users
use the implicit form of the command. By default, the system searches SYSEXEC first,
followed by SYSPROC.

The data set described in SYSPROC and SYSEXEC DD statements must be partitioned, and have a
record format of V, VB, F, or FB. You can allocate them dynamically using the ALLOCATE command and
activate them with the ALTLIB command.

188 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 129. TSO/E logon process in a VTAM environment

4.1.1.3 TSO/E logon process in a VTAM environment

In a VTAM environment, when a user enters a LOGON command to the TSO applID:
1. VTAM receives the command and passes it to the TCAS address space.
2. If the maximum number of users logged on in the system is reached, the logon is rejected; if not,
and the user ID was not specified, TCAS prompts for the user ID.
3. Once the user ID is specified, TCAS verifies that the user has authority to use TSO/E. Depending
on the installation customization, a full-screen logon panel is shown to the user. Figure 130 on
page 190 shows the panel displayed when the user is RACF defined. The values shown in the
fields PROCEDURE, ACCT NMBR, SIZE, and COMMAND are the same the user entered for the
previous TSO/E session. If the first time, they are the default values. The command entered in the
COMMAND field is executed after any command entered in the PARM field on the EXEC statement
of the logon procedure.
4. After the ENTER key is pressed, TSO/E verifies the values entered, then the user ID and the logon
procedure name is passed to JES. The JCL is interpreted and converted. The MASTER creates
the user address space and the resources specified in the JCL are allocated.
5. The user receives a screen with the READY prompt at the left top corner of the screen. This is
called line-mode TSO/E . Now TSO/E is ready to accept commands and user interfaces, such as
ISPF or SDSF can be called.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 189

Figure 130. TSO/E full-screen logon panel

4.1.1.4 Using TSO/E

The visual shows that a command ISPPDF was specified. It allocates the required data sets and calls
ISPF. In such cases, instead of entering TSO/E in line-mode, the user would receive the ISPF Primary
Menu panel and would be in full-screen mode.

The user finishes a TSO/E session by issuing a LOGOFF command.

You probably will not use TSO/E in line-mode. The user interface provided by ISPF is a friendly way to
work with TSO/E. In the following topics we will present some hints to help you when you are using
TSO/E and ISPF.

For more information, refer to OS/390 TSO/E Primer , GC28-1967, and OS/390 TSO/E User ′ s Guide ,
SC28-1968.

4.1.1.5 Interrupting a TSO/E function

The Attention Interrupt key allows you to interrupt or end a process that is taking place. If you are in a
process and you want to stop or see a message requesting information you do not have, you can press
the attention interrupt key to end the process.

The attention interrupt key often is labeled PA1. Sometimes it is called an escape key and is labeled
Esc.

190 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

4.1.1.6 Using TSO/E as batch job

Instead of waiting at a terminal for your job to run, you can use the terminal to prepare a job
containing the commands and data you would have entered at the terminal. Then use the SUBMIT
command to run the job. In this case, you are using the facilities of TSO/E exactly as if you submitted
the commands individually at the terminal. For your job, you need these job control language (JCL)
statements:
• A JOB statement to identify your job
• An EXEC statement with the name of the TSO/E terminal monitor program (IKJEFT01, IKJEFT1A, or
IKJEFT1B)
• At least, the following ddnames:
1. SYSTSPRT which is used to control the output for your job. You can specify this DD as
SYSOUT.
2. SYSTSIN which is used as input for your TSO/E commands. It can be in stream (use an /* to
indicate the end of the stream).
• The DDNAMEs required by the application you intend to run.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 191

Figure 131. TSO/E languages

4.1.1.7 TSO/E languages

In the TSO/E environment there are two available languages: CLIST and REXX.

CLIST is an interpretative language that helps you to work more efficiently with TSO/E. It is a
command list language because the most basic CLISTs are lists of TSO/E commands. When invoked it
issues the TSO/E commands in sequence. The CLIST language includes the programming tools you
need to write extensive, structured applications. CLISTs can perform a number of complex tasks, from
displaying a series of full-screen panels to managing programs written in other languages.

The REstructured eXtended eXecutor (REXX) language is a programming language that is extremely
versatile. Aspects such as common programming structure, readability, and free format make it a
good language for beginners and general users. Yet because the REXX language can be intermixed
with commands to different host environments, provides powerful functions, and has extensive
mathematical capabilities, it is also suitable for more experienced computer professionals. The TSO/E
implementation of the REXX language allows REXX execs to run in any MVS address space. You can
write a REXX exec that includes TSO/E services and run it in a TSO/E address space, or you can write
an application in REXX to run outside of a TSO/E address space.

CLIST and REXX can be used to customize and tailor your TSO/E environment specifically for the
applications you want to use. Figure 133 on page 195 shows a sample CLIST procedure to invoke a
basic ISPF environment.

192 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 132. ISPF components

4.1.2 Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF)

ISPF consists of four major components:
1. Dialog Manager, which provides services to dialogs and end-users. It is composed of six
elements:
• Functions: direct the dialog′s processing sequence. They can be written as:
− REXX or CLIST command procedures
− Programs (COBOL, FORTRAN, Assembler, C/370, Pascal, PL/I, APL2)
• Panel definitions
• Message definitions
• Table: two-dimensional arrays that store dialog data. They can be f or temporary use, or they
can be stored for use in future ISPF sessions. Not all dialogs use tables.
• File tailoring skeletons: work like a fill-in-the-blank exercise. They take dialog variables and
put them into a data set containing statements that control the output format. Some dialogs can
use this kind of resource.
• Dialog variables: pass information among dialog functions and ISPF services.
2. Program Development Facility (PDF), which provides services to assist the dialog or application
developer. For example, the the editor services.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 193

3. Software Configuration Library Manager (SCLM), which provides services to application developers
to manage their application development libraries.
4. Client/Server, which allows a user to run ISPF on a programmable workstation, to display the
panels using the display function of the workstation operating system, and to integrate workstation
tools and data with host tools and data.

194 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 133. Sample CLIST to start ISPF environment

4.1.2.1 ISPF required data sets

ISPF runs in a TSO/E environment. Before ISPF can be started, some data sets must be available; this
can be done by allocating them in the logon procedure or dynamically using the TSO/E ALLOC
command. The required DD names are:
• SYSEXEC for REXX, or SYSPROC for CLIST and/or REXX data sets
• ISPPLIB for panel definition libraries
• ISPTLIB for input table libraries
• ISPMLIB for message libraries
• ISPPROF for the user profile. ISPF and many other products installe d under TSO/ISPF use this
data set for storing variables and settings to be used from one TSO/ISPF session to another.
The DD names ISPTABL, for output tables, and ISPSLIB for skeletons may be requested for some
specifics applications.

For some data sets, if not pre-allocated, ISPF allocates them:

• ISPLOG DD name, is the data set where ISPF logs commands issued by the user and some ISPF
functions log errors detected.
• ISPLIST DD name, ISPF uses this data set when user requests printed output.

The DD names ISPCTLx, where x can be 1− 9 , A − W, are used by ISPF as a temporary data set. ISPF
can use one for each logical screen to generate JCL or utility control statements or to generate

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 195

listings. ISPF can run up to 32 logical screens at one time. The default value is 8. The installation can
change the default value by modifying the ISRCONFG table. ISPCTL0 is used only by Edit for the
SUBMIT command.

The DD names ISPWRKx are used by ISPF for file tailoring services with ISPFILE allocated to a PDS.
The DD names ISPLSTx are used for generated listings. Refer to Figure 133 on page 195 for a JCL
sample that can be inserted into a logon procedure. The same pre-allocation can be done by the
ALLOCATE command in a CLIST or in a REXX exec to be executed before the ISPF start.

Figure 133 on page 195 shows a sample CLIST for allocating temporary data sets for the use of two
logical screens.

196 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 134. ISPF Primary Option m e n u

4.1.2.2 ISPF Primary Option Menu

ISPF is started in a TSO/E environment through an ISPF, or PDF, or ISPSTART command. The ISPF
Primary Option Menu contains the options that you can use to create your own applications online. If
your installation has a customized ISPF Primary Option Menu, the menu might not contain all of
options shown in this visual, or it might contain certain installation-specific options.

4.1.2.3 ISPF Help function

ISPF has a powerful Help function which you can use to learn how to use all default ISPF options. You
access it by pressing the Help program function key, or typing help in the COMMAND line. You can
see and change the program function key assignments by using the KEYS command.

You can learn how to use ISPF by just using HELP. At the Primary Option Menu press Help to learn
about the options. In the Help panel, press Help again to learn how to move through help panels.
Some Help options are cursor sensitive, you have to move the cursor to that option to get more
information.

The Interactive System Productivity Facility Getting Started , SC34-4440, provides a good source of
information for beginners in the ISPF environment.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 197

Figure 135. Allocating data sets with ISPF

4.1.2.4 Allocating a data set

A data set, or file, is an area that is reserved on either disk, or tape, to enable you write programs and
store data. Before you can edit or store data, you must instruct the system to allocate some space on
disk, often referred to as Direct Access Storage Devices (DASD), and provide information to identify the
format of this data set.

ISPF Option 3.2 enables you to reserve some space on a storage device and identify this space with a
data set name, often referred to as a DSN or DSNAME .

Data set name standards are site dependant, and may be protected by RACF or another security
product. If you do not have the authority to allocate a DSN with a specific name, your request will fail
and you will receive an error message. A data set name can be 44 characters in length, and each
qualifier must be separated by a period (.) and must not be greater than eight characters. For
example:

• SYS1.PARMLIB
• SYS1.PARMLIB.BACKUP.D99156
• MYUSER.PRIVATE.JCLLIB
• MYUSER.TEST.NEW.SYSTEM.JCLLIB

The High Level Qualifier (HLQ) is the first part of the DSN. In the examples, the HLQs are SYS1
(usually reserved for MVS system DSNs), and MYUSER, which could be your user ID. Some system
data sets must be named as specified, but personal or in-house data sets should be named to be

198 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

meaningful and easy to associate with a user or application, and to enable efficient security and DASD
maintenance strategies to be maintained.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 199

Figure 136. ISPF Option 3.2 panel

4.1.2.5 Allocating a data set

The visual shows the Data Set Utility panel that appears when you choose ISPF option 3.2.

Let us suppose you want to create a data set with the same attributes as SYS1.PARMLIB. Just specify
the name of the model data set:
Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:
Data Set Name . . . ′ SYS1.PARMLIB′
Imbed DSN in single quotes, otherwise ISPF will add your TSO prefix as HLQ. To know your TSO
prefix, enter TSO PROFILE in the COMMAND field. If NOPREFIX appears, you do not need imbed the
DSN in quotes.

After entering the model data set name with blanks in the COMMAND line, ISPF displays a panel with
information about the model data set and stores this information so you can use it to allocate a new
data set. Pressing the ENTER key causes the previous panel to be shown. On the COMMAND line,
enter an A and specify:
• A data set name in the ISPF Library:
Project . . Group . . . Type . . . .
Any data set name with a three-level name can be entered in the Project, Group, and Type fields,
with one level of the name in each field. ISPF does not add your prefix as HLQ.
• A data set name and optionally a volume:

200 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:
Data Set Name . . . ′ HLQ.XXX.XXXX.XXX′ Imbed in single quotes,
unless you want the HLQ
to equal your prefix
If both a library and a data set name are specified on the same panel, the data set name takes priority.
Therefore, to specify a library, leave the Data Set Name field blank.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 201

Figure 137. Allocate New Data Set panel

4.1.2.6 Allocate New Data Set panel

After pressing the ENTER key, the Allocate New Data Set panel is displayed. This panel shows the
information ISPF has stored. You can specify new or change the data set requirements.

In this example we will allocate a partitioned data set (PDS). This type of data set allows individual
members within the data set. Most environments now utilize DFSMS/MVS to control data set
allocation; therefore, it is not necessary to specify management class, storage class, or data class
information. In most cases the defaults will be satisfactory. We must, however, specify the following:
Space units Identifies whether the allocation will be in blocks (BLKS), tracks (TRKS), cylinders
(CYLS), KB, MB, bytes, or records.
Primary quantity Identifies the amount of primary space you want to allocate in relation to the space
units previously identified.
Secondary quantity Identifies the space that can be allocated for secondary extents, if the primary
quantity fills up. Non-VSAM data sets can have a maximum of 16 extents, which
includes up to five multiple extents that may have been used to satisfy the primary
extents.
Note: The exception to the 16 extent limitation are partitioned data set extended
(PDSE) data sets which can have up to 123 extents.
Directory blocks Must be specified for partitioned data sets (PDS). A directory is an index used by
the system to locate members in the partitioned data set. It consists of 256-byte
records, each containing directory entries. There is one directory entry for each

202 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 member. The directory is written at the beginning of the primary space. It must fit
in the first extent of the data set. For partitioned data sets (PDS) ensure you
request enough directory space allow for growth of the data set. You cannot
lengthen the directory once the data set is created. If the directory runs out of
space, you must recreate the data set.
Note: The number of member entries that fit in a directory block is as follows:
• For a data set with ISPF statistics: six entries per block
• For a data set without ISPF statistics: 21 entries per block
• For a load module data set: four to seven entries depending upon attributes.
Record format Can be any valid combination of the following:
• F - Fixed length records
• V - Variable length records
• U - Undefined format records
• B - Blocked records
• A - ASA printer control characters
• M - Machine code printer control characters
• S - Standard (for F) or spanned (for V) - sequential data sets only
• T - Track-overflow feature.
The option we will use for a partitioned data set is FB
Record length The logical record length, in bytes, of the records to be stored in the data set. In
the case of a JCL or program library this value is 80 bytes.
Block size The block size (physical record length), in bytes, of the blocks to be stored in the
data set. If records are specified, the block size specifies the average record
length.

After pressing the PF3 exit key, the successful response to the allocation is indicated on the Data Set
Utility panel that reappears. You are returned to this after processing the Allocate New Data Set
panel. The top right of the screen will indicate Data set allocated .

You have now created a partitioned data set with the name, MYUSER.PRIVATE.JCLLIB . This is an
empty data set, so the first thing you will do is add a member to this data set. See 4.1.2.7, “Adding a
member to a new PDS” on page 204.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 203

Figure 138. Edit Entry panel - option 2

4.1.2.7 Adding a member to a new PDS

You can add a member to a new PDS using ISPF Option 2 - Edit. When you choose this option, the
Entry Edit panel is displayed. As discussed previously, if your data set has three qualifiers, you can
use the Project/Group/Type fields to identify your data set. The advantage is that ISPF stores this
information in your profile and the next time you enter this panel the fields are set by the saved
information. If your data set does not have three qualifiers, you must use the Other Partitioned or
Sequential Data Set field, embedding the data set name in single quotes, unless you want ISPF to add
your prefix as an HLQ. It is necessary to specify a member name. In the example in the visual,
IEFBR14 is the member being created.

204 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 139. ISPF Edit panel

4.1.2.8 Editing a data set

You use the Edit function to create, display, or change data stored in partitioned or sequential data
sets. When the editor displays existing data, each line consists of a six-column Line Command field
followed by a 72-column data field To view data that is not displayed, use the scroll commands. The
following are PDF default values:
F7/19 Scrolls up F10/22 Scrolls left
F8/20 Scrolls down F11/23 Scrolls right
In Edit and View mode you can issue line commands and primary commands.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 205

Figure 140. ISPF edit - some line commands

4.1.2.9 Line commands

Line commands affect only a single line or block of lines. You enter line commands by typing them in
the line command field and pressing Enter. With line commands you can:
• Insert or delete lines
• Repeat lines
• Rearrange lines or overlay portions of lines
• Simplify text entry and formatting
• Define an input mask
• Shift data
• Include or exclude lines from the display
• Control tabs and boundaries for editing
• Convert some types of special temporary lines to data lines.
The visual shows some line commands you can use. To learn about line commands, type ? in the line
command field and press Enter; this causes a short Help message to appear at top right of the screen.
Pressing HELP again causes a long message to appear. Pressing HELP again causes a help panel
with all the line commands to appear.

206 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 141. ISPF Edit panel - inserting lines

4.1.2.10 Inserting lines

The visual shows an example of the line command Insert . You type I to insert one line or Ixx, where
xx is the number of lines you want to insert.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 207

Figure 142. ISPF edit - repeating and deleting lines

4.1.2.11 Repeating and deleting lines

You can delete lines by issuing the line command D which will Delete one line, or Dxx, where xx is the
number of lines to delete. You can also delete a block of lines by using DD at the beginning and at the
end of the block.

Copying lines can be done by issuing C for copying one line, or Cxx, for copying xx lines, or indicate
with CC the beginning and the ending of lines to be copied. After indicating the lines, you must tell the
Editor where to copy the lines to. This is done by typing either a B (for before) or an A (for after) on the
line following or preceding where you want the data copied.

208 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 143. ISPF edit - save and cancel

4.1.2.12 Primary commands

Primary commands affect the entire data set. Y o u t y p e t h e m o n t h e C o m m a n d = = = > f i e l d . You

use a primary command to:
• Control your editing environment
• Find a specific line
• Find and change a character string
• Combine several members into one
• Split a member into two or more members
• Submit data to the job stream
• Save the edited data or cancel without saving
• Sort data
• Delete lines
• Access dialog element models
• Run an edit macro.
Type the PROFILE primary command to see the profile options you are using to edit the data set. The
RECOVERY ON option permits you recover the changes you made before a session failure. This option
creates a copy of all changes you did after a SAVE command. When a session fails, the next time you

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 209

return to the TSO/ISPF Edit function, you can edit the same data set with all updates and you can
continue editing and save or cancel.

The UNDO command allows you to remove changes to a member during an edit session. Each UNDO
issued removes the change performed since the previous ENTER was done. Subsequent UNDO
commands remove previous updates in sequence from the newest change to the oldest that have
occurred during this edit session. UNDO can only be used with the RECOVERY ON, SETUNDO REC, or
SETUNDO STG profile options. You can prepare profiles, give them names, and choose the
appropriate profile to edit a data set by typing its name at the EDIT Entry Panel PROFILE field.

Saving new or updated files: After updating:

• To save your data issue the SAVE primary command. With the profile option AUTOSAVE ON ,
pressing the F3/F15 END key ends the edition and saves the data.
• Canceling your updates can be done by issuing the CANCEL primary command. This removes all
changes made since the last SAVE was performed.

210 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 144. JCL streams and jobs

4.1.3 JCL streams and jobs

For the operating system to process a program, system programmers or application programmers
must perform certain job control tasks. These tasks are performed through the job control statements,
which consist of:
• JCL statements
• JES2 control statements
• JES3 control statements

The operating system performs many job control tasks automatically. You can influence the way your
job is processed by the JCL and Job Entry Subsystem (JES) parameters you code. The job entry
subsystem you will be using will be either JES2 or JES3.

Before you begin to create a JCL stream, which will be submitted and processed by the operating
system as what is commonly called a job , or a batch job you might be wondering; What exactly is a
job?

You enter a program into the operating system as a job step. A job step consists of the job control
statements that control execution of a program and request the resources needed to run the program.
A job step is identified by an EXEC statement.

A job is a collection of related job steps and can contain up to 255 steps. A job must have:

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 211

 • A JOB statement that assigns a name to the job and marks its beginning. The JOB statement is
also used to provide some administrative information like security, accounting, and identification.
Every job has one and only one JOB statement.
• An EXEC statement marks the beginning of a job step, assigns a name to the step, and identifies
the program or procedure to be executed in the step. You can add various parameters to the
EXEC statement to customize the way the program executes. Every job has least one EXEC
statement.

A job can contain DD (Data Definition) statements to identify and describe the input and output data
sets to be used in the step.

212 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 145. Creating jobs - an introduction to JCL

4.1.3.1 Creating data sets using JCL statements

You can use JCL statements to create, delete, catalog, or uncatalog data sets. This visual shows the
JCL we will use to create a data set and to review some of the fundamental JCL statements. For more
details refer to OS/390 MVS JCL Reference , GC28-1757.

The JCL statements:

• Start in position one, and are identified by a / / at the beginning of the line
• The commentary lines are identified by a / / at start of the line
• Are coded from column 1 to column 71
• A comma indicates that the statement has continuation
• A continuation of a statement must start from column 4 to 16
• / / and rest of statement with blanks indicates the end of the job

Comments must be separated from operators/parameter by at least one blank.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 213



EDIT MYUSER.PRIVATE.JCLLIB(IEFBR14) - 01.00 Columns 00001
Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR
****** ***************************** Top of Data ***********************
000100 //MYUSER01 JOB (ITSO),′ IEFBR14′ , CLASS=A,MSGCLASS=X
000110 //*------This is a comment line ------------------------
 
Figure 146. The job statement explained

JOB Statement (Job Card): The first line of the IEFBR14 member is the job statement. It specifies
parameters to be used by the job entry subsystem to schedule this job for processing. The format of
the job card, and the importance of the data specified in the job card vary from installation to
installation. The following fields are important:
jobname The first field is the jobname, in this case MYUSER01. It can have up to eight
characters. Some sites perform security checking against the job name to
ensure standards, usually the ID of the user who submitted the job. Let us
suppose the standard is: user ID suffixed with at least one alphanumeric
character. If MYUSER is the user ID, MYUSER01 matches the standards. Other
sites might not have any job name restrictions.
JOB Identifies the job to the system, when submitted. It must be present, must follow
the jobname and there must be at least one space between them.
Account Some sites use this field for accounting and job processing information. In the
example, the value is (ITSO) .
programmer name The next field is the programmer name field, which you can use to identify the
member name, for example. In the example, ′ IEFBR14′ is the member name.
job class The C L A S S = field identifies the JES job class this job will execute under. In the
example, CLASS=A is the JES job class. Many sites do not use this option, and
the JES class is set according to your user ID. Job classes are set up at JES
initialization.
msgclass class M S G C L A S S = assigns the job log to an output class. The output class and its
characteristics are identified in a parameter file used at JES initialization.

EXEC Statement: Figure 147 shows an example of the EXEC statement.


000100 //MYUSER01 JOB (ITSO),′ IEFBR14′ , CLASS=A,MSGCLASS=X
000200 //*------This is a comment line ---------------------------
000300 //STEP1 EXEC PGM=IEFBR14
 
Figure 147. The EXEC statement

In the EXEC you specify:

Step name In the example STEP1 gives a name to the step. We could have called the step
name, IEFBR14, or any name that will help you identify the step. In a large job,
with many steps, unique step names can assist you when diagnosing problems.
The choice is up to you.
EXEC Identifies a step job. It must be present.
PGM= Specifies the name of the program to be executed. In this case the program
name is IEFBR14 .

214 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 148. EXEC statement parameters

4.1.3.2 EXEC statement parameters

Two other parameters that you might use on the EXEC are:
• The REGION parameter specifies the quantity of virtual storage (or central storage when
ADDRSPC=REAL coded) a step requires. If no REGION parameter is specified, the system uses
an installation default specified at JES initialization. Some programs may need more storage than
is allowed by default. To permit the program to get more storage, you can code the REGION
parameter as follows:
//STEP1 EXEC PGM=progname,REGION=4096K.
This permits the programs to get up to 4 MB of storage below 16 MB and up to the installation
default storage above 16 MB (IBM default is 32 MB).
• The COND parameter is used to inform the system to test return codes from previous job steps and
determine whether to bypass this job step. You can specify one or more tests on the COND
parameter, and you can test return codes from particular job steps or from every job step that has
completed processing. If the test conditions are satisfied, the system evaluates the COND
parameter as true and bypasses the job step. If the test conditions are satisfied, the system
evaluates the COND parameter as false and executes the job step. For example:
//STEP2 EXEC PGM=IEFBR14,COND=(0,NE)
With this statement, the system checks the return code from all previous steps, and if they were
not equal to zero, then does not execute this step. You could also check for return codes that are
EQual to, GT (greater than), LT (less than), GE (greater than or equal to), and LE (less than or
equal to). You can check the return code in a specific step by coding:

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 215

 //STEP2 EXEC PGM=IEFBR14,COND=(0,NE,STEP1)
With this statement, if STEP1 ends with return code zero, then STEP2 will be executed.

216 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 149. JCL DD statements: DDname, DSN

4.1.4 DD statement parameters

It should be stated at this time that the program IEFBR14 actually does nothing. But it enables you to
submit a valid job and the system can process the DD statements identified in the JCL. This allows
you to allocate, delete, catalog, and uncatalog data sets by using a batch process.

At job initialization, once the program IEFBR14 has been located, the system allocates the data sets
specified in the DD statements, then the control is passed to program IEFBR14, that does nothing, and
you get notified that your job is done.

Figure 150 shows the DD statement that identifies the data set we want to create.


000100 //MYUSER01 JOB (ITSO),′ IEFBR14′ , CLASS=A,MSGCLASS=X
000200 //*------This is a comment line ---------------------------
000300 //STEP1 EXEC PGM=IEFBR14
000400 //NEWDD DD DSN=MYUSER.IEFBR14.TEST.NEWDD,
000500 // DISP=(NEW,CATLG,DELETE),
000600 // UNIT=SYSDA,
000700 // SPACE=(CYL,(10,10,45)),
000800 // LRECL=80,
000900 // BLKSIZE=3120
 
Figure 150. The DD statement and DISP parameter

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 217

This statement shows some of the parameters that can be associated with a DD statement.
• DDname - Used to give a name to DD. NEWDD is the name assigned in the example. The
programs refer to DD names instead of dsnames. So, unless a program allocates dynamically, all
ddnames referred by a program must be coded. For example, if a program in a step needs a file
identified as OUTFILE, you must code a DD named OUTFILE, identifying the relevant data set. In
the example, IEFBR14 does not use data sets. So you can choose any ddname you want.
• DSN - Used to identify the data set. In the example MYUSER.IEFBR14.TEST.NEWDD is the data set.
Note: You can direct outputs to JES by coding SYSOUT instead of DSN. In the following example, the
ddname SYSPRINT is being directed to a SYSOUT, CLASS=B
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=B
IEFBR14 does not put files, so you can use that resource in this case.

218 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 151. JCL DD statement parameters: Disp, Unit

4.1.4.1 DD statement: DISP parameter

The DISP parameter describes the status of a data set to the system and tells what to do with the data
set after termination of the step or job. You specify this value for both normal and abnormal
termination.

The first field identifies the STATUS of the data set and how to control access to it. It can be:
NEW Indicates the data set will be created and the job will have exclusive control of the data set.
That means no other job can access this data set until the last step in this job that refers to this
data set ends. NEW is the default.
OLD Indicates the data set exists and the job requires exclusive access to it.
MOD Indicates that if the data set exists, data will be appended to the end of the data set, otherwise,
a new data set will be created. The job requires exclusive access to data set.
SHR Indicates that the data set can be shared by other users.

The second field in the DISP parameter indicates to the system what to do with the data set when the
step finishes NORMAL . It can be:
CATLG Catalog the data set
UNCATLG Uncatalog the data set
DELETE Delete the data set

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 219

PASS Pass the data set to the subsequent steps
KEEP Keep the data set intact

The third field in the DISP parameter indicates the ABNORMAL completion action. It can be: DELETE,
CATLG, UNCATLG, or KEEP.

In the example, the status field specifies to create the data set. In the normal termination of the step,
to catalog. In abnormal to delete the data set. To delete a data set that exists you code its DSN and
DISP=(OLD,DELETE,DELETE).

4.1.4.2 DD statement: UNIT parameter

This parameter identifies the device or type of device on which the data set will be allocated. You use
this parameter to specify the number of devices to be used. If the data set exists, you only need to
specify the device type if the data data is not cataloged. Most installations now administer disk
storage with the Storage Management System (DFSMS/MVS). With SMS, you do not need to use the
UNIT parameter to specify a device for SMS-controlled data sets. Some common examples are:
UNIT=SYSDA Allocates the data set on a direct access device (DASD)
UNIT=3390 Allocates the data set on a 3390 type disk.
UNIT=SYSALLDA Allocates the data set on a direct access device (DASD)
UNIT=TAPE Allocates the file on a TAPE device.

220 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 152. DD statement parameters: Space, Lrecl, blksize

4.1.4.3 DD statement: SPACE parameter

The SPACE DD parameter is required for allocating data sets on DASD. It identifies the space
allocation required for your data set. Before a data set can be created on disk the system must know
how much space the data set will require and how the space is to be measured. You can code it as
follows:
SPACE=(type,(primary-qty,second-qty,directory))

Where type can be:

TRK Requests that space be allocated in tracks.
CYL Requests that space be allocated in cylinders.
block length You specify here the block length to request an allocation in number of blocks.
Indicates that the values specified for primary and secondary allocations are block
quantities, and directs the system to compute the number of tracks to allocate using a
block length. For example, SPACE=(3150,(5,1)) means that the system will allocate five
blocks, each block having 3150 bytes, as primary space and one block as secondary
space.
record length Specifies that the average record length in bytes will be used to allocate space. This is
only applicable if SMS is active and the AVGREC parameter is coded.

The system allocates DASD space in whole tracks. The number of tracks required depends on how the
records are blocked.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 221

primary-qty specifies the initial allocation amount.

secondary-qty specifies an additional allocation amount. The system does not allocate additional
space until it is needed.

directory you must code for a partitioned data set, to indicate the number of blocks the system must
reserve for the directory. Partitioned Data Sets Extended (PDSE) grow dynamically, if you specify
directory size, SMS uses the size you specify only if you later convert the PDSE to a PDS. You omit
this parameter for sequential data sets.

Some examples of how you can code are:

SPACE=(TRK,4) To allocate space to a sequential data set, requesting four tracks, only
primary space.
SPACE=(CYL,(5,2)) To allocate space to a sequential data set, five cylinders as primary
allocation space and two cylinders as secondary.
SPACE=(CYL,(10,,100) To allocate space to a partitioned data set, only primary allocation of 100
cylinders and 100 directory blocks.

4.1.4.4 LRECL and BLKSIZE parameters

Programs access data sets through ddnames. The ddnames are defined in the programs. Like them,
data set characteristics like data set organization, logical record size and record size are also defined
for the programs. During the allocation process you have to specify some of these characteristics.
Some DD statement parameters you can use to specify the data set characteristics are:
LRECL Identifies the data set logical record size.
BLKSIZE Specifies the maximum length, in bytes, of a block.
RECFM Identifies the the record format.
DSORG Indentifies the data set organization. If you do not specify DSORG, the system uses the
information in SPACE to determine if the data set should be sequential or partitioned

These parameters are part of Data set Control Block (DCB) information and can be coded in the JCL
as follows:
// DCB=(LRECL=80,BLKSIZE=3120,RECFM=FB,DSORG=PO)
or as individual parameters, without the need to specify the DCB=(....) parameter, for example:
// LRECL=80,
// BLKSIZE=3120,
// RECFM=FB,
// DSORG=PO

If BLKSIZE is not specified, the system will determine what it considers to be an optimum block size for
the device type on which the data set will be allocated. For a data set with fixed record format (all
records with same size), the BLKSIZE must be a multiple of LRECL. For variable record size, the
BLKSIZE must be a multiple of the greatest record plus four.

222 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 153. Submitting a job

4.1.5 Submitting a job

You have now created data set MYUSER.PRIVATE.JCLLIB, built your JCL member, IEFBR14, and you
are ready to SUBMIT this job.

To submit the JCL stream, Enter SUB (submit) on the command line. The TSO/E command processor
sends the JCL statements to JES.

After entering the command, you should receive the following message indicating that your job was
submitted successfully:
JOB jobname(jobnumber) SUBMITTED
***

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 223

Figure 154. ISPF option 3.4

4.1.5.1 ISPF option 3.4

If you select ISPF option 3.4 you will access the Data Set List Utility panel as shown in the visual.

You can use this option to manage all data sets that you have access to. Move the cursor to the
Dsname Level field and enter the high level qualifier of the data set(s) you want to work with. This
example uses the MYUSER HLQ.

When you press the Enter key, the data set list is displayed, as shown in the next visual.

224 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 155. Data set list for MYUSER

4.1.5.2 Data set list from ISPF option 3.4

The visual shows the data sets that have the high level qualifier, MYUSER.

You can select data sets for processing by entering any of the line commands shown in Figure 156 to
the left of the data set name. As you can see, this is a very comprehensive list of commands to enable
you to manage you data sets. To learn about these commands, type HELP in the COMMAND field.


V - View data set RA - Refadd to Reflist Z - Compress data set
B - Browse data set C - Catalog data set F - Free unused space
E - Edit data set U - Uncatalog data set = - Repeat last comma
D - Delete data set P - Print data set CO - Copy data set
R - Rename data set PX - Print index listing MO - Move data set
I - Data set information M - Display member list RS - Reset statistics
S - Information (short) X - Exclude data set NX - Unexclude data se
TSO commands, CLIST, or REXX exec
 
Figure 156. Displayed data set list commands

Typing E next to data set MYUSER.PRIVATE.JCLLIB will display a list of the members contained within
that data set. Figure 159 on page 227 shows an example of a member list. At this stage you only
have one member, IERBR14, but over time this will grow to include members that assist you with all
the functions you perform as a systems programmer.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 225



EDIT MYUSER.PRIVATE.JCLLIB Row 00001 of 00001
Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR
Name Prompt VV MM Changed Size Init Mod
_________ IEFBR14 01.03 99/04/21 16:04 10 3 7
**End**
 
Figure 157. Data set m e m b e r list

Tab down to the IERBR14 member and press Enter which will allow you to edit the member. The
default action on the member will be based on the action you selected for the data set. For example, if
you selected Edit for the data set, the default action for the member selected will be edit. You can
issue the Select command next to the member but this is not necessary.

226 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 158. Action option list

4.1.5.3 Data set list from ISPF option 3.4

Typing a / on the MYUSER line causes ISPF to display a panel with all the list actions you can use in
that column. You can choose the option number or, by going back to the member list, type the
command on the COMMAND line.

Figure 159 shows how to select a member in a PDS by typing its name directly in the DSLIST panel,
IEFBR14.


DSLIST - Data Sets Matching MYUSER Row 1 of 5
Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR

Command - Enter ″/″ to select action Message Volume

------------------------------------------------------------------------
MYUSER *ALIAS
MYUSER.BRODCAST SYS001
E MYUSER.PRIVATE.JCLLIB(IEFBR14) SYS002
MYUSER.ISPF42.ISPPROF SYS001
MYUSER.SPFLOG1.LIST SYS001
MYUSER.SPFTEMP0.CNTL SYS001
***************************** End of Data Set list *********************
 
Figure 159. Creating a PDS m e m b e r using option 3.4

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 227

You can do that even if the data set is empty.

228 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 160. SDSF Primary Option m e n u

4.1.6 Introduction to the Spool Display and Search Facility (SDSF)

During this section we will discuss the SDSF facility and how you can use its functions to monitor and
manage your workloads. We will see how SDSF can be used to display job input and output data, and
purge (delete) jobs that are on the input, output, or held queues. We will review the monitoring
functions of SDSF that enable you to evaluate the current workload, and will enable you to cancel,
hold, or reschedule work.

SDSF can be invoked from ISPF menus, but the setting of the options is often customized by each site
differently. You will have to review your site′s ISPF menus to find the SDSF option. Alternatively,
issuing the TSO SDSF command, from the C o m m a n d = = = > line will invoke SDSF. After choosing
this option, the panel you will receive may not have the same options as shown in Figure 160. The
options vary according to the security level of the user. The authority to perform functions within these
options will also vary according to the security level of the user. It is possible to control most system
functions by using the SDSF facility. The scope of the functions range from reviewing job output,
controlling the processing of jobs, both their input and output, printer control, operator functions, and
system task administrative functions.

The ST option shows all jobs in the JES2 queues: input, held output, and output. Before choosing any
option, you place the cursor in the menu action bar, at Options and press the Enter key. If option 5
shows Set display values to ON , then choose it. With this option ON , the selection criteria are shown in
the panel. You get the same result by issuing the SDSF command SET DISPLAY ON in the COMMAND
line.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 229

Figure 161. SDSF - Viewing the JES2 output files

4.1.6.1 Viewing the job execution output

Typing H in the Menu Panel, allows you to see the output that was created during the execution of your
batch job. It is saved on the JES spool data set, unless you requested the output to be automatically
purged by setting a MSGCLASS that has been defined to not save output. Depending on the
MSGCLASS you chose, it could be in the Output queue ; in this case you should choose the O option.

The first screen shown in Figure 161 displays a list of the jobs we have submitted and whose output
we have directed to the HELD (Class X) queue, as identified in the MSGCLASS=X parameter in the job
card. In our case only one job has been submitted and executed. Therefore, we only have one job on
the held queue.

Issuing an ? command in the NP column will display the output files generated by job 15016. The
second screen shown in Figure 161 displays three ddnames: JES2 messages log file, JES2 JCL file,
and JES2 system messages file. This option is useful when you are seeing jobs with many files
directed to SYSOUT and you want to display one associated with a specific step. You issue an S in the
NP column to select a file you want. To see all files, instead an ? type S in the NP column.

230 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming



J E S 2 J O B L O G -- S Y S T E M S C 4 2 --

11.12.31 JOB15016 ---- FRIDAY, 23 APR 1999 ----

11.12.31 JOB15016 IRR010I USERID MYUSER IS ASSIGNED TO THIS JOB.
11.12.31 JOB15016 ICH70001I MYUSER LAST ACCESS AT 08:25:43 ON FRIDAY,
11.12.31 JOB15016 $HASP373 MYUSER01 STARTED - INIT A - CLASS A - SYS
11.12.31 JOB15016 IEF403I MYUSER01 - STARTED - TIME=11.12.31
11.12.31 JOB15016 - --TIMINGS (
11.12.31 JOB15016 -JOBNAME STEPNAME PROCSTEP RC EXCP CPU SR
11.12.31 JOB15016 -MYUSER01 STEP1 00 12 .00
11.12.31 JOB15016 IEF404I MYUSER01 - ENDED - TIME=11.12.31
11.12.31 JOB15016 -MYUSER01 ENDED. NAME-IEFBR14 TOTAL CPU
11.12.31 JOB15016 $HASP395 MYUSER01 ENDED
------ JES2 JOB STATISTICS ------
23 APR 1999 JOB EXECUTION DATE
10 CARDS READ
42 SYSOUT PRINT RECORDS
0 SYSOUT PUNCH RECORDS
3 SYSOUT SPOOL KBYTES
0.00 MINUTES EXECUTION TIME
1 //MYUSER01 JOB (ITSO),′ IEFBR14′ , CLASS=A,MSGCLASS=X
//*
2 //STEP1 EXEC PGM=IEFBR14
3 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
4 //NEWDD DD DSN=MYUSER.IEFBR14.TEST.NEWDD,
// DISP=(NEW,CATLG,DELETE),
// UNIT=SYSDA,
// SPACE=(CYL,(10,10,45)),
// LRECL=80,
// BLKSIZE=3120
ICH70001I MYUSER LAST ACCESS AT 08:25:43 ON FRIDAY, APRIL 23, 1999
IEF236I ALLOC. FOR MYUSER01 STEP1
IEF237I JES2 ALLOCATED TO SYSPRINT
IGD100I 256C ALLOCATED TO DDNAME NEWDD DATACLAS ( )
IEF142I MYUSER01 STEP1 - STEP WAS EXECUTED - COND CODE 0000
IEF285I MYUSER.MYUSER01.JOB15016.D0000101.? SYSOUT
IEF285I MYUSER.IEFBR14.TEST.NEWDD CATALOGED
IEF285I VOL SER NOS= TOTTSJ.
IEF373I STEP/STEP1 /START 1999113.1112
IEF374I STEP/STEP1 /STOP 1999113.1112 CPU 0MIN 00.00SEC SRB
IEF375I JOB/MYUSER01/START 1999113.1112
IEF376I JOB/MYUSER01/STOP 1999113.1112 CPU 0MIN 00.00SEC SRB
 
Figure 162. SDSF displaying the output job

Figure 162 shows the output for our job. The most important things to note are:
1. The RC or Return Code value is 00 which indicates a successful completion of the step.
2. The COND CODE or Condition Code is 0000 which indicates a successful completion of the job.
3. The messages in Figure 163 on page 232 show that the data set MYUSER.IEFBR14.TEST.NEWDD
was allocated on disk volume TOTTSJ, and was cataloged.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 231



IEF285I: MYUSER.IEFBR14.TEST.NEWDD CATALOGED
IEF285I: VOL SER NOS= TOTTSJ.
 
Figure 163. JES2 system messages

232 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 164. SDSF - display active users (DA)

4.1.6.2 Displaying the active tasks

SDSF provides the ability to monitor the current system workload. The DA command displays the active
tasks and provides information about each task. This information includes CPU usage for each task,
the amount of CPU time that a task has used, and the Input/Output related EXCP statistics. The visual
displays some of the data that this facility captures. Press PF11, to go right and see all the available
fields.

You can customize your SDSF panels by choosing the View option in the action bar and then the
Arrange option. You do that for each panel where Arrange is available and choose the the fields in
order. SDSF stores the information in your profile data set and uses them the next time you enter any
SDSF options.

4.1.6.3 Issuing MVS and JES commands under SDSF

On the C O M M A N D I N P U T = = = > line of any SDSF panel you can issue any MVS or JES2 command
following a slash (/) if you are authorized. If the command is too long, type + and two more lines will
appear to allow you to type the rest of the command. If you have authority, you can use the ULOG
option to see only your commands and their response.

SDSF provides a sort of Actions commands you can use in the NP column. Some of them you may not
have authority to issue. In this case, SDSF issues a message in the top right of the panel. When you
choose an action command, SDSF issues the system command that corresponds to the action you
chose.

Chapter 4. TSO/E, ISPF, and JCL 233

To display which action commands can be used in an SDSF panel, issue the HELP command in each
option panel. Then choose Option 3 - Action characters: . A panel listing all the action commands you
can use in that option appears.

Proceed with caution in the SDSF DA panel

If you issue a C (Cancel) action command in the DA display it will cancel any task you select if you
have the authority. Use this command with caution if you are displaying major production tasks.
Commands issued in the DA display are issued against running tasks. Incorrect or careless use
can cause major problems.

4.1.6.4 Viewing the output queue

The SDSF O command will display the non-held output queue. If you have the authority to review all
output you might want to use the PREFIX command to limit the entries in the display. For example,
• PREFIX , with no parameter will display all jobs for which you are authorized.
• PREFIX MQ* will display all jobs that start with the name MQ.
• PREFIX MYUSER* will display all jobs that begin with the name MYUSER.
The default, when you first enter SDSF is your logon ID prefix. If SDSF is not displaying what you
expect, issue the SET DISPLAY ON command. This controls the display of values you have set for
PREFIX, DEST, OWNER, SORT, and FILTER.

Figure 165 shows an output display using prefix mq*.


NP JOBNAME JOBID OWNER PRTY C FORMS DEST TOT-REC
MQWFS11 STC11032 HKOLATA 96 A STD LOCAL 5,328
MQWFS11 STC11102 HKOLATA 96 A STD LOCAL 6,222
MQWFS11 STC11108 HKOLATA 96 A STD LOCAL 7,227
MQWFS11 STC11114 HKOLATA 96 A STD LOCAL 3,780
MQWFADM1 STC14544 SRVRID1 96 A STD LOCAL 18,771
 
Figure 165. SDSF output display

234 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Chapter 5. MVS delivery and installation

This chapter describes the OS/390 delivery options and the download process using the ServerPac
option. Chapter 4 explains the basics of the OS/390 implementation.

Once positioned on OS/390, you can receive function in new levels approximately every six months.
This predictable release cycle should reduce planning time. Because each new level is
comprehensively tested, the quality of the operating system is improved. Once your initial migration is
complete, you can expect simplified ordering, planning, and installing, freeing you to increase the
value of your computing environment to your business and deliver better service to your end users.

OS/390 consists of base elements and optional features. The base elements (or simply elements)
deliver essential operating system functions. The base elements consist of former MVS products and
new functions. The base elements are listed in Volume 1. When you order OS/390, you receive all of
the base elements.

The optional features (or simply features) are orderable with OS/390 and provide additional operating
system functions. Like the base elements, the optional features consist of former MVS products and
new functions. The optional features are listed in Volume 1.

A new release of OS/390 is available every six months. At the end of every March and September, a
new release will become generally available, with shipments starting at the beginning of April and
October. Note that not every element and feature in a given release will contain new function.
However, those elements and features that don ′t receive new function will have all eligible service
included.

Because the base elements and optional features of OS/390 are integrated into a single package with
compatible service levels, you must install, with few exceptions, the entire OS/390 product. You can
install OS/390 using one of several IBM packages and they are discussed in this chapter.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 235

Figure 166. Installation overview

5.1 Introduction to OS/390

Prior to OS/390, your large applications ran on an MVS operating system that consisted of the Basic
Control Program (BCP), the Data Facility Product (DFSMSdfp), and Job Entry Subsystem (JES2 or
JES3), plus a collection of other software products that the applications required, such as Interactive
System Productivity Facility (ISPF) and Time Sharing Option/Extensions (TSO/E), and so forth.

Recent functional additions might have included LAN services, distributed computing software, and
application-enabling packages. You traditionally ran these products at various release levels, using a
mix and match approach.

With the introduction of OS/390, all these products were integrated into a single product. You will no
longer order new levels of some products but not of others; instead, you will order and install an entire
set of products integrated into one functionally rich operating system.

5.1.1 Advantages of OS/390

The release cycle of OS/390 is approximately every six months, hence you expect to receive function in
new levels from every release. This predictable release cycle should reduce your planning time.

Before the new release of OS/390 is shipped to you, each new function levels are comprehensively
tested, hence the quality of the operating system is improved.

236 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Once your initial migration to OS/390 is complete, you can expect simplified ordering, planning, and
installing of the next OS/390 release.

5.1.2 OS/390 delivery options

You can install OS/390 using one of several IBM packages. Two of these packages are available at no
additional charge when you license OS/390:
ServerPac This software delivery package consists of products and service for which IBM has
performed the SMP/E installation steps and some of the post-SMP/E installation steps.
You use the CustomPac Installation Dialog to install your system and complete the
installation of the software it includes.
CBPDO The Custom Built Product Delivery Option (CBPDO) is a delivery package that consists of
uninstalled products and unintegrated service. You must use SMP/E to install the
individual OS/390 elements and features, and their service, before you can IPL.

Fee-based options are available as follows:

SystemPac SystemPac tailors OS/390 to your environment (such as DASD layout,
migration of MSVCP/IOCP to IODF, and naming conventions) based on
information provided to IBM. With this offering, selected non-IBM products can
be integrated.
SoftwareXcel SoftwareXcel Installation Express (SIE) is available in the U.S. only, and
provides pre-built OS/390 system packages in full volume dump format,
tailored to customer hardware and software configurations. SIE includes
on-site planning, installation, and package testing.
Entry Server Offering The Entry Server Offering, only available in selected countries, is a packaged
solution that includes hardware, software, installation services, maintenance,
and financing to help customers get current technology.
Note: When you order any one of the installation packages, you will receive a comprehensive
installation guide, detailing the installation task step by step from the beginning of the installation until
you IPL your system. For example, if you choose the ServerPac installation package, you receive the
ServerPac: Installing Your Order tailored to your order for installation. This document is unique to
your environment based on what you have ordered. In this chapter we will briefly discuss the
installation steps using ServerPac.

5.1.3 ServerPac service level

For ServerPac orders, service is integrated with product code according to the following time-line:
• All the products in the ServerPac will incorporate the PTFs contained in the PUT packages that
were available approximately two months before the OS/390 release became generally available.
• All products will incorporate HIPER and PTF-in-error(PE) fixes that are available approximately one
week before your order is received.
• All OS/390 elements and features will incorporate additional service that has been through OS/390
integration testing.
• Your ServerPac order will also contain a service tape containing all unintegrated service that was
available at the time your order was processed.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 237

5.1.4 CBPDO service level
Remember, the service in the CBPDO orders is not integrated. You must receive and apply the
service during the installation process. The service that is shipped with every CBPDO order is as
follows:
• Service for all products previously ordered, as reflected in the customer profile for the customer
number used when the order was placed. You can specify the starting date for these PTFs at order
time. The default starting date is the last time that customer number was used to order a CBPDO
(product or service) for that system release identifier (SREL).
• Service for all products, elements, and features that you have ordered. This includes all PTFs that
became available between product general availability and the time of your order that have not
been incorporated in the product FMIDs.

There is a Memo to Users Extension that comes with CBPDO describing the source IDs for service
delivered on the CBPDO tape.

238 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 167. System and installation requirements

5.1.5 System and installation requirements

Having an installation plan helps you plan to make sure the software is able to meet your installation′ s
requirement for software function. However, there are other things you should consider when planning
to build a system. These additional requirements include:
• Virtual storage mapping
• Application performance
• Building a minimum number of system software configurations
• Reducing installation and migration time
• Reducing the opportunities for error during migration
• Making it easier to manage the system after it is in production
• Minimizing migration actions for the people who use the system

How you choose to meet all these requirements can have a significant effect on how much work is
required to perform the tasks associated with each stage. Keep all these additional requirements in
mind when you are planning to build a new system.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 239

Figure 168. Reviewing your current system

5.1.6 Reviewing your current system

More often than not, you are planning to migrate from your current MVS system to the new release of
OS/390. It is therefore very important to review the setup of your current environment while planning
for the new system. Some of the things you should consider are:
• The system layout
• The catalog structure
• Data set naming conventions in your present environment
• Security software considerations
• New standards, if necessary

Depending on your order, the system target and distribution libraries may exceed more than one DASD
volume, for example IBM 3390-3. You should define your new system layout to be prepared for future
installation and easy cloning of your system. You can make use of the worksheets included in IBM
ServerPac for OS/390 Using the Installation Dialog , SC28-1244, and define where the following new data
sets should reside:
• Target data sets
• Distribution libraries data sets
• Master catalog and user catalogs
• Dialog and order data sets

240 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 169. The driving and target system

5.1.7 The driving system and the target system

The driving system is the system image (both the hardware and software) that you use to install your
new system image, the target system . You log on to the driving system and run jobs there to create or
update the target system. Once the target system is built, it can be IPLed on the same hardware
(same LPAR or different LPAR on the same processor) or different hardware than that used for the
driving system.

To prepare the driving system before building the target system, you need to perform the following
tasks:
• Identify the software requirement for the driving system using ServerPac or CBPDO.
• Identify the hardware requirement for the driving system.

You are also required to do some preparations for the target system:
• Choose the software products to install and identify requisities.
• Order OS/390 and related IBM products.
• Identify the hardware requirement for the target system.
• Identify the service needed for the target system.
• Decide whether to use the existing JES2 or JES3 with the new OS/390 release.

For more information on each of the requirements for both the driving and target system, see OS/390
Planning for Installation , GC28-1726, for the OS/390 release that you are installing.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 241

Figure 170. OS/390 installation

5.2 Installing OS/390 using ServerPac

This section describes the installation steps which are provided by IBM ServerPac for OS/390 Using the
Installation Dialog , SC28-1244. Your OS/390 ServerPac order contains an ISPF dialog that you use to
install OS/390. This dialog is called the CustomPac Installation Dialog because it is used to install all
of IBM′s CustomPac offering.

Before you begin the installation, you should:

• Review the contents of the ServerPac shipment that you received from IBM by checking the
packing slip to make sure that you have a complete set of installation tapes and documentation.
• Make sure your user ID has ALTER authority for the following high-level qualifiers:
− CPAC
− SYS1
− All product-specific high-level qualifiers for products that come with your package. You can
find a listing of all qualifiers by using the A-ALIAS option of the dialog, or refer to Product
Information in the Appendix of the document ServerPac: Installing Your Order .

242 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

5.2.1 Load RIM tape
The first step in installing OS/390 is to install the CustomPac dialogs from the RIM tape. Once they are
installed, the dialogs do not have to be reinstalled with every order. They may be updated when
initiated by IBM whenever you get a new order. Version checking invokes the update of the dialogs
during the CustomPac RECEIVE function.

Throughout the installation of the dialogs, you are requested to define a CustomPac qualifier or the
HLQ of your master data sets. Since the dialogs are permanently installed at your installation, you
should not specify the IBM-supplied order number in the CustomPac qualifier.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 243

Figure 171. The CustomPac dialogs

5.2.2 Installing the CustomPac dialogs

The RIM tape contains the following sample procedures, JCL, jobs, and CLISTs:

Name Description
LOADRIM LOADRIM is the JCL to unload files from tape and the setup of the installation dialog.
When you edit the LOADRIM sample JCL, you can choose the name of the master data
sets, the unit name of your tape drives, and the VOLSER of the DASD which receives the
installation dialog′s data sets.
Note: For the master and order data sets, you should use different HLQs.
SETUP This is a sample LOGON procedure which includes the CustomPac dialog ISPF libraries.
CPPCSAMP This sample CLIST can be used to set up the environment instead of modifying the LOGON
procedure. CPPCSAMP uses LIBDEFs and should be the preferred method to allocate the
CustomPac libraries and start the dialog. CPPCSAMP can be used after invoking ISPF.
CPPINIT With the CPPINIT CLIST, you can set up the environment from native TSO.
PRTDOC This sample job prints the CustomPac Installation dialog reference manuals.

Note: HELP (PF1) is available on any panel. The HELP key is a very useful online help facility that
explains every panel function in detail. Some panels have PRIM and LINE commands available. Using
the HELP key allows you to get a description and example on how to use the commands.

244 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 172. Receiving the ServerPac order

5.2.3 Receiving the ServerPac order

Invoke the CustomPac CLIST CPPCSAMP to start the dialog. Receiving the order means you will copy
the order from tape to DASD.

R receives the order. This unloads the control tables and installation jobs from the shipment tapes to
your DASD. Selecting option R selects the Order Receive panel.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 245

Figure 173. Order Receiving panel

5.2.4 Order Receive panel

After completion of the Receive option, a batch job is generated and submitted to download the order
installation libraries from the shipment tape to DASD.

Panel details
Order Number This is your specific IBM-supplied order number, which is listed on the cover of the
order documentation.
TAPE VolSer This is the volume serial number of the RIM tape.
TAPE Unit This is the unit type of your tape drives.
Order HLQ This is the HLQ used to allocate the order installation data sets. We recommend you
include the order number as part of the qualifier.
DASD VolSer This is the VOLSER of the DASD where your order data sets are to be restored.
DASD Unit This is the unit type of your DASD units and is defaulted to SYSDA.

Press the Enter key after you have finished keying in the order details. The Generate Jobstream panel
appears.

246 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 174. Generate Jobstream panel

5.2.5 Generate Jobstream panel

In this panel, enter the job card information relating to your installation standards. Change the ISPF
library names to your current ISPF environment.

After pressing the Enter key, you enter a panel where you can specify additional job card information
for loading of the RIMs. Depending on whether you have previously indicated that you wanted to edit
the job stream before submission, you can now review and edit the generated job that is to receive the
order, then submit it.

After successful completion of the job, your order data sets are copied from the RIM tape to your
DASD.

After you have selected an order for processing, an enqueue is issued against the order number. This
ensures that only one person can work on an individual order at any one time.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 247

Figure 175. Select order to install

5.2.6 Select order to install

After you finish the order receive function, place an I on the CustomPac Installation Panel to start the
installation of the order.

On the Order Installation Panel, you can now select the order you want to install. If this is your first
ServerPac installation, only one order number can be selected.

248 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 176. Installation Dialog panel

5.2.7 Installation dialog

After selecting a ServerPac order, the main installation dialog panel is invoked.

When this panel is shown for the first time, the only option which may be selected is option C . Each of
the following functions now marked with an asterisk ( *) become available after the previous function
has successfully finished.
C Option C on this panel allows you to select a configuration for merging an initial installation. If
this is your first CustomPac installation, the Create Configuration panel appears.
DI Option DI allows you to display any data set names and is similar to the PDF Option 3.4 function.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 249

Figure 177. Create Configuration panel

5.2.8 Selecting a configuration for the order

Before you start the installation, you must select and create a configuration. On the Create
Configuration panel, you can see the master configuration and, if available, other saved configurations.
If there is no previous configuration, you cannot merge with the current order.

Enter a CR in the command line to create a work configuration.

Type an S in front of the configurations you want to merge, if applicable.

250 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 178. Installation Variables panel

5.2.9 Define the installation variables

The Installation Variables panel can now be selected by typing a V option on the Installation panel.
This takes you to the Installation Variables panel.

Verify the current contents and enter or change any values by overtyping in the Contents column if a
value is either missing or invalid.

The installation variables can be different for each order. They are stored in the installation variables
table (IVT), which is a CustomPac-generated ISPF table shipped with your order. The installation
variables are briefly described in Appendix B (Variables used by this ServerPac) of the ServerPac:
Installing Your Order publication that comes with your ServerPac.

It is recommended that you read and use the worksheets before changing any installation variable
values.

The variable for AUTH.LINKLIB may be an existing authorized library of your installation site.

You may use the VARedit command on some panels to change the installation variables later.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 251

Figure 179. Define ZONE Information panel

5.2.10 Defining SMP/E ZONE names

On the Installation Dialog panel, you may now select option Z to define your SMP/E zone configuration
which brings you to the Define Zone Information panel.

This panel is displayed even if you do not plan to change the shipped zone names. You can change
the zone names to the names you want. The nickname is used to pair them together.

The reason for having more than one target and DLIB zone is that you cannot have incompatible
products together in one SMP/E zone, such as COBOL/II and OS/COBOL.

Use the SHIP command with caution, because it restores all DLIB and target zone names to their
shipped value.

For more information, refer to ServerPac: Installing Your Order .

252 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 180. Modify System Layout panel

5.2.11 Define system layout

Defining the target system layout is one of the most important steps during the order installation. You
should use the Modify System Layout Sample Worksheet from Appendix A of IBM ServerPac Using the
Installation Dialog , SC29-1244, before you enter any information on the Modify System Layout panel.

This panel shows you the summary of all products within your order. From here you start your
customization of the individual products. You may modify the following information about the target,
SMP/E, and catalog data sets:
• Product data set names, placement and attributes
• Logical volume to physical volume relationship
• Physical volumes device type, address, and volser

The PRIM Cmds and LINE Cmds on this panel give you greater flexibility in defining your new
environment.

Read and use the section “Modify the System Layout” in Chapter 8 of IBM ServerPac for OS/390 Using
the Installation Dialog , SC28-1244.

The ServerPac: Installing Your Order publication that comes with your order also contains all
information relating to the products to be installed.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 253

Figure 181. Data Set List by Product panel

5.2.12 Dslist line command

The Dslist line command displays the data list by product.

If you selected product OS/390 ISPF on the Modify System Layout main panel, all data sets for OS/390
ISPF are displayed. The PRIM command CHange allows you to make global changes to data set
profiles. For example, you may change the HLQ for those product data sets. Before using the CHange
command, refer to the IBM ServerPac for OS/390 Using the Installation Dialog , SC28-1244, and read
Chapter 8.

The line commands A and S allow you to change data set names, logical volumes, space, and BLKSIZE
definitions for a specific data set profile.

254 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 182. Logical Volume by Product panel

5.2.13 Select command

The Select command entered next to a product on the Modify System Layout main panel displays a
summary of all logical volumes for the selected product.

The line command Assign allows you to assign all data set profiles for the selected logical volume to a
different logical volume. LVol name DLBxxx stands for a DLIB Volume. LVol name RESxxx stands for
a residence volume.

The line command Dslist displays all data sets for the selected logical volume. You can make global
changes to the data set profiles as described with the Data Set List By Product panel.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 255

Figure 183. List A l l User Defined Data Sets panel

5.2.14 Adding user-defined data sets

It is also possible to add your own user-defined data set profiles. To do this, return to the Modify
System Layout main panel, then enter the PRIM Cmds ALL U.

The line command I displays a panel where you can define all the information needed to allocate a
data set. See the IBM ServerPac for OS/390 Using Installation Dialog , SC28-1244, in Chapter 8
“Inserting a User Defined Data Set” for details.

256 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 184. Summary of Physical Volumes panel

5.2.15 Display physical volumes

Before you leave the Modify System Layout main panel, you should enter the SUMP PRIM command,
which displays a summary of the physical volumes.

When one of your physical volumes becomes over-allocated, the following message appears on the
panel:
| CPP0605005S At least ONE PHYSICAL Volume is OVER ALLOCATED |

This condition is also shown by the <<<<<<< next to the physical volume names.

By using the dialogs previously described, you are able to modify the system layout and correct the
over-allocation of physical volumes.

Important

Use the SHIP command with care because it is powerful. This command is available on several
dialog panels. It can be used to restore all profiles to their initial-ship values. You can lose all the
customization you previously entered if you issue the SHIP command.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 257

Figure 185. Define Catalog Data Set Name panel

5.2.16 Define alias-to-catalog relationships

Specify the catalog data set name for each alias .

Before you begin to define the alias-to-catalog relationships and system-specific alias-to-catalog
relationships, you should read Chapters 9 and 10 in IBM ServerPac for OS/390 Using the Installation
Dialog , SC28-1244, to become familiar with using system specific-aliases (SSA) and the catalog
structure.

Appendix A of IBM ServerPac for OS/390 Using the Installation Dialog contains the worksheets to be
used for alias-to-catalog and SSA-to-catalog specifications.

Use the Alias to Catalog panel to specify which HLQ you want to be associated with a catalog. An M
in the STA column indicates that this alias name must be associated with a master catalog.

The ?????? in the TARGET System Catalog DSName field indicates that there is no catalog defined yet.

This function allows you also to insert additional user-defined alias names and catalogs.

After specifying the alias-to-catalog relationship, you may select SSA on the Installation Dialog panel,
which leads you to the SSA-to-Catalog panel.

258 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 186. SSA to Catalog panel

5.2.17 Define system-specific alias names

The ServerPac installation process uses the system-specific alias (SSA) technique for data set
allocation during the installation jobs. This allows you to work conveniently with new data sets that
have same name as those on your existing system, for example SYS1.LINKLIB. We recommend you
specify Y in the Def column for defining the SSAs. The SSAs are removed by a cleanup job after you
have successfully installed the ServerPac.

This is the end of the customization steps for the ServerPac. You are now ready to run the supplied
installation jobs.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 259

Figure 187. Installation Jobs panel

5.2.18 Run the ServerPac-provided installation jobs

There are three types of components shown on the Installation Jobs panel:
SRC Source data such as parameter lists
DOC Documentation
JOB Executable JCL

The installation steps are grouped into the following sections:

• Package-specific installation
• Product-specific installation
• Post-installation
• Additional post-installation
• Customization section
• Installation verification section
• Cleanup jobs
• Migration section
• Customer-specific customization

260 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Figure 188. Generate File Tailored Jobs panel

5.2.18.1 Generate File Tailored Jobs panel

When you enter the Installation Jobs panel for the first time, the installation jobs have still not been
generated. All installation jobs are generated using ISPF tailoring services. The GENskel command
submits a batch job, which generates all the installation jobs. Each job is stored in the SCPPBENU
data set that is provided through the SeverPac RECEIVE process.

The installation jobs should be submitted in sequence. Always read the DOC section before you select
and submit the related jobs.

All installation steps and jobs are also described in ServerPac: Installing Your Order .

After a job′s completion, the job output can be seen using the Output line command. This also updates
the STAtus column on the Installation Jobs panel.

The job, copying data sets to SystemPac Vols (RESTORE), may run for a long time, depending on the
number of products your SeverPac order contains. You should have two tape drives and all the tape
cartridges shipped with your order available before you start the RESTORE job.

Post-installation and customization is product- and installation-dependent, and should be related to

your specific requirements.

You can insert your own defined jobs to these dialogs.

After the installation jobs have completed, you should be able to IPL and test your new OS/390 system.

Chapter 5. MVS Installation Using ServerPac 261

Figure 189. Save Configuration panel

5.2.19 Save Configuration panel

After the successful installation of your ServerPac, you may save your configuration by typing S on the
main Installation Dialog Panel.

As the last step of the installation, you should update the inventory by entering a U on the main
Installation Panel.

262 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Appendix A. Fundamentals of OS/390

This appendix includes references from the Chapter on the Introduction to OS/390 Fundamentals.

A.1 List of Base Elements

Table 1 lists all elements that are in the base OS/390 system. The table tells you:
Name What this book calls the element.
Exclusive (Ex) Whether the element is exclusive. In the column, Yes identifies the exclusive
elements (that is, having function available only in OS/390), and No identifies the
nonexclusive elements (that is, the OS/390 level of an element is also available
as a stand-alone product).
Function Level (FL) Specifies the function level in OS/390 (and in the stand-alone product); the latest
OS/390 level in which the element changed (″Change″ means that the element
was added to OS/390, or one or more of its FMIDs was changed; new function
added in PTFs is not considered change); and for nonexclusive elements, the
equivalent level of the stand-alone product is listed in parentheses.
Note: Do not confuse the function level with the product level. All elements are
at the R7 product level but they are at various function levels. For example, the
product level of BDT is OS/390 R7 BDT. Its function level is OS/390 R2 BDT
because R2 was the last release in which it changed.
Comments Miscellaneous facts that describe the element.

To learn what function the element provides, see OS/390 Introduction and Release Guide , GC28-1725.

Table 1 (Page 1 of 9). Base Elements in OS/390 R7

Name Ex FL Comments
AET Yes R7 Application Enabling Technology (AET) is the base technology to build a
ready-to-run, automated OS/390 UNIX System Services application server
system, with all system programming already done. The built AET system
does not require OS/390 skill to administer and operate it.

AET was new to OS/390 in R3. It is related to the Automated UNIX System
Option for VM, VSE, and OS/390 (Auto UNIX System) delivery option,
5655-A97. Auto UNIX System is a prebuilt, customized, and automated
OS/390 UNIX System Services application server. It requires no OS/390
skills to install, use, maintain, and service. Traditional OS/390 applications
such as TSO, CICS, IMS, and batch processing are not supported by Auto
UNIX System.
BCP Yes R7 The Base Control Program (BCP) provides essential operating system
services. The BCP includes the I/O configuration program (IOCP) as well as
the OS/390 UNIX System Services (OS/390 UNIX) kernel. This latter function
was called OpenEdition System Services and was a nonexclusive base
element of OS/390 R1, was an exclusive element of OS/390 R2, was
integrated into the BCP element in OS/390 R3, and had its name changed to
OS/390 UNIX System Services kernel in OS/390 R6.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 263

 Table 1 (Page 2 of 9). Base Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
BDT Yes R2 Bulk Data Transfer (BDT) provides the base services that the optional BDT
features (BDT File-to-File and BDT SNA NJE) need to transfer data from one
computer system to another. BDT became exclusive in OS/390 R2.

You cannot activate any BDT functions until one or both of the optional BDT
features is enabled.
BookManager No R4 BookManager BookServer converts BookServer BookManager books to
BookServer HTML for display through a Web browser.

BookManager BookServer was new to OS/390 in R4. Since then, the base
hasn′t changed but Japanese support was added in OS/390 R5 and Simplified
Chinese support was added in OS/390 R7.
BookManager No R1 BookManager READ is used to display, search, and manage online books and
READ bookshelves. A related optional feature is BookManager BUILD.
C/C++ Yes R6 C/C++ IBM Open Class Library provides a set of C/C++ class libraries.
IBM Open
Class As of OS/390 R6, the C/C++ IBM Open Class Library is a base element of
Library OS/390. Retroactive to OS/390 R3, the C/C++ IBM Open Class Library is
licensed with the OS/390 base operating system but is not considered a base
element.

The above changes enable your applications to use the C/C++ IBM Open
Class Library at run time without having to license either the C/C++ with
Debug Tool or C/C++ without Debug Tool features. These changes also
enable your applications to access the required dynamic link libraries (DLLs)
so you do not have to use the DLL Rename Utility to package and
redistribute these DLLs with your applications.
Cryptographic Yes R7 Cryptography is the transformation of data to conceal its meaning. In
Services OS/390, the base element Cryptographic Services provides the following
base cryptographic functions: data secrecy, data integrity, personal
identification, digital signatures, and the management of cryptographic keys.
Additional cryptographic functions are provided by the following related
optional features:

* Open Cryptographic Services Facility (OCSF) France

* OCSF Security Level 1

* OCSF Security Level 2

* OCSF Security Level 3

* System Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Crypto

Cryptographic Services was new in OS/390 R7. It includes the Integrated

Cryptographic Service Facility (ICSF), which was a new base element in
OS/390 R4 and became exclusive in OS/390 R6.
DCE Yes R7 DCE Application Support facilitates the interaction between Distributed
Application Computing Environment (DCE) clients and CICS or IMS regions. This element
Support was new to OS/390 in R4. It is based on stand-alone product OpenEdition
DCE Application Support for MVS/ESA R2.

As of OS/390 R6, the word ″OpenEdition″ was dropped from the beginning of
this element′s name.

264 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Table 1 (Page 3 of 9). Base Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
DCE Base Yes R7 DCE Base Services provides services for developing and running
Services client/server applications, including remote procedure call, directory,
security, and distributed time services. This element is at the Open Group
Open Software Foundation (OSF) DCE 1.1 level.

As of OS/390 R6, the word ″OpenEdition″ was dropped from the beginning of
this element′s name.
DFSMSdfp No R7 DFSMSdfp provides storage, data, program, and device management
functions. Related optional features are: DFSMSrmm, DFSMSdss, and
DFSMShsm.
Distributed Yes R7 Distributed File Service includes the file serving component of the OSF DCE.
File Service The DCE file serving support is at the OSF 1.2.2 level.

Prior to OS/390 R5, this element was called OpenEdition DCE DFS.
Encina Yes R7 Encina Toolkit Executive provides a set of tools for developing client
Toolkit components of distributed transactional applications. This element was new
Executive to OS/390 in R4.

Appendix A. Fundamentals of OS/390 265

 Table 1 (Page 4 of 9). Base Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
eNetwork Yes R7 eNetwork Communications Server (also known as CS for OS/390 and
Communi- SecureWay Communications Server) supports secure TCP/IP, SNA, and UNIX
cations networking throughout an enterprise. It gives you the ability to connect
Server subsystems and applications to each other, and to connect network devices
(such as terminals and printers) to the system.

eNetwork Communications Server consists of two components: IP and SNA.

SNA includes AnyNet function. Prior to OS/390 R6, IP was the base element
TCP/IP and SNA was the base element VTAM.

Related optional features are:

* eNetwork Communications Server Security Level 1

* eNetwork Communications Server Security Level 2

* eNetwork Communications Server Security Level 3

* eNetwork Communications Server NPF

IP can be dynamically enabled. If you order the standard OS/390 base, IP is

shipped enabled. But if you order the alternate base (see ″OS/390 Alternate
Base″ in topic 4.1.1.1), IP is shipped disabled.

Many of the IP functions have changed over the life of OS/390, as follows:

* TCP/IP OpenEdition. In OS/390 R1, R2, and R3, this was an optional
feature called TCP/IP for OpenEdition MVS Applications. In OS/390
R4 it became part of the TCP/IP element and a new stack was added.

* TCP/IP CICS Sockets. In OS/390 R1 and R2, this was an optional

feature called TCP/IP for MVS CICS Sockets.
In OS/390 R3 it became part of the TCP/IP element.

* TCP/IP IMS Sockets. In OS/390 R1 and R2, this was an optional

feature called TCP/IP for MVS IMS Sockets. In OS/390 R3 it became
part of the TCP/IP element.

* Host On-Demand. This was new to OS/390 in R4. Note that there is a
stand-alone product, IBM eNetwork Host On-Demand V3 (part number
31L2157, 31L2158, or 31L2159; order type number 5648-B40), which
contains additional function.

* X-Windows. In OS/390 R5, the older X-Windows function (X11R4) was

taken out of the TCP/IP base and put into a separate FMID. New
X-Windows function (X11R6) was added to the base.

* DNS/WLM. This function, the Domain Name Server with Workload

Manager, was available as a kit for OS/390 R4 and then was
integrated into OS/390 R5.

* Network Station Client and Network Station Manager. As of OS/390

R5, these functions are no longer in OS/390.
They are available as the stand-alone product Network Station
Manager (5648-C05).

* 3172 Offload. As of OS/390 R5, this function is no longer in

OS/390.

266 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Table 1 (Page 5 of 9). Base Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
EREP No R1 The Environmental Record Editing and Printing Program (EREP) edits and
prints reports for the records placed in the error recording data set (ERDS),
helping IBM service representatives fix problems.
ESCON No R1 ESCON Director Support enables the reporting of ESCON director device
Director errors to OS/390. This element was an orderable feature of MVS/ESA SP 4.2
Support and later releases.
FFST No R2 First Failure Support Technology (FFST) provides immediate notification and
first failure data capture for software events. FFST was new to OS/390 in R2.
GDDM No R2 GDDM provides presentation services and device-driving capability. It
includes PCLK and OS/2 Link and REXX code. Related optional features are
GDDM-Presentation Graphics Feature and GDDM-REXX. Other
GDDM-associated products (IVU, GKS, IMD) are not in OS/390, but are
separately orderable.
HCD Yes R5 Hardware Configuration Definition (HCD) defines both the operating system
configuration and the processor hardware configuration for a system. A
related optional feature is HCM.
HLASM No R7 High Level Assembler (HLASM) integrates almost all functions of past
assemblers and provides extensions and improvements. A related optional
feature is the HLASM Toolkit.
ICKDSF No R1 The Device Support Facility (ICKDSF) enables you to perform functions
needed for the installation and use of IBM DASD.
ISPF Yes R5 ISPF is a full-screen editor and dialog manager. As of OS/390 R5, ISPF is
exclusive to OS/390.
JES2 Yes R7 JES2 accepts the submission of work for the BCP. This element exercises
independent control over its job processing functions, whereas JES3
exercises centralized control.

JES2 4.2, JES2 4.3, JES2 5.1, JES2 5.2, and OS/390 levels of JES2 are
supported on a single OS/390 R7 system.
LAN Server Yes R5 LAN Server enables LAN workstation users to store and share data and
applications in a central location on a System/390, which allows the large
storage capacity of a System/390 to relieve the capacity constraints of
workstation-based servers. This element can be used as a file-sharing
system for OS/2 LAN Server networks, a Network File System file-serving
protocol, or both. Support for Network File System file-serving protocols is
provided either through TCP/IP or through Network File System front-end
processors.

LAN Server and Network File System Server cannot work simultaneously on
the same processor to provide Network File System services through TCP/IP.
At setup or run time, you must choose which function to use.

The host portion of LAN Server is shipped on tape. The workstation portion
is shipped on diskettes.

Prior to becoming an exclusive element of OS/390, LAN Server was part of

MVS/ESA SP V5R2. It was also called LAN File Services (LFS).

As of OS/390 R3, LAN Server English and Kanji features can coexist on the
same system and in the same target zone.

Appendix A. Fundamentals of OS/390 267

 Table 1 (Page 6 of 9). Base Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
Language Yes R7 Language Environment provides the run-time environment for programs
Environment generated with:

* OS/390 C/C++

* C/C++ for MVS/ESA

* AD/Cycle C/370

* VisualAge for Java, Enterprise Edition for OS/390

* AD/Cycle C/370

* COBOL for OS/390 and VM

* COBOL for MVS and VM

* AD/Cycle COBOL/370

* PL/I for MVS and VM

* AD/Cycle PL/I for MVS and VM

* VS FORTRAN and FORTRAN IV (in compatibility mode)

Prior to OS/390, this element was known as Language Environment for MVS
and VM or AD/Cycle Language Environment/370 (LE/370).

For more information on IBM VisualAge for Java, Enterprise Edition for
OS/390, program number 5655-JAV, refer to the product documentation.

Inclusion of Language Environment for MVS into OS/390 does not replace the
need for separate compilers.

A function of the BCP called run-time library services (RTLS) allows you to
use run-time options to control access to different levels of the Language
Environment run-time libraries. RTLS can be used to access the run-time
library of Language Environment V1R5 and all OS/390 levels of Language
Environment.

A related optional feature is Language Environment Data Decryption.

LANRES Yes R5 LANRES integrates NetWare LANs and System/390 environments. Included
with LANRES are diskettes that you use to install LANRES code on the Novell
NetWare Server.
MICR/OCR No R1 This element provides the device support code for various magnetic and
optical devices.
NetQuestion Yes R6 NetQuestion is a text search engine for use with the element WebSphere
Application Server. NetQuestion was new to OS/390 in R4.

NetQuestion is described in the Webserver Search Engine publications.

268 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Table 1 (Page 7 of 9). Base Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
Network Yes R6 Network File System acts as a file server to workstations, personal
File System computers, or other authorized systems in a TCP/IP network. In OS/390 R2 it
was enhanced and its function was equivalent to the stand-alone product
DFSMS/MVS V1R3 Network File System. In OS/390 R6 it became exclusive
to OS/390, function was added, and ″DFSMS/MVS″ was dropped from the
beginning of its name.

This element consists of a client (Network File System Client) and a server
(Network File System Server).

Network File System Server and LAN Server cannot work simultaneously on
the same processor to provide Network File System services through TCP/IP.
At setup or run time, you must choose which function to use.

This element supports Berkeley Sockets, and not TCP/IP Sockets.

As of OS/390 R4, this element is always enabled, even when the OS/390
alternate base configuration is ordered.
OSA/SF No R2 Open Systems Adapter Support Facility (OSA/SF) customizes the modes and
port parameters of an OSA-2, which provides S/390 network connectivity
directly to LANs and WANs that support IP and SNA protocols. The OSA-2
must be defined as an S/390 channel path with integrated network ports.

As of OS/390 R6 (via PTF UW52168), multiple home IP addresses can be

specified per data path (OSA table entry) through the OSA-2, as well as
additional redundant (default LP) pathing. IP multicasting is supported. For a
Fast Ethernet (FENET) OSA-2 only, IPX/SPX protocols are supported in the
OSA-2 HPDT MPC mode.
SMP/E Yes R7 SMP/E is a tool for installing and maintaining software, and for managing the
inventory of software that has been installed.

The Planning and Migration Assistant, a component of SMP/E, can help you
maintain, plan for, and order new releases of OS/390 and other products. It
provides reports that use IBM-supplied data, your SMP/E CSI data set, and a
CustomPac inventory file. The Planning and Migration Assistant is part of
OS/390 R3, R4, R5, and R6 via PTFs, and is integrated into OS/390 as of R7.
It was enhanced in OS/390 R7. The Planning and Migration Assistant Web
site is http://www.ibm.com/s390/pma/

Appendix A. Fundamentals of OS/390 269

 Table 1 (Page 8 of 9). Base Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
Softcopy Yes R7 Softcopy Print allows you to print BookManager books. This element has a
Print base, single-byte character set (SBCS) function plus a double-byte character
set (DBCS) function. The DBCS function ships with DBCS national language
versions of OS/390 (Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Japanese/Kanji,
and Korean).

This element consists of integrated subsets of PSF V3R1 for OS/390 (called
PSF for Softcopy Print), Document Composition Facility (DCF) V1R4,
BookMaster V1R4, and some fonts in the AFP Font Collection V1R1. Softcopy
Print for DBCS adds the DBCS Print Utility, DCF DBCS, and BookMaster
Gothic fonts.

The base SBCS function was new in OS/390 R2. The DBCS function was new
in OS/390 R4.

In a related matter, as of OS/390 R7, the PSF stand-alone product that is

supported on OS/390 is PSF V3 for OS/390 (5655-B17), not PSF/MVS V2
(5695-040). (PSF/MVS V2 is still supported on OS/390 R6 and down.) In
addition, in order to use PSF V3 for OS/390, you must install the complete
product. The product was repackaged to isolate the Softcopy Print functions
and, unlike PSF/MVS V2, it is not possible to dynamically enable PSF V3 for
OS/390.
SOMobjects Yes R4 SOMobjects is a technology that RTL allows applications written in different
programming languages to use the same object-oriented class libraries. The
base element SOMobjects Runtime Library (RTL) is a set of functions for
creating objects and invoking methods on them.

Prior to becoming an exclusive element of OS/390, SOMobjects RTL was part

of MVS/ESA SP 5.2.2 and a feature of the product SOMobjects for MVS V1R1.

A related optional feature is SOMobjects ADE.

TIOC No R1 TIOC allows console services and TSO/E to communicate with the terminal
hardware.
Tivoli No R7 Tivoli Management Framework enables OS/390 to be managed (via an agent)
Management by the Tivoli Framework-based applications that support OS/390. This
Framework element was new to OS/390 in R7.
TSO/E Yes R4 Time Sharing Option/Extended (TSO/E) provides an interactive terminal
interface. As in prior releases of TSO/E, this element includes CLISTs and
REXX, but does not include a REXX compiler.
OS/390 Yes R7 OS/390 UNIX System Services Application Services provides the services
UNIX and a standard command interface familiar to interactive UNIX users. In
System OS/390 R2, the OpenEdition MVS Debugger and OpenEdition MVS Shell and
Services Utilities were merged into this element. In OS/390 R6, this element′s name
changed from OpenEdition Application Services to OS/390 UNIX System
Services Application Services.
VisualLift Yes R1 VisualLift Runtime Environment (RTE) and the optional feature VisualLift
RTE Application Development Environment (ADE) are tools to modernize the user
interface of existing host applications.

Prior to OS/390, both the RTE and the ADE were packaged together as the
VisualLift product. With OS/390, VisualLift is repackaged; VisualLift RTE is a
base element and VisualLift ADE is an optional feature.

When you install VisualLift RTE you will first install the code on the host, and
then download code from the host to the workstation and install VisualLift
RTE there.

270 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 Table 1 (Page 9 of 9). Base Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
WebSphere Yes R7 WebSphere Application Server is a scalable, high-performance Web server.
Application As of OS/390 R7, it is exclusive to OS/390.
Server
In OS/390 R5 and R6, this element was named Lotus Domino Go Webserver.
Prior to OS/390 R5, its name was Internet Connection Secure Server (ICSS).

WebSphere Application Server includes the component ServletExpress.

ServletExpress is a portable, Java servlet-based execution environment that
extends WebSphere Application Server into a Java Web Application Server.
ServletExpress was new to OS/390 as of OS/390 R6. (Outside of OS/390,
ServletExpress was new in the Domino Go Webserver 4.6.1 stand-alone
product.)

In order to have secure communication, one of the following optional

features must be installed:

* IBM HTTP Server Export Secure

* IBM HTTP Server France Secure

* IBM HTTP Server NA Secure

WebSphere Application Server uses the base element NetQuestion as its text
search engine.
3270 PC File No R2 3270 PC File Transfer Program transfers files from the host to the workstation
Transfer for off-line data manipulation, updating, or correction or for the transfer and
Program storage of local data in the host stem. This element was new to OS/390 in
R2.

A.2 List of Optional Elements

Table 2 summarizes OS/390 optional features. As in Table 1 on page 263, Ex identifies the exclusive
features and FL identifies the latest OS/390 level in which the feature changed.

Table 2 (Page 1 of 6). Optional Elements in OS/390 R7

Name Ex FL Comments
BDT Yes R2 This feature allows users at one OS/390 system in a SNA network to copy
File-to-File data sets to or from another OS/390 system in the network. This feature is
related to the element BDT.
BDT SNA Yes R2 This feature allows JES3 users to transmit jobs, output, commands, and
NJE messages from one computer system to another within a SNA network. This
feature is related to the element BDT and the feature JES3.
BookManager No R1 BookManager BUILD creates online books to be used by BookManager
BUILD
READ

Appendix A. Fundamentals of OS/390 271

 Table 2 (Page 2 of 6). Optional Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
C/C++ Yes R6 This feature includes:
with Debug • A C compiler
Tool
• A C++ compiler
• A debug tool, which runs with C and C++ as well as other languages
• C/C++ application development utilities
This feature is related to the base element C/C++ IBM Open Class Library.

The C/C++ Database Access Class Library (DACL) Utility was removed in
OS/390 R4.
C/C++ Yes R6 This feature is the same as the C/C++ above except that it does not have
Without the Debug Tool component.
Debug Tool
DCE User Yes R6 This feature enables data encryption using the commercial data masking
Data facility (CDMF) algorithm. In OS/390 R6, the word ″OpenEdition″ was
Privacy dropped from the beginning of this feature′s name.
CDMF
DCE User Yes R6 This feature enables data encryption using the data encryption standard
Data (DES) algorithm and the (CDMF) DES/CDMF algorithm.
Privacy
DES/CDMF The availability of this feature outside the United States is subject to United
States export regulations.

In OS/390 R6, the word ″OpenEdition″ was dropped from the beginning of this
feature′s name.
DFSMSdss No R4 This feature is a DASD data and space management tool.

Before becoming a component of stand-alone product DFSMS/MVS,

DFSMSdss was a product called Data Facility Data Set Services (DFDSS)
V2R5.
DFSMShsm No R4 This feature is a DASD storage management and productivity tool for
managing low-activity and inactive data.

Before becoming a component of DFSMS/MVS, DFSMShsm was a product

called Data Facility Hierarchical Storage Manager (DFHSM).
DFSMSrmm No R4 This feature helps you manage your removable media as one enterprise-wide
library across systems that can share DASD.
DFSORT No R2 This feature sorts, merges, and copies data. This feature was new to OS/390
in R2.

During OS/390 R3, DFSORT PTFs were released that changed its packaging.
These PTFs were incorporated in OS/390 R4 DFSORT and can also be
installed in the stand-alone DFSORT V1R13 product. Resident and
nonresident installation is combined; you can now specify whether DFSORT
modules are to be LPA-resident using the LPA list. Also, all DFSORT
language features (the ISPF and ISMF U.S. English and Japanese (Kanji)
panels and messages) can now be installed at the same time. You
determine whether the panels are to be used and which language will be
used by concatenating the proper libraries to existing ISPF libraries.

The next release of the stand-alone product (5740-SM1), V1R14, may be

ordered by OS/390 customers without an additional fee. This level will be
integrated into OS/390 R7.

272 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Table 2 (Page 3 of 6). Optional Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
Domino Go No R6 This feature includes Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), Proxy Authentication, and
Webserver a repository for home pages. It supports multiple IP addresses and
Export double-byte character set. It is subject to United States export regulations
Security and has import restrictions into France.

Before OS/390 R5, this feature was called ICSS Export Security. As of
OS/390 R5 it was rebranded to Lotus Domino Go Webserver Export Security.

This feature is related to the base element Domino Go Webserver.

Domino Go No R6 This feature includes Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), Proxy Authentication, and
Webserver a repository for home pages. It supports multiple IP addresses and
France double-byte character set. It is subject to United States export regulations
Secure and may be exported into France.

This feature was new in OS/390 R5.

This feature is related to the base element Domino Go Webserver.

Domino Go No R6 This feature includes Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), Proxy Authentication, and
Webserver a repository for home pages. It supports multiple IP addresses and
North double-byte character set. It is subject to United States export regulations
America and may not be exported from the United States or Canada.
Secure
Before OS/390 R5, this feature was called ICSS North America Secure. As of
OS/390 R5 it was rebranded to Lotus Domino Go Webserver North America
Secure.

This feature is related to the base element Domino Go Webserver.

GDDM-PGF No R2 GDDM-Presentation Graphics Feature (PGF) is a set of programs for creating
presentation material in a variety of styles. This feature was new to OS/390
in R2.

This feature is related to the base element GDDM.

GDDM-REXX No R2 This feature is a productivity tool that enables programmers to prototype
GDDM applications and to create small routines and utility programs quickly
and easily.

This feature is related to the base element GDDM.

HCM Yes R4 Hardware Configuration Manager (HCM) is a PWS-based client/server
interface to the base element HCD. This feature was new to OS/390 in R4.
HLASM No R1 This feature provides tools to improve application development, debugging,
Toolkit and recovery. It is related to the base element HLASM.

Customers licensed for the OS/390 HLASM Toolkit feature may order a copy
of the next release of the feature prior to its availability by ordering the
Toolkit feature of the V1R3 stand-alone product, just as they may order the
stand-alone product.

Appendix A. Fundamentals of OS/390 273

 Table 2 (Page 4 of 6). Optional Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
IP Security - Yes R6 This feature provides support for packet filtering, tunnels, and network
CDMF address translation (NAT), which enables secure communication over private
and public networks.

This feature includes Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) RC2/RC4.

This feature started out as a function in the OS/390 R4 Firewall Technologies

kit, was integrated into OS/390 R5 as a feature of OS/390, and was updated
in OS/390 R6. It is related to the base element eNetwork Communications
Server, called SecureWay Communications Server in Release 8.
IP Security - Yes R6 This feature provides support for packet filtering, tunnels, and network
DES/CDMF address translation (NAT), which enables secure communication over private
and public networks. This feature includes data encryption standard (DES)
encryption, which is stronger encryption than that found in IP Security -
CDMF.

This feature includes SSL DES.

The availability of this feature outside the United States is subject to United
States export regulations.

This feature started out as a function in the OS/390 R4 Firewall Technologies

kit, was integrated into OS/390 R5 as a feature of OS/390, and was updated
in OS/390 R6. It is related to the base element eNetwork Communications
Server, called SecureWay Communications Server in Release 8.
IP Security - Yes R6 This feature provides support for packet filtering, tunnels, and network
TDES address translation (NAT), which enables secure communication over private
and public networks. This support uses DES encryption.

This feature includes SSL triple DES (TDES) for secure communication
between a TN3270 server and an SSL-enabled client. This is stronger
encryption than that found in IP Security - DES/CDMF.

The availability of this feature outside the United States is subject to United
States export regulations.

This feature was new to OS/390 R6. It is related to the base element
eNetwork Communications Server, called SecureWay Communications Server
in Release 8.
JES3 Yes R6 JES3 accepts the submission of work for the BCP. JES3 exercises centralized
control over its job processing functions, whereas JES2 exercises
independent control.

JES3 4.2.1, JES3 5.1.1, JES3 5.2.1, and OS/390 levels of JES3 were supported
as of OS/390 R6.
Language Yes R6 This feature provides decryption of data using the DES algorithm for use with
Environment certain C functions. This feature is subject to United States export
Data regulations.
Decryption

274 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Table 2 (Page 5 of 6). Optional Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
OS/390 Yes R6 OS/390 Print Server allows you to print files on OS/390 printers from any
Print Server workstation that has TCP/IP access. This feature was new to OS/390 in R5. It
consists of three components:

* IP PrintWay. This component is also a feature of PSF/MVS V2R2 and

first became part of OS/390 as part of the IP PrintWay/NetSpool
feature of OS/390 R3. The base FMID is unchanged since OS/390 R3.
Japanese support was added in OS/390 R5 and Spanish support was
added in OS/390 R6.

* NetSpool. This component is also a feature of PSF/MVS V2R2 and

first became part of OS/390 as part of the IP PrintWay/NetSpool
feature of OS/390 R3. The base FMID is unchanged since OS/390 R3.
Japanese support was added in OS/390 R5 and Spanish support was
added in OS/390 R6.

* OS/390 Print Interface. This component was new in OS/390 R5 and

is exclusive to OS/390. In OS/390 R6, the only change was that
Japanese and Spanish support were added.

OS/390 Print Server replaces the IP PrintWay/NetSpool feature of OS/390. In

addition, just as the IP PrintWay/NetSpool feature was recommended for use
instead of the TCP/IP NPF feature in OS/390 R4, OS/390 Print Server in
OS/390 R6 is recommended over TCP/IP NPF. The IP PrintWay component
provides improved function, capacity, performance, and usability over NPF.
RMF Yes R6 Resource Measurement Facility (RMF) gathers data about OS/390 resource
usage and provides reports about any system in a sysplex.
SDSF YES R5 System Display and Search Facility (SDSF) provides you with information to
monitor, manage, and control your OS/390 system. This feature was new to
OS/390 in R2.
Security Yes R6 Security Server lets you control access to protected resources. Security
Server Server consists of these components:

* RACF, which became exclusive in OS/390 R3.

* DCE Security Server, which was exclusive as of OS/390 R1. This

component was upgraded to support Kerberos V5.1 in OS/390 R5.

* LDAP Server, which was new in OS/390 R5. This component provides
a directory service based on the Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol (LDAP), allowing clients to search, extract, add, and
delete information from an LDAP server running on OS/390.

* Firewall Technologies, which was part of the OS/390 R4 Firewall

Technologies kit and integrated into OS/390 R5. Note that you
need to order the IP Security - CDMF feature, the IP Security -
DES/CDMF feature, or the IP Security - TDES feature to complete
the firewall security package.
Security Yes R6 This feature provides cryptographic protection above what is provided by the
Server LDAP Server component of the Security Server feature. It contains
LDAP - DES DES/TDES function.

This feature was new in OS/390 R5, is orderable only by customers who
order the Security Server feature, is subject to United States export
regulations, and may not be exported from the United States or Canada.

Appendix A. Fundamentals of OS/390 275

 Table 2 (Page 6 of 6). Optional Elements in OS/390 R7
Name Ex FL Comments
SOMobjects Yes R4 SOMobjects Application Development Environment (ADE) provides a SOM
ADE compiler and source code for the SOM kernel (root) classes, Interface
Repository Framework, and emitter Framework.

This feature is related to the base element SOMobjects RTL.

TCP/IP Yes R6 This feature provides authentication and security services in a TCP/IP
Kerberos network environment. It uses the DES algorithm to encrypt data. This
DES feature is exclusive to OS/390 as of OS/390 R5. The availability of this
feature outside the United States is subject to United States export
regulations.
TCP/IP Yes R6 This feature provides authentication and security services in a TCP/IP
Kerberos network environment. It uses a less stringent encryption algorithm than the
non-DES DES algorithm. This feature is exclusive to OS/390 as of OS/390 R5.
TCP/IP NPF Yes R6 This feature provides a printing function that reroutes print data to the IP
network. This feature is exclusive to OS/390 as of OS/390 R5.

OS/390 Print Server should be considered IBM′s strategic replacement for

TCP/IP Network Print Facility (NPF). Significant future enhancements are not
planned for TCP/IP NPF.
VisualLift No R2 VisualLift Application Development Environment (ADE) and the base element
ADE VisualLift Runtime Environment (RTE) are tools to modernize the user
interface of existing host applications.

VisualLift ADE is the only priced feature that does not support dynamic
enablement. It is shipped (on diskette) only if you order it.

276 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Appendix B. System Programmer Customization Examples

This appendix includes references from the Chapter on the Introduction to OS/390 system programmer
management of functions.

B.1 SYS1.PARMLIB Member IEFSSNxx

SUBSYS SUBNAME(SMS) /* SMS */ 00010000
INITRTN(IGDSSIIN) 00010100
INITPARM(′ ID=00,PROMPT=NO′ ) 00010200
SUBSYS SUBNAME(&PRISUBSY) /* PRIMARY SUBSYSTEM NAME */ 00010300
PRIMARY(YES) START(NO) 00010400
SUBSYS SUBNAME(&SECSUBSY) /* SECONDARY SUBSYSTEM */ 00010500
SUBSYS SUBNAME(RRS) /* RESOURCE RECOVERY SERVICES */ 00010620
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DFRM) /* DFSMSRMM */ 00010720
INITRTN(EDGSSSI) 00010820
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLM) /* IMS RESOURCE LOCK MANAGER */ 00011706
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLS) /* IMS RESOURCE LOCK MANAGER */ 00011826
SUBSYS SUBNAME(JRLM) /* SECONDARY SUBSYSTEM NAME FOR IRLM */ 00011926
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRL5) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 */ 00012026
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLT) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 TEST */ 00012128
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLA) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR DB2V510A */ 00012234
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLB) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR SC48 */ 00012334
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLC) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR DB2V510C */ 00012439
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLD) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR DB2V510D */ 00012539
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLE) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR DB2V510E */ 00012642
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLF) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR DB2V510F */ 00012745
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLG) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR DB2V510G */ 00012845
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLH) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR DB2V510H */ 00012947
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLI) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR DB2V510I */ 00013048
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLJ) /* IRLM DB2 6.1 FOR DB2V610J */ 00013149
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLK) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR DB2V510K */ 00013254
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLL) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR DB2V510L */ 00013355
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLN) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR DB2V510N */ 00013456
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IRLV) /* IRLM DB2 5.1 FOR DB2V510V */ 00013557
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IR6C) /* IRLM IMS 6.1 FOR IMS610C */ 00013657
SUBSYS SUBNAME(JR6C) /* IRLM IMS 6.1 FOR IMS610C */ 00013757
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IR6D) /* IRLM IMS 6.1 FOR IMS610D */ 00013857
SUBSYS SUBNAME(JR6D) /* IRLM IMS 6.1 FOR IMS610D */ 00013957
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IR6P) /* IRLM IMS 6.1 FOR IMS6PEG */ 00014057
SUBSYS SUBNAME(JR6P) /* IRLM IMS 6.1 FOR IMS6PEG */ 00014157
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IR6S) /* IRLM IMS 6.1 FOR IMS610S */ 00014257
SUBSYS SUBNAME(JR6S) /* IRLM IMS 6.1 FOR IMS610S */ 00014357
SUBSYS SUBNAME(IR6T) /* IRLM IMS 6.1 FOR IMS610T */ 00014457
SUBSYS SUBNAME(JR6T) /* IRLM IMS 6.1 FOR IMS610T */ 00014557
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB41) 00014657
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00014757
INITPARM(′ DSN3EP,=DB41,S′ ) 00014857
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB51) 00014957
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00015057
INITPARM(′ DSN3EP,=DB51,S′ ) 00015157
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DBA1) 00015257
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00015357
INITPARM(′ DSN3EP,=DBA1,S,DSGA′ ) 00015457
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DBA2) 00015557
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00015657

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 277

 INITPARM(′ DSN3EP,=DBA2,S,DSGA′ ) 00015757
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DBB1) 00015857
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00015957
INITPARM(′ DSN3EP,=DBB1,S,DSGB′ ) 00016057
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DBB2) 00016157
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00016257
INITPARM(′ DSN3EP,=DBB2,S,DSGB′ ) 00016357
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DBC1) 00016457
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00016557
INITPARM(′ DSN3EP,=DBC1,S,DSGC′ ) 00016657
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DBC2) 00016757
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00016857
INITPARM(′ DSN3EP,=DBC2,S,DSGC′ ) 00016957
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DBC3) 00017057
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00017157
INITPARM(′ DSN3EP,=DBC3,S,DSGC′ ) 00017257
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2P) 00017357
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00017457
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,-DB2P,S,DBHG′ ) 00017557
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2S) 00017657
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00017757
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,-DB2S,S,DBHG′ ) 00017857
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2R) /* DB2 V5 WITH LATEST PTFS 6/98 */ 00017957
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00018057
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2R,S,RED′ ) 00018157
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2B) /* DB2 V510 SUBSYSTEM ON SC48 */ 00018257
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00018357
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2B,S′ ) 00018457
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2A) /* DB2 V510 DB2V510A */ 00018557
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00018657
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2A,S′ ) 00018757
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2C) /* DB2 V510 DB2V510C */ 00018857
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00018957
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2C,S′ ) 00019057
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2D) /* DB2 V510 DB2V510D */ 00019157
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00019257
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2D,S′ ) 00019357
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2E) /* DB2 V510 DB2V510E */ 00019457
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00019557
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2E,S′ ) 00019657
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2F) /* DB2 V510 DB2V510E */ 00019757
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00019857
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2F,S′ ) 00019957
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2G) /* DB2 V510 DB2V510E */ 00020057
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00020157
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2G,S′ ) 00020257
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2H) /* DB2 V510 DB2V510H */ 00020357
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00020457
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2H,S′ ) 00020557
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2I) /* DB2 V510 DB2V510I */ 00020657
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00020757
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2I,S′ ) 00020857
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2J) /* DB2 V610 DB2V610J */ 00020957
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00021057
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2J,S′ ) 00021157
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2K) /* DB2 V510 DB2V510K */ 00021257
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00021357
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2K,S′ ) 00021457
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2L) /* DB2 V510 DB2V510K */ 00021557

278 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00021657
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2L,S′ ) 00021757
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2N) /* DB2 V510 DB2V510N */ 00021857
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00021957
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2N,S′ ) 00022057
SUBSYS SUBNAME(DB2V) /* DB2 V510 DB2V510N */ 00022157
INITRTN(DSN3INI) 00022257
INITPARM(′ DSN3EPX,=DB2V,S′ ) 00022357
SUBSYS SUBNAME(PSP) /* SUBSYSTEM NAME FOR BATCHPIPES */ 00022457
SUBSYS SUBNAME(BP01) /* BATCHPIPES V1R2 */ 00022557
SUBSYS SUBNAME(RACF) /* RACF SUBSYS */ 00022657
INITRTN(IRRSSI00) 00022757
INITPARM(′ # , M′ ) 00022857
SUBSYS SUBNAME(TNF) /* TCP/IP */ 00022957
/* INITRTN(MVPTSSI) */ 00023057
SUBSYS SUBNAME(VMCF) /* TCP/IP */ 00023157
/* INITRTN(MVPXSSI) */ 00023257
/* INITPARM(′ WTSC&SYSCLONE′ ) */ 00023357
SUBSYS SUBNAME(T8) /* BDT FOR JES3 */ 00023457
INITRTN(BDTSSINI) 00023557
INITPARM(′ WTSCPLX3,C=/,D=Y,TQIEN=N,TQIREQ=N′ ) 00023657
SUBSYS SUBNAME(T9) /* BDT FOR JES3 */ 00023757
INITRTN(BDTSSINI) 00023857
INITPARM(′ WTSCPLX9,C=+,D=N,TQIEN=N,TQIREQ=N′ ) 00023957
SUBSYS SUBNAME(EKGX) /* RODM */ 00024057
SUBSYS SUBNAME(AOFA) /* NETVIEW */ 00024157
SUBSYS SUBNAME(NETV) /* NETVIEW */ 00024257
SUBSYS SUBNAME(NETC) /* NETVIEW */ 00024357
SUBSYS SUBNAME(CNM) /* NETVIEW */ 00024457
SUBSYS SUBNAME(CICS) /* CICS */ 00024557
SUBSYS SUBNAME(BLSR) /* BLSR SUBSYSTEM FOR LS972106 */ 00024957
INITRTN(CSRBISUB) 00025057
SUBSYS SUBNAME(OPCT) /* TME10 OPC V2R1 TRACKER FOR LS972106 */ 00025157
INITRTN(EQQINITA) 00025257
INITPARM(′400,A′ ) 00025357
SUBSYS SUBNAME(OPCW) /* TME10 OPC V2R1 CONTROLLER FOR LS972106 */ 00025457
INITRTN(EQQINITA) 00025557
INITPARM(′400,A′ ) 00025657
SUBSYS SUBNAME(BLX1) /* INFORMATION/MANAGEMENT */ 00050000
SUBSYS SUBNAME(LOGR) /* LOGR */ 00060000
INITRTN(IXGSSINT) 00070000
SUBSYS SUBNAME(EJWS) /* (E)JES/2 */ 00080000
INITRTN(EJWSSIN) 00090000
SUBSYS SUBNAME(OAM1) /* OAM */ 00100000
INITRTN(CBRINIT) 00110000
SUBSYS SUBNAME(CSQ1) /* MQSERIES #1 */ 00120003
INITRTN(CSQ3INI) 00130003
INITPARM(′ CSQ3EPX,MQS1,S′ ) 00140005
SUBSYS SUBNAME(CSQ2) /* MQSERIES #2 */ 00150003
INITRTN(CSQ3INI) 00160003
INITPARM(′ CSQ3EPX,MQS2,S′ ) 00170005
SUBSYS SUBNAME(MQSX) 00170160
INITRTN(CSQ3INI) 00170258
INITPARM(′ CSQ3EPX,=MQSX,S′ ) 00170360
SUBSYS SUBNAME(MQSV) 00170460
INITRTN(CSQ3INI) 00170560
INITPARM(′ CSQ3EPX,=MQSV,S′ ) 00170660
SUBSYS SUBNAME(MQSY) 00170760
INITRTN(CSQ3INI) 00170860

Appendix B. System Programmer Customization Examples 279

 INITPARM(′ CSQ3EPX,=MQSY,S′ ) 00170960
SUBSYS SUBNAME(CQS1) /* IMS V6 COMMON QUEUE SERVER */ 00171018
SUBSYS SUBNAME(CQS2) /* IMS V6 COMMON QUEUE SERVER */ 00172018
SUBSYS SUBNAME(SB01) /* SMARTBATCH BATCHPIPES SUBSYS */ 00180013
SUBSYS SUBNAME(ASFM) /* SMARTBATCH CONTROL SUBSYS */ 00190013
SUBSYS SUBNAME(ASFC) /* SMARTBATCH PERFORMANCE SUBSYS */ 00200013
SUBSYS SUBNAME(ASFX) /* SMARTBATCH X-JOB ENTRY SUBSYS */ 00210013
SUBSYS SUBNAME(MPM) /* ORACLE */ 00260038
SUBSYS SUBNAME(TNS4) /* ORACLE TNS4 */ 00281052
SUBSYS SUBNAME(XCMA) INITRTN(GXTINIT) /* XCM FOR HPS #1 */ 00290041
SUBSYS SUBNAME(RVA1) /* IXFP */ 00310043
INITRTN(SIBSSIPL) 00320043
INITPARM(′ DYNDDSR(S),INIT(N),MIH(S)′ ) 00330043
SUBSYS SUBNAME(AXM) INITRTN(AXMSI) 00340044

280 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Appendix C. System programmers toolbox

This appendix contains sample JCL streams for many system programmer tasks. These are samples,
and will need to be tailored for your installation. Updates need to reflect your data set names, DASD
volsers, device types, and volume addresses .

Table 3 (Page 1 of 2). System programmer JCL toolbox

Figure Function
JCL Sample 1 DFSMSdss compress data sets on VOLSER=xxxxx
JCL Sample 2 Convert DASD volume and all its data sets to SMS
JCL Sample 3 DFSMSdss data set copy and re-catalog
JCL Sample 4 DFSMSdss COPYDUMP JCL copy dump data set
JCL Sample 5 DFSMSdss copy ALLDATA including VOLID
JCL Sample 6 DFSMSdss DELETE
JCL Sample 7 DFSMSdss JCL to DUMP data sets
JCL Sample 8 DFSMSdss full volume physical dump
JCL Sample 9 DFSMSdss job to RELEASE unused space
JCL Sample 10 DFSMSdss logical data set restore
JCL Sample 11 DFSMSdss full volume RESTORE from tape
JCL Sample 12 DFSMSdss VSAM data set copy
JCL Sample 13 IDCAMS ALTER job to RENAME a data set
JCL Sample 14 AMASPZAP Job to ZAP a load module
JCL Sample 15 AMBLIST job to LIST load module and CSECTs
JCL Sample 16 COBOL compile/LKED JCL
JCL Sample 17 IEBCOPY data set compress
JCL Sample 18 IDCAMS job to define an alias
JCL Sample 19 IEFBR14 define data set
JCL Sample 20 IDCAMS job to define a VSAM data set
JCL Sample 21 IDCAMS job to define a PAGESPACE data set
JCL Sample 22 IDCAMS DELETE and DEFINE VVDS
JCL Sample 23 IEFBR14 job to delete a data set
JCL Sample 24 IDCAMS delete VVR
JCL Sample 25 Produce error log report from Coupling Facility
JCL Sample 26 Produce error log report from SYS1.LOGREC data set
JCL Sample 27 ICKDSF job to perform DASD volume analysis
JCL Sample 28 ICKDSF REFORMAT can be used to change the VOLSER
JCL Sample 29 ICKDSF job to INITIALIZE a DASD volume
JCL Sample 30 ICKDSF job to INITIALIZE a DASD volume
JCL Sample 31 ICKDSF job to INSPECT a DASD device
JCL Sample 32 ICFDSF job to BUILD an indexed VTOC
JCL Sample 33 IEBCOPY partitioned data sets
JCL Sample 34 IEBGENER to copy data sets

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 281

 Table 3 (Page 2 of 2). System pro grammer JCL toolbox
Figure Function
JCL Sample 35 IEFBR14 job to allocate a partitioned data set
JCL Sample 36 IEHINITT to tape volume
JCL Sample 37 IEHLIST job to list a VTOC
JCL Sample 38 Assembler JCL (ASMA90)
JCL Sample 39 Sample LINKEDIT job
JCL Sample 40 IDCAMS job to review CACHE data for a volume
JCL Sample 41 IDCAMS LISTCAT
JCL Sample 42 Sample job to dump the SMF RACF records and report
JCL Sample 43 IDCAMS REPRO
JCL Sample 44 Stand-alone dump generation JCL
JCL Sample 45 Clear SMF data set (SYS1.MANx)
JCL Sample 46 Dump SMF SYS1.MANx data set
JCL Sample 47 IDCAMS user catalog DISCONNECT


//jobcard
//* 00010000
//******************************************************************* 00011000
//* DFSMSdss Compress Data Sets on VOLSER=xxxxx 00011100
//* This example will compress all data sets with HLQ INSTALL 00011200
//******************************************************************* 00012000
//ADRDSSU EXEC PGM=ADRDSSU,REGION=0K 00020000
//COMPVOL DD UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,DISP=SHR 00030000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00040000
//SYSIN DD * 00050000
COMPRESS INCLUDE( - 00060000
INSTALL.*.** - 00070000
) - 00100000
DDNAME(COMPVOL) 00110000
 
Figure 190. Sample 1 - DFSMSdss compress data sets on VOLSER=xxxxx


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* Convert DASD Volume and all its Data Sets to SMS Control 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//ADRDSSU EXEC PGM=ADRDSSU,REGION=0K 00010000
//CONVERT DD UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,DISP=SHR 00020000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
CONVERTV SMS DDNAME(CONVERT) 00050000
// 00060000
//* The following statement would convert from SMS to NONSMS 00061000
CONVERTV NOSMS DDNAME(CONVERT) TEST 00070000
 
Figure 191. Sample 2 - Convert DASD volume and all its data sets to SMS

282 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* DFSMSdss Data Set Copy to New Volume and Re-Catalog 00004000
//* This example will copy ALL data sets as identified by 00004100
//* the DATASET(INCLUDE(**) parameter and REPLACE any 00004200
//* existing data sets with the same name on the TARGET volume. 00004300
//******************************************************************* 00005000
//ADRDSSU EXEC PGM=ADRDSSU,REGION=0K,PARM=′ UTILMSG=YES′ 00010000
//SOURCE DD UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=sourcevol,DISP=SHR 00020000
//TARGET DD UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=targetvol,DISP=SHR 00030000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00040000
//SYSIN DD * 00050000
COPY DATASET(INCLUDE( - 00060000
** - 00070000
)) - 00080000
INDD(SOURCE) - 00090000
OUTDD(TARGET) - 00100000
DELETE - 00110000
CATALOG - 00120000
REPLACE 00130000
 
Figure 192. Sample 3 - DFSMSdss data set copy and re-catalog


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00010000
//******************************************************************** 00011000
//* DFSMSdss COPYDUMP JCL to Copy a DFSMSdss Dump Data Set 00011100
//* from DASD to CART 00011100
//******************************************************************** 00012000
//ADRDSSU EXEC PGM=ADRDSSU,REGION=0K 00020000
//DUMPIN DD DSN=DFSMSdss.source.data.set,DISP=SHR 00030000
//DUMPOUT DD DSN=DFSMSdss.target.copy.data.set, 00040000
// DISP=(NEW,CATLG),LABEL=EXPDT=99000, 00050000
// UNIT=(CART,1,DEFER),VOL=(,,,15) 00060000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00070000
//SYSIN DD * 00080000
COPYDUMP INDD(DUMPIN) - 00090000
OUTDD(DUMPOUT) 00100000
/* 00110000
 
Figure 193. Sample 4 - DFSMSdss COPYDUMP JCL copy dump data set

Appendix C. System programmers toolbox 283



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************** 00003000
//* DFSMSdss Copy ALLDATA including VOLID from one DASD vol to another 00004000
//******************************************************************** 00005000
//ADRDSSU EXEC PGM=ADRDSSU,REGION=0K 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//SYSIN DD * 00030000
COPY INDY(sourcevol) - 00040000
OUTDY(targetvol) - 00050000
FULL - 00060000
CANCELERROR - 00070000
ALLDATA(*) - 00080000
ALLEXCP - 00090000
OPT(4) - 00100000
PURGE - 00110000
COPYV 00111000
 
Figure 194. Sample 5 - DFSMS copy ALLDATA including VOLID


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* DFSMSdss DELETE JCL will delete all cataloged data sets 00004000
//* identified in the DATASET(INCLUDE( statememt). 00005000
//* In this example, all data sets with the HLQ OS390SMP. 00006000
//* Use with CAUTION. 00007000
//******************************************************************* 00008000
//ADRDSSU EXEC PGM=ADRDSSU,REGION=0K 00010000
//TAPE DD DUMMY 00020000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
DUMP DATASET(INCLUDE( - 00050000
OS390SMP.** - 00060000
)) - 00070000
OUTDD(TAPE) - 00080000
DELETE 00090000
 
Figure 195. Sample 6 - DFSMSdss DELETE

284 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* DFSMSdss JCL to DUMP Data Sets from DASD if the DSN Change Flag 00004000
//* is set. Reset this flag at the completion of the dump. 00005000
//* This example excludes VSAM data sets. 00005100
//******************************************************************* 00006000
//ADRDSSU EXEC PGM=ADRDSSU,REGION=0K 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*,HOLD=YES 00020000
//DUMP DD DSN=dump.data.set.name,DISP=(NEW,CATLG), 00030000
// UNIT=(cart,1,DEFER),VOL=(,,,15), 00040000
// LABEL=(1,SL,EXPDT=99000) 00050000
//DASDVOL DD UNIT=3390,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,DISP=OLD 00070000
//SYSIN DD * 00130000
DUMP DATASET( - 00140000
BY((DSCHA,EQ,YES),(DSORG,NE,VSAM)) - 00150000
INDD( - 00160000
DASDVOL - 00170000
) - 00180000
OUTDD(DUMP) - 00190000
RESET - 00200000
TOLERATE(ENQFAILURE) 00210000
 
Figure 196. Sample 7 - DFSMSdss JCL to DUMP data sets


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* DFSMSdss Full Volume Physical Dump 00004000
//******************************************************************* 00005000
//ADRDSSU EXEC PGM=ADRDSSU,REGION=0K 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//DASDIN DD UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,DISP=SHR 00030000
//TAPEOUT DD DSN=tape.data.set.name,DISP=(NEW,CATLG), 00040000
// UNIT=CART,LABEL=EXPDT=99000 00050000
//SYSIN DD * 00060000
DUMP INDD(DASDIN) OUTDD(TAPEOUT) 00070000
/* 00080000
 
Figure 197. Sample 8 - DFSMSdss full volume physical dump

Appendix C. System programmers toolbox 285



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* DFSMSdss Job to RELEASE Unused Space from eligible Data Sets
00004000
//* In this example ALL data sets on the VOLUME identified 00004100
//* by DDNAME(DASDVOL) will have unused space released. 00004200
//* This does not apply to guaranteed space VSAM data sets. 00004300
//******************************************************************* 00005000
//RELEASE EXEC PGM=ADRDSSU,REGION=0K 00010000
//DASDVOL DD UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,DISP=SHR 00020000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
RELEASE INCLUDE(**) DDNAME(DASDVOL) 00050000
 
Figure 198. Sample 9 - DFSMSdss job to RELEASE unused space


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00010000
//******************************************************************* 00011000
//* DFSMSdss Logical Data Set Restore from TAPE to DISK as 00012000
//* identified by OUTDY(xxxxxx) 00013000
//* This example will process ALL data sets on the dump tape. 00013100
//* The DATASET(INCLUDE(**) identifies all data sets. 00013200
//******************************************************************* 00014000
//ADRDSSU EXEC PGM=ADRDSSU,REGION=0K 00020000
//TAPE DD DSN=dump.data.set.name,DISP=SHR 00030000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00040000
//SYSIN DD * 00050000
RESTORE INDD(TAPE) - 00060000
DATASET(INCLUDE( - 00070000
** - 00080000
) - 00090000
) - 00100000
OUTDY(xxxxxx) - 00110000
CATALOG 00120000
 
Figure 199. Sample 10 - DFSMSdss logical data set restore


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* DFSMSdss Full Volume RESTORE from TAPE 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//ADRDSSU EXEC PGM=ADRDSSU,REGION=0K 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//TAPEIN DD DSN=tape.dump.data.set,DISP=SHR 00030000
//DASDOUT DD UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,DISP=SHR 00040000
//SYSIN DD * 00050000
RESTORE INDD(TAPEIN) OUTDD(DASDOUT) CANCELERROR PURGE 00060000
// 00070000
 
Figure 200. Sample 11 - DFSMSdss full volume RESTORE from tape

286 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming



//jobname 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* DFSMSdss VSAM Data Set Copy and Data Component ALTER 00004000
//******************************************************************* 00005000
//ADRDSSU EXEC PGM=ADRDSSU,REGION=0K,PARM=′ UTILMSG=YES′ 00010000
//DASDVOL DD UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=dasdvol,DISP=SHR 00020000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
COPY DATASET(INCLUDE( - 00050000
vsam.data.set.cluster.name - 00060000
)) - 00070000
RENAMEU((old.vsam.data.set.cluster.name, - 00080000
new.vsam.data.set.cluster.name)) - 00081000
OUTDD(DASDVOL) - 00090000
CATALOG - 00100000
REPLACE 00110000
//* 00120000
//******************************************************************* 00121000
//* This IDCAMS Step will Rename the VSAM Data component 00122000
//******************************************************************* 00123000
//IDCAMS EXEC PGM=IDCAMS 00130000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00140000
//SYSIN DD * 00150000
ALTER old.vsam.data.set.clustername.data - 00160000
NEWNAME(new.vsam.data.set.cluster.name.data) 00170000
 
Figure 201. Sample 12 - DFSMSdss VSAM data set copy


//jobcard 00001000
//******************************************************************* 00002000
//* IDCAMS ALTER job to RENAME a Data Set 00003000
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//IDCAMS EXEC PGM=IDCAMS 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//SYSIN DD * 00030000
ALTER old.data.set.name - 00040000
NEWNAME(new.data.set.name) 00050000
 
Figure 202. Sample 13 - IDCAMS ALTER job to RENAME a data set

Appendix C. System programmers toolbox 287



//jobcard 00010000
//* 00020000
//**********************************************************************00030000
//* AMASPZAP Job to ZAP a Load Module 00040000
//**********************************************************************00050000
//AMASPZAP EXEC PGM=AMASPZAP,REGION=4096K 00060000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00070000
//SYSLIB DD DSN=load.module.data.set,DISP=SHR 00080000
//SYSIN DD * 00090000
NAME loadmod csect 00100000
* 00110000
VER address value 00120000
* - VER = Verify (Verify that the data at this 00130000
* address is the correct value) 00131000
REP address new_value 00140000
* - REP = REPLACE (If the verify is successful 00150000
* replace the data at the 00151000
* address specified with the 00152000
* new_value) 00153000
CHECKSUM xxxxxxxx - CHECKSUM is optional 00160000
* CHECKSUM is calculated by adding the 00170000
* VERify address and value to the 00180000
* REPplace address and value. 00190000
* For example: VER 002C D7C7D440 00200000
* REP 002C C3D4C440 00210000
********************************************************************** 00211000
* CHECKSUM calculation: 002CD7C7 + 00220000
* D440002C + 00230000
* C3D4C440 + 00240000
* -------- 00250000
* CHECKSUM = 984193CC The CHECKSUM can be used to 00260000
* -------- validate the change. 00270000
 
Figure 203. Sample 14 - AMASPZAP job to ZAP a load module


//jobname 00010000
//* 00020000
//******************************************************************* 00021000
//* AMBLIST job to LIST Load Module and CSECTs 00022000
//******************************************************************* 00023000
//LIST EXEC PGM=AMBLIST 00030000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00040000
//SYSLIB DD DSN=load.library.data.set,DISP=SHR 00050000
//SYSIN DD * 00060000
LISTLOAD MEMBER=(loadmodule) 00080000
// 00090000
 
Figure 204. Sample 15 - AMBLIST job to LIST load module and CSECTs

288 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* COBOL Compile/LKED JCL 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//COBOL EXEC PGM=IKFCBL00,REGION=2048K, 00010000
// PARM=′ SXREF,APOST,CLIST,DMAP,ADV,OPT,SIZE(500K),BUF(200K)′ 00020000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00040000
//SYSUT1 DD UNIT=VIO,SPACE=(460,(700,100)) 00050000
//SYSUT2 DD UNIT=VIO,SPACE=(460,(700,100)) 00060000
//SYSUT3 DD UNIT=VIO,SPACE=(460,(700,100)) 00070000
//SYSUT4 DD UNIT=VIO,SPACE=(460,(700,100)) 00080000
//SYSLIN DD DSN=&&LOADSET,UNIT=SYSDA,DISP=(MOD,PASS), 00090000
// SPACE=(80,(500,100)),DCB=BLKSIZE=3200 00100000
//SYSLIB DD DSN=cobol.source.include.data.set,DISP=SHR 00120000
//SYSIN DD DSN=cobol.source.data.set(program),DISP=SHR 00130000
/* 00140000
//LINK EXEC PGM=HEWL, 00150000
// PARM=′ LIST,MAP,XREF,LET′ , 00160000
// COND=(8,LT,COBOL) 00170000
//SYSUT1 DD UNIT=VIO,SPACE=(TRK,(20,20)) 00180000
//SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=* 00190000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00200000
//SYSLMOD DD DSN=loadmod.data.set,DISP=SHR 00210000
//SYSLIB DD DSN=SYS1.VSCLLIB,DISP=SHR 00220000
// DD DSN=concatenantion.data.sets,DISP=SHR 00230000
//OBJDATA DD DSN=&&LOADSET,DISP=SHR 00250000
//SYSLIN DD * 00260000
INCLUDE OBJDATA 00270000
ENTRY loadmodname 00280000
NAME loadmodname(R) 00290000
 
Figure 205. Sample 16 - COBOL compile/LKED JCL


//jobcard 00010000
//* 00020000
//********************************************************************* 00030000
//* IEBCOPY Data Set Compress 00030100
//********************************************************************* 00031000
//* 00040000
//COMPRESS EXEC PGM=IEBCOPY,REGION=0K,PARM=COMPRESS 00060000
//SYSUT2 DD DSN=data.set.name,DISP=SHR, 00070000
// UNIT=SYSALLDA 00080001
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00090000
//SYSIN DD DUMMY 00100000
 
Figure 206. Sample 17 - IEBCOPY data set compress

Appendix C. System programmers toolbox 289



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IDCAMS Job to Define an ALIAS 00004000
//******************************************************************* 00005000
//DEFALIAS EXEC PGM=IDCAMS 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//SYSIN DD * 00030000
DEFINE ALIAS( - 00040000
NAME(alias) - 00050000
RELATE(user.catalog) - 00060000
) - 00070000
CATALOG(master.catalog) 00080000
// 00090000
 
Figure 207. Sample 18 - IDCAMS job to define an alias


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IEFBR14 Define Data Set 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//IEFBR14 EXEC PGM=IEFBR14 00010000
//D1 DD DSN=data.set.namne=(NEW,CATLG), 00020000
// UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,SPACE=(CYL,(20,0)), 00030000
// LRECL=80,BLKSIZE=6160 00040000
 
Figure 208. Sample 19 - IEFBR14 define data set


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IDCAMS Job to Define a VSAM Data Set 00004000
//******************************************************************* 00005000
//IDCAMS EXEC PGM=IDCAMS 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//SYSIN DD * 00030000
DEFINE CLUSTER - 00040000
(NAME(cluster.data.set.name) - 00050000
VOLUMES(xxxxxx) - 00060000
RECORDSIZE(313 313) - 00070000
INDEXED - 00080000
SPEED - 00090000
SHAREOPTIONS(3 3) - 00100000
KEYS(20 0)) - 00110000
DATA (NAME(cluster.data.set.name.DATA) - 00120000
CYLINDERS(2)) - 00130000
INDEX (NAME(cluster.data.set.name.INDEX) - 00140000
TRACKS(2)) 00150000
 
Figure 209. Sample 20 - IDCAMS job to define a VSAM data set

290 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IDCAMS Job to Define a PAGESPACE Data Set 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//IDCAMS EXEC PGM=IDCAMS 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00030000
//DASDVOL DD DISP=OLD,UNIT=3390,VOL=SER=xxxxxx 00040000
//SYSIN DD * 00050000
DEFINE PAGESPACE - 00060000
(NAME(SYS1.Vxxxxxx.LOCAL) - 00070000
FILE(DASDVOL) - 00080000
CYLINDERS(3390) - 00090000
VOLUME(xxxxxx)) 00100000
// 00110000
 
Figure 210. Sample 21 - IDCAMS job to define a PAGESPACE data set


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IDCAMS DELETE and DEFINE VVDS 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//IDCAMS EXEC PGM=IDCAMS,REGION=4096K 00010000
//DASDVOL DD UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,DISP=SHR 00020000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
DELETE SYS1.VVDS.Vxxxxxx FILE(DASDVOL) 00050000
DEFINE CLUSTER(NAME(SYS1.VVDS.Vxxxxxx) - 00070000
FILE(DASDVOL) - 00080000
VOL(xxxxxx) - 00090000
TRK(10 0) - 00100000
NIXD) 00110000
// 00120000
 
Figure 211. Sample 22 - IDCAMS DELETE and DEFINE VVDS


//jobcard 00010005
//* 00020000
//***************************************************************** 00021005
//* IEFBR14 Job to Delete a Data Set 00022005
//***************************************************************** 00023005
//STEP1 EXEC PGM=IEFBR14 00030000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00040002
//DELDSN DD DSN=data.set.name, 00050005
// DISP=(OLD,DELETE,DELETE) 00060005
 
Figure 212. Sample 23 - IEFBR14 job to delete a data set

Appendix C. System programmers toolbox 291



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IDCAMS Delete VVR 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//IDCAMS EXEC PGM=IDCAMS 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//DASDVOL DD UNIT=3390,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,DISP=SHR 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
DELETE data.set.nsme - 00050000
FILE(xxxxxx) VVR - 00060000
CAT(catalog.where.data.set.name.resides) 00070000
 
Figure 213. Sample 24 - IDCAMS delete VVR


//jobcard 00001008
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00002107
//* Produce Error Log Report From Coupling Facility 00002207
//******************************************************************* 00002307
//EREPNOW EXEC PGM=IFCEREP1,REGION=4M, 00003004
// PARM=(′ HIST,ACC=N,TABSIZE=512K,PRINT=PS,TYPE=SIE′ ) 00004006
//ACCIN DD DSN=SYSPLEX.LOGREC.ALLRECS, 00005004
// DISP=SHR, 00006001
// SUBSYS=(LOGR,IFBSEXIT,′ FROM=(1999/125),TO=YOUNGEST′, 00007106
// ′ SYSTEM=SC42′ ) , 00007206
// DCB=(RECFM=VB,BLKSIZE=4000) 00007306
//DIRECTWK DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,5,,CONTIG) 00008003
//TOURIST DD SYSOUT=*,DCB=BLKSIZE=133 00009004
//EREPPT DD SYSOUT=*,DCB=BLKSIZE=133 00010004
//SYSABEND DD SYSOUT=* 00020004
//SYSIN DD DUMMY 00030002
 
Figure 214. Sample 25 - Produce e r r o r log report from Coupling Facility

292 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming



//jobcard 00001002
//* 00002000
//****************************************************************** 00003001
//* Produce Error Log Report from SYS1.LOGREC Data Set 00003101
//****************************************************************** 00004001
//STEP1 EXEC PGM=IFCEREP1,PARM=CARD 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//SERLOG DD DSN=SYS1.LOGREC,DISP=SHR 00030000
//DIRECTWK DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,5,,CONTIG) 00040000
//EREPPT DD SYSOUT=* 00050000
//TOURIST DD SYSOUT=* 00060000
//SYSIN DD * 00070000
PRINT=AL 00080000
TYPE=S 00090000
ACC=N 00100000
HIST=N 00101000
TABSIZE=512K 00110000
ENDPARM 00120000
 
Figure 215. Sample 26 - Produce e r r o r log report from SYS1.LOGREC data set


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* ICKDSF Job to perform DASD Volume Analysis 00004000
//******************************************************************* 00005000
//DSF EXEC PGM=ICKDSF 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//DASDVOL DD UNIT=3390,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,DISP=OLD 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
ANALYZE DDNAME(DASDVOL) 00050000
 
Figure 216. Sample 27 - ICKDSF job to perform DASD volume analysis


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* ICKDSF REFORMAT can be used to Change the Volume Serial Number 00004000
//******************************************************************* 00005000
//DSF EXEC PGM=ICKDSF 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//SYSIN DD * 00030000
REFORMAT UNITADDRESS(xxx) VERIFY(yyyyyy) VOLID(xxxxxx) 00040000
 
Figure 217. Sample 28 - ICKDSF REFORMAT can be used to change the VOLSER

Appendix C. System programmers toolbox 293



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* ICKDSF Job to INITIALIZE a DASD Volume 00004002
//* Note: Change UNITADDRESS(xxx) to the DASD address to be 00005000
//* initialised. 00006000
//* VERIFY(ZZZZZZ) can be replaced with NOVERIFY if you do not 00007002
//* require VOLSER verification prior to the label change. 00008000
//* VOLID must be set to the required volser name. 00009000
//* REPLY to the WTOR message, acknowledging the request
00009100
//******************************************************************* 00009200
//DSF EXEC PGM=ICKDSF 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//SYSIN DD * 00030000
INIT UNITADDRESS(xxx) - 00040000
VERIFY(ZZZZZZ) - 00050000
VOLID(NEWVOL) - 00060000
NOPURGE 00070000
 
Figure 218. Sample 29 - ICKDSF job to INITIALIZE a DASD volume


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* ICKDSF Job to INITIALIZE a DASD Volume 00004000
//******************************************************************* 00005000
//ICKDSF EXEC PGM=ICKDSF 00010000
//DASDVOL DD UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=yyyyyy,DISP=SHR 00020000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
INIT DDNAME(DASDVOL) - 00050000
VERIFY(yyyyyy) - 00060000
PURGE - 00070000
NOVALIDATE - 00080000
NOCHECK - 00090000
VOLID(newvol) - 00100000
VTOC(2,0,75) - 00110000
INDEX(0,1,29) 00120000
// 00130000
 
Figure 219. Sample 30 - ICKDSF job to INITIALIZE a DASD volume

294 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* ICKDSF Job to INSPECT a DASD device for Surface errors 00004000
//* In this example, data will be preserved, and no alternate tracks 00005000
//* will be assigned if defective tracks are found. 00006000
//******************************************************************* 00007000
//DSF EXEC PGM=ICKDSF 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//DASDVOL DD UNIT=3390,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,DISP=OLD 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
INSPECT DDNAME(DASDVOL) - 00050000
VERIFY(xxxxxx) - 00060000
PRESERVE - 00070000
CHECK(3) - 00080000
NOASSIGN - 00100000
TOLERATE(ENQFAIL) 00110000
 
Figure 220. Sample 31 - ICKDSF job to INSPECT a DASD device


//jobname 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* ICKDSF Job to BUILD an Indexed VTOC on DASD volume xxxxxx 00003102
//* Use BUILDIX DDNAME(DASDVOL) OSVTOC to convert an Indexed 00003202
//* VTOC to an OS VTOC. 00003302
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//DSF EXEC PGM=ICKDSF 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//DASDVOL DD UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,DISP=(OLD) 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
BUILDIX DDNAME(DASDVOL) IXVTOC 00050000
 
Figure 221. Sample 32 - ICKDSF job to BUILD an indexed VTOC


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IEBCOPY Partitioned Data Sets 00004000
//******************************************************************* 00005000
//IEBCOPY EXEC PGM=IEBCOPY,REGION=4096K 00010000
//SYSUT1 DD DSN=input.partitioned.data.set,DISP=SHR 00020000
//SYSUT2 DD DSN=output.psrtitioned.data.set,DISP=(NEW,CATLG), 00030000
// UNIT=3390,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,SPACE=(CYL,(1,1,45)), 00040000
// DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=80,BLKSIZE=6160) 00050000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00060000
//SYSIN DD * 00070000
COPY OUTDD=SYSUT2,INDD=((SYSUT1,R)) 00080000
 
Figure 222. Sample 33 - IEBCOPY partitioned data sets

Appendix C. System programmers toolbox 295



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IEBGENER to Copy Data Sets 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//IEBGENER EXEC PGM=IEBGENER,REGION=4096K 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//SYSUT1 DD DSN=input.data.set.name,DISP=SHR 00030000
//SYSUT2 DD DSN=output.data.set.name,DISP=OLD 00040000
//SYSIN DD DUMMY 00050000
 
Figure 223. Sample 34 - IEBGENER to copy data sets


//jobcard 00010000
//* 00020000
//***************************************************************** 00021000
//* IEFBR14 Job to Allocate a Partitioned Data Set 00022000
//***************************************************************** 00023000
//STEP1 EXEC PGM=IEFBR14 00024000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00025000
//ALLOC DD DSN=data.set.name, 00026000
// DISP=(NEW,CATLG,DELETE), 00027000
// UNIT=SYSDA, 00028000
// SPACE=(CYL,(1,0,45), 00029000
// LRECL=80 00030000
 
Figure 224. Sample 35 - IEFBR14 job to allocate a partitioned data set


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IEHINITT to TAPE Volume 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//IEHINITT EXEC PGM=IEHINITT 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//LABEL DD UNIT=(3490,1,DEFER),VOL=SER=xxxxxx 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
LABEL INITT SER=xxxxxx,NUMBTAPE=001 OWNER=optional 00050000
 
Figure 225. Sample 36 - IEHINITT to tape volume

296 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IEHLIST job to List a VTOC 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//IEHLIST EXEC PGM=IEHLIST 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//DASDVOL DD VOL=SER=xxxxxx,UNIT=SYSALLDA,DISP=OLD 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
LISTVTOC VOL=SYSALLDA=xxxxxx 00050000
 
Figure 226. Sample 37 - IEHLIST job to list a VTOC


//jobcard 00010000
//* 00030000
//******************************************************************* 00031000
//* Assembler JCL - ASMA90 00031100
//******************************************************************* 00032000
//STEP1 EXEC PGM=ASMA90, 00040000
// PARM=′ LIST,NOOBJECT,DECK,SYSPARM(LOCAL)′ 00050000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00060000
//SYSLIB DD DSN=syslib.data.set,DISP=SHR 00070000
// DD DSN=syslib.concat.data.set,disp=shr 00071000
//SYSUT1 DD DSN=&&ASM1,UNIT=VIO,SPACE=(CYL,(5,5)) 00080000
//SYSUT2 DD DSN=&&ASM2,UNIT=VIO,SPACE=(CYL,(5,5)) 00090000
//SYSUT3 DD DSN=&&ASM3,UNIT=VIO,SPACE=(CYL,(5,5)) 00100000
//SYSLIN DD DSN=&&OBJECT,DISP=(NEW,PASS), 00110000
// UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(1,1)) 00120000
//SYSPUNCH DD DSN=syspunch.data.set,DISP=SHR 00130000
//SYSIN DD DSN=assembler.source.data.set(member),DISP=SHR 00140000
//* 00150000
 
Figure 227. Sample 38 - Assembler JCL (ASMA90)


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* Sample LINKEDIT Job 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//LKED EXEC PGM=IEWL,PARM=′ AMODE(31),RMODE(ANY),AC=1′ 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//LINKLIB DD DSN=include.data.set,DISP=SHR 00030000
//SYSLMOD DD DSN=target.load.library,DISP=SHR 00040000
//SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(5,5)) 00050000
//SYSLIN DD * 00060000
ENTRY modulename 00070000
INCLUDE LINKLIB(include module) 00080000
NAME loadmodname(R) 00090000
 
Figure 228. Sample 39 - Sample LINKEDIT job

Appendix C. System programmers toolbox 297



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IDCAMS Job to Review CACHE data for a volume 00004000
//******************************************************************* 00005000
//IDCAMS EXEC PGM=IDCAMS 00010000
//CACHE1 DD UNIT=3390,VOL=SER=xxxxxx,DISP=SHR 00020000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=A,HOLD=YES 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00040000
LISTDATA - 00050000
COUNTS - 00060000
UNIT(3390) - 00070000
VOL(xxxxxx) - 00080000
ALL - 00090000
LEGEND 00100000
 
Figure 229. Sample 40 - IDCAMS job to review CACHE data for a volume


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IDCAMS LISTCAT 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//LISTCAT EXEC PGM=IDCAMS 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=A,HOLD=YES 00020000
//SYSIN DD * 00030000
LISTC CAT(catalog.name) 00040000
LISTC ENT(data.set.name) 00041000
LISTC LVL(HLQ) 00042000
//* 00050000
 
Figure 230. Sample 41 - IDCAMS LISTCAT

298 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* Sample Job to Dump the SMF RACF records an produce a Report 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//IFASMFDP EXEC PGM=IFASMFDP 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT=* 00030000
//INDD1 DD DSN=SYS1.MAN1,DISP=SHR 00040000
//OUTDD1 DD DSN=&&MAN1,DISP=(NEW,PASS), 00050000
// UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(1,1)) 00060000
//SYSIN DD * 00070000
INDD(INDD1,OPTIONS(DUMP)) 00080000
OUTDD(OUTDD1,TYPE(80,81)) 00090000
/* 00100000
//RACFRW EXEC PGM=IKJEFT01 00110000
//SYSTSPRT DD SYSOUT=*,HOLD=YES 00120000
//SYSOUT DD SYSOUT=*,HOLD=YES 00130000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*,HOLD=YES 00140000
//RSMFIN DD DSN=&&MAN1,DISP=SHR 00150000
//SORTLIB DD DSN=SYS1.SORTLIB,DISP=SHR 00160000
//SORTIN DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(5,5)) 00170000
//SORTWK01 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(5,5))
//SORTWK02 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(5,5))
//SORTWK03 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(5,5))
//SORTWK04 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(5,5))
//SORTWK05 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(5,5))
//SORTWK06 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(5,5))
//SYSTSIN DD *
RACFRW TITLE(′ RACF SMF REPORT′ )
SELECT DATE(99001:99365)
EVENT ALLCOMMAND
EVENT ALLSVC
LIST SORT(DATE TIME)
END
 
Figure 231. Sample 42 - Sample job to dump the SMF RACF records and report


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IDCAMS REPRO 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//REPRO EXEC PGM=IDCAMS,REGION=0K 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//INPUT DD DSN=input.vsam.data.set.name,DISP=SHR 00030000
//OUTPUT DD DSN=output.vsam.data.set.name,DISP=SHR 00040000
//SYSIN DD * 00050000
REPRO IFILE(INPUT) - 00060000
OFILE(OUTPUT) REPLACE 00070000
//* 00080000
 
Figure 232. Sample 43 - IDCAMS REPRO

Appendix C. System programmers toolbox 299



//jobcard 00010000
//* 00030000
//******************************************************************* 00031000
//* Stand-alone Dump Generation JCL 00032000
//* 00033000
//* Note: 1. Specify correct VOLSER, Console addresses and GENPRINT 00040000
//* data set name. 00040100
//* 2. Delete existing SYS1.PAGEDUMP before running this JCL. 00041000
//* 3. Reply to outstanding WTOR messages. 00050000
//* 00060000
//******************************************************************* 00061000
//OSG EXEC PGM=AMDSAOSG,REGION=4M 00070000
//SYSLIB DD DSN=SYS1.MACLIB,DISP=SHR 00080000
// DD DSN=SYS1.MODGEN,DISP=SHR 00090000
//DPLTEXT DD DSN=SYS1.NUCLEUS(AMDSADPL),DISP=SHR 00100000
//IPLTEXT DD DSN=SYS1.NUCLEUS(AMDSAIPD),DISP=SHR 00110000
//PGETEXT DD DSN=SYS1.NUCLEUS(AMDSAPGE),DISP=SHR 00120000
//GENPRINT DD DSN=genprint.data.set.name,DISP=(NEW,CATLG), 00130000
// UNIT=SYSALLDA,SPACE=(CYL,(1,1)), 00140000
// DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=133,BLKSIZE=23408) 00150000
//GENPARMS DD * 00160000
AMDSADMP IPL=D3390,VOLSER=xxxxxx,MINASID=ALL, +00170000
CONSOLE=((xxx,3278),(xxx,3278),(xxx,3278)), +00180000
OUTPUT=TD20 00190001
END 00200001
/* 00210001
// 00220001
 
Figure 233. Sample 44 - Stand-alone dump generation JCL


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* Clear SMF Data Set (SYS1.MANx) 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//SMFCLR EXEC PGM=IFASMFDP 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00030000
//SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT=* 00040000
//INDD1 DD DSN=SYS1.MANx,DISP=SHR 00050000
//SYSIN DD * 00060000
INDD(INDD1,OPTIONS(CLEAR)) 00070000
 
Figure 234. Sample 45 - Clear SMF data set (SYS1.MANx)

300 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming



//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* Dump SMF SYS1.MANx Data Set 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//SMFDP EXEC PGM=IFASMFDP 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00020000
//SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT=* 00030000
//INDD1 DD DSN=SYS1.MANx,DISP=SHR 00040000
//OUTDD1 DD DSN=smf.manx.dump.data.set.name, 00050000
// DISP=(NEW,CATLG,DELETE), 00060000
// UNIT=SYSDA, 00070000
// SPACE=(CYL,(10,10),RLSE) 00080000
//SYSIN DD * 00090000
INDD(INDD1,OPTIONS(DUMP)) 00100000
OUTDD(OUTDD1,TYPE(smf record types to be dumped,0:255,for ALL)) 00110000
//* 00120000
 
Figure 235. Sample 46 - Dump SMF SYS1.MANx data set


//jobcard 00001000
//* 00002000
//******************************************************************* 00003000
//* IDCAMS User Catalog DISCONNECT 00003100
//******************************************************************* 00004000
//UCATDISC EXEC PGM=IDCAMS 00010000
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00030000
//SYSIN DD * 00060000
EXPORT user.catalog.name - 00070000
DISCONNECT - 00080000
CATALOG(master.catalog.name) 00090000
 
Figure 236. Sample 47 - IDCAMS user catalog DISCONNECT

Appendix C. System programmers toolbox 301

302 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming
Appendix D. Special Notices

This publication is intended to help new system programmers who need to understand S/390 and the
OS/390 operating system. The information in this publication is not intended as the specification of any
programming interfaces that are provided by OS/390 Versions. See the PUBLICATIONS section of the
IBM Programming Announcement for OS/390 Version 2 Release 8, Program Number 5647-A01 for more
information about what publications are considered to be product documentation.

References in this publication to IBM products, programs or services do not imply that IBM intends to
make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product,
program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM′s product, program, or service may
be used. Any functionally equivalent program that does not infringe any of IBM′s intellectual property
rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program or service.

Information in this book was developed in conjunction with use of the equipment specified, and is
limited in application to those specific hardware and software products and levels.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The
furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license
inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive, Armonk, NY
10504-1785.

Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the
exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this
one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact IBM
Corporation, Dept. 600A, Mail Drop 1329, Somers, NY 10589 USA.

Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some
cases, payment of a fee.

The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is
distributed AS IS. The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a
customer responsibility and depends on the customer′s ability to evaluate and integrate them into the
customer′s operational environment. While each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in
a specific situation, there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will be obtained elsewhere.
Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk.

Any pointers in this publication to external Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in
any manner serve as an endorsement of these Web sites.

Reference to PTF numbers that have not been released through the normal distribution process does
not imply general availability. The purpose of including these reference numbers is to alert IBM
customers to specific information relative to the implementation of the PTF when it becomes available
to each customer according to the normal IBM PTF distribution process.

You can reproduce a page in this document as a transparency, if that page has the copyright notice on
it. The copyright notice must appear on each page being reproduced.

The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries:

ACF/VTAM Advanced Function Printing

AFP AnyNet
CICS CICS/ESA
CICS/MVS DB2

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 303

DFSMS DFSMS/MVS
DFSMSdfp DFSMSdss
DFSMShsm DFSMSrmm
DFSORT ESCON
FICON IBM
IMS InfoPrint
Intelligent Printer Data Stream IPDS
IP PrintWay Language Environment
MVS (block letters) MVS/DFP
NetSpool NetView
OpenEdition OS/390
Parallel Sysplex PrintWay
RACF RAMAC
RMF S/390
S/390 Parallel Enterprise Server Sysplex Timer
VTAM

The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

Tivoli, Manage. Anything. Anywhere., The Power To Manage.,

Anything. Anywhere., TME, NetView, Cross-Site, Tivoli Ready,
Tivoli Certified, Planet Tivoli, and Tivoli Enterprise are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Tivoli Systems Inc., an
IBM company, in the United States, other countries, or both.
In Denmark, Tivoli is a trademark licensed from Kjobenhavns Sommer -
Tivoli A/S.

C-bus is a trademark of Corollary, Inc. in the United States and/or

other countries.

Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

PC Direct is a trademark of Ziff Communications Company in the United States

and is used by IBM Corporation under license.

ActionMedia, LANDesk, MMX, Pentium and ProShare are trademarks of Intel

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

SET, SET Secure Electronic Transaction, and the SET logo are trademarks
owned by Secure Electronic Transaction LLC.

UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other

countries licensed exclusively through the Open Group.

Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or

service marks of others.

304 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

Appendix E. Related Publications

The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed
discussion of the topics covered in this redbook.

E.1 IBM Redbooks

For information on ordering these ITSO publications see “How to get IBM Redbooks” on page 309.
• OS/390 Release 5 Implementation , SG24-5151
• OS/390 Release 4 Implementation , SG24-2089
• OS/390 Release 3 Implementation , SG24-2067
• OS/390 Release 2 Implementation , SG24-4834
• cit.OS/390 Security Server 1999 Updates Technical Presentation Guide, SG24-5627
• Security in OS/390-based TCP/IP Networks , SG24-5383
• Hierarchical File System Usage Guide , SG24-5482
• Enhanced Catalog Sharing and Management , SG245594
• Integrated Catalog Facility Backup and Recovery , SG24-5644
• OS/390 Version 2 Release 6 UNIX System Services Implementation and Customiztion , SG24-5178
• IBM S/390 FICON Implementation Guide , SG24-5169
• Exploiting S/390 Hardware Cryptography with Trusted Key Entry , SG24-5455
• TCP/IP Tutorial and Technical Overview , GG24-3376
• Introduction to Storage Area Network SAN , SG2-45470
• TCP/IP in a Sysplex , SG24-5235
• SecureWay Communications Server for OS/390 V2R8 TCP/IP: Guide to Enhancements , SG24-5631
• OS/390 eNetwork Communications Server V2R7 TCP/IP Implementation Guide Volume 1:
Configuration and Routing , SG24-5227
• OS/390 eNetwork Communications Server V2R7 TCP/IP Implementation Guide Volume 3: MVS
Applications , SG24-5229
• OS/390 Workload Manager Implementation and Exploitation , SG24-5326
• ADSM Server-to-Server Implementation and Operation , SG24-5244
• Stay Cool on OS/390: Installing Firewall Technology , SG24-2046
• Implementing DFSMSdss SnapShot and Virtual Concurrent Copy , SG24-5268
• TCP/IP OpenEdition Implementation Guide , SG24-2141
• IMS/ESA Version 5 Performance Guide , SG24-4637
• Parallel Sysplex Configuration: Overview , SG24-2075
• Parallel Sysplex Configuation: Cookbook , SG24-2076
• Parallel Sysplex Config.: Connectivity , SG24-2077
• DFSMS Optimizer Presentation Guide Update , SG24-4477
• MVS Parallel Sysplex Capacity Planning , SG24-4680

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 305

 • Getting the Most Out of a Parallel Sysplex , SG24-2073
• OS/390 eNetwork Communication Server TCP/IP Implementation Guide Volume 2 , SG24-5228

E.2 IBM Redbooks collections

Redbooks are also available on the following CD-ROMs. Click the CD-ROMs button at
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/ for information about all the CD-ROMs offered, updates and formats.

CD-ROM Title Collection Kit Number

System/390 Redbooks Collection SK2T-2177
Networking and Systems Management Redbooks Collection SK2T-6022
Transaction Processing and Data Management Redbooks Collection SK2T-8038
Lotus Redbooks Collection SK2T-8039
Tivoli Redbooks Collection SK2T-8044
AS/400 Redbooks Collection SK2T-2849
Netfinity Hardware and Software Redbooks Collection SK2T-8046
RS/6000 Redbooks Collection (BkMgr Format) SK2T-8040
RS/6000 Redbooks Collection (PDF Format) SK2T-8043
Application Development Redbooks Collection SK2T-8037
IBM Enterprise Storage and Systems Management Solutions SK3T-3694

E.3 Other resources

These publications are also relevant as further information sources:

• OS/390 Initialization and Tuning Guide , SC28-1751
• OS/390 Initialization and Tuning Reference , SC28-1752
• OS/390 Introduction and Release Guide , GC28-1725
• OS/390 MVS JCL User ′ s Guide , SC28-1758
• OS/390 MVS JCL Reference , GC28-1757
• OS/390 MVS System Diagnosis: Tools and Service Aids , LY28-1085, (available to IBM licensed
customers only)
• Interactive System Productivity Facility Getting Started , SC34-4440
• OS/390 Security Server (RACF) System Programmer ′ s Guide , SC28-1913
• OS/390 TSO/E Customization , SC28-1965
• OS/390 TSO/E Primer , GC28-1967
• OS/390 TSO/E User ′ s Guide , SC28-1968
• OS/390 SMP/E Reference , SC28-1806
• OS/390 SMP/E User ′ s Guide , SC28-1740
• OS/390 SMP/E Commands , SC28-1805
• Standard Packaging Rules for MVS-Based Products , SC23-3695
• OS/390 MVS System Commands , GC28-1781
• OS/390 MVS IPCS Commands , GC28-1754
• OS/390 MVS IPCS User ′ s Guide , GC28-1756
• DFSMS/MVS Using Data Sets , SC26-4922
• OS/390 Planning for Installation , GC28-1726
• OS/390 MVS System Data Sets Definition , GC28-1782

306 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

• ICKDSF R16 Refresh, User ′ s Guide , GC35-0033
• OS/390 MVS System Management Facilities (SMF) , GC28-1783
• EREP V3R5 Reference , GC35-0152
• OS/390 JES2 Commands , GC28-1790
• OS/390 Hardware Configuration Definition User ′ s Guide , SC28-1848
• DFSMS/MVS DFSMSdss Storage Administration Reference , SC26-4929
• IBM ServerPac for OS/390 Using the Installation Dialog , SC28-1244
• OS/390 Hardware Configuration Definition Planning , GC28-1750
• OS/390 MVS Using the Subsystem Interface , SC28-1502
• DFSMS/MVS Version 1 Release 4: Managing Catalogs , SC26-4914
• DFSMS/MVS Version 1 Release4: Access Method Services for Integrated Catalog Facility , SC26-4906
• DFSMS/MVS: DFSMShsm Implementation and Customization Guide , SH21-1078
• DFSMS/MVS Access Method Services for ICF Catalogs , SC26-4500
• DFSMS/MVS DFSMSdfp Storage Administration Reference , SC26-4920
• OS/390 eNetwork Communications Server: SNA Resource Definition Reference , SC31-8565
• OS/390 eNetwork Communications Server SNA Resource Definition Samples, SC31-8566
• OS/390 eNetwork Communications Server: SNA Operation , SC31-8567
• OS/390 V2R7.0 eNetwork CS IP Configuration , SC31-8513
• eNetwork Communications Server: IP User ′ s Guide GC31-8514
• OS/390 UNIX System Services Planning , SC28-1890
• OS/390 TCP/IP OpenEdition: Configuration Guide SC31-8304
• OS/390 Open Systems Adapter Support Facility User ′ s Guide , SC28-1855.
• OS/390 V2R6.0 MVS Planning: APPC/MVS Management , GC28-1807
• Print Services Facility for OS/390: Customization , S544-5622
• DFSMS/MVS Planning for Installation , SC26-4919
• DFSMS/MVS Implementing System-Managed Storage , SC26-3123
• DFSMS/MVS Remote Copy Administrator ′ s Guide and Reference , SC35-0169
• DFSMS/MVS Macro Instructions for Data Sets , SC26-4913
• DFSMS/MVS DFSMSdfp Diagnosis Guide , SY27-9605
• DFSMS/MVS DFSMSdfp Advanced Services , SC26-4921
• DFSMS/MVS Using Magnetic Tapes , SC26-4923
• DFSMS/MVS Utilities , SC26-4926
• Service Level Reporter User ′ s Guide: Reporting , SH19-6530
• DFSMS/MVS Object Access Method Application Programmer ′ s Reference , SC26-4917
• DFSMS/MVS Object Access Method Planning, Installation, and Storage Administration Guide for
Object Support , SC26-4918
• DFSORT Installation and Customization , SC26-7041
• DFSORT Getting Started with DFSORT R14 , SC26-4109
• DFSMS/MVS Network File System Customization and Operation , SC26-7029

Appendix E. Related Publications 307

 • DFSMS Optimizer User ′ s Guide and Reference , SC26-7047
• DFSMS/MVS DFSMSdss Storage Administration Guide , SC26-4930
• DFSMShsm Storage Administration Guide , SH21-1076
• DFSMShsm Storage Administration Reference , SH21-1075
• DFSMS/MVS Network File System User ′ s Guide , SC26-7028
• DFSMS/MVS DFSMSrmm Guide and Reference , SC26-4931
• DFSMS/MVS DFSMSrmm Implementation and Customization Guide , SC26-4932
• MVS/ESA Storage Management Library Managing Data , SC26-3124
• MVS/ESA Storage Management Library Managing Storage Groups , SC26-3125
• MVS/ESA Storage Management Library Leading a Storage Administration Group , SC26-3126.
• DFSMS/MVS Using the Interactive Storage Management Facility , SC26-4911
• ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager for MVS Administrator ′ s Guide , GC35-0277
• OS/390 MVS Programming: Assembler Services Guide , GC28-1762
• OS/390 MVS Programming: Resource Recovery , GC28-1739
• OS/390 MVS Setting Up a Sysplex , GC28-1779
• OS/390 MVS Sysplex Services Guide , GC28-1771
• OS/390 Parallel Sysplex Systems Management , GC28-1861
• OS/390 MVS Systems Codes , GC28-1780
• OS/390 MVS System Messages Volume 1 , GC28-1784
• OS/390 MVS System Messages Volume 2 , GC28-1785
• OS/390 MVS System Messages Volume 3 , GC28-1786
• OS/390 MVS System Messages Volume 4 , GC28-1787
• OS/390 MVS System Messages Volume 5 , GC28-1788
• OS/390 MVS Installation Exits , SC28-1753
• OS/390 MVS Diagnosis Reference , SY28-1084
• CICS User ′ s Handbook , SX33-1188
• CICS Diagnosis Guide , LX33-6093
• MQSeries for MVS/ESA Messages and Codes , GC33-0819

308 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

How to get IBM Redbooks
This section explains how both customers and IBM employees can find out about IBM Redbooks, redpieces, and
CD-ROMs. A form for ordering books and CD-ROMs by fax or e-mail is also provided.
• Redbooks Web Site http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/
Search for, view, download, or order hardcopy/CD-ROM Redbooks from the Redbooks Web site. Also read
redpieces and download additional materials (code samples or diskette/CD-ROM images) from this Redbooks
site.
Redpieces are Redbooks in progress; not all Redbooks become redpieces and sometimes just a few chapters
will be published this way. The intent is to get the information out much quicker than the formal publishing
process allows.
• E-mail Orders
Send orders by e-mail including information from the redbook fax order form to:

In United States: e-mail address: usib6fpl@ibmmail.com

Outside North America: Contact information is in the ″How to Order″ section at this site:
http://www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/pbl/pbl/

• Telephone Orders

United States (toll free) 1-800-879-2755

Canada (toll free) 1-800-IBM-4YOU
Outside North America Country coordinator phone number is in the ″How to Order″ section at this site:
http://www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/pbl/pbl/

• Fax Orders

United States (toll free) 1-800-445-9269

Canada 1-403-267-4455
Outside North America Fax phone number is in the ″How to Order″ section at this site:
http://www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/pbl/pbl/

This information was current at the time of publication, but is continually subject to change. The latest information
may be found at the Redbooks Web site.

IBM Intranet for Employees

IBM employees may register for information on workshops, residencies, and Redbooks by accessing the IBM
Intranet Web site at http://w3.itso.ibm.com/ and clicking the ITSO Mailing List button. Look in the Materials
repository for workshops, presentations, papers, and Web pages developed and written by the ITSO technical
professionals; click the Additional Materials button. Employees may access MyNews at http://w3.ibm.com/ for
redbook, residency, and workshop announcements.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 309

IBM Redbooks fax order form
Please send me the following:

Title Order Number Quantity

First name Last name

Company

Address

City Postal code Country

Telephone number Telefax number VAT number

• Invoice to customer number

• Credit card number

Credit card expiration date Card issued to Signature

We accept American Express, Diners, Eurocard, Master Card, and Visa. Payment by credit card not
available in all countries. Signature mandatory for credit card payment.

310 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 abend

Glossary
AFP. Advanced Function Presentation.
A
AFP Printer Driver for Windows. A component of
abend. Termination of a task before its completion Infoprint Server for OS/390 that runs on a Windows 95
because of an error condition that cannot be resolved or Windows NT workstation and creates output in AFP
by recovery facilities while the task executing. format, for printing on AFP printers.

ACB. Access method control block. AFP Viewer plug-in for Windows. A component of
Infoprint Server for OS/390 that runs on a Windows 95
access. A specific type of interaction between a or Windows NT workstation and allows you to view
subject and an object that results in the flow of files in AFP format.
information from one to the other.
AIX operating system. IBM′s implementation of the
access authority. An authority that relates to a UNIX operating system. The RS/6000 system, among
request for a type of access to protected resources. others, runs the AIX operating system.
In RACF, the access authorities are NONE, READ,
UPDATE, ALTER, and EXECUTE. allocate. To assign a resource for use in performing
a specific task.
access list. A list within a profile of all authorized
users and their access authorities. alphanumeric character. A letter or a number.

access method control block (ACB).. A control block amode. Addressing mode. A program attribute that
that links an application program to VTAM. can be specified (or defaulted) for each CSECT, load
module, and load module alias. AMODE states the
ACDS. Active control data set. addressing mode that is expected to be in effect when
the program is entered.
ACF/VTAM. An IBM licensed program that controls
communication and the flow of data in an SNA AMRF. action message retention facility
network. It provides single-domain, multiple-domain,
and interconnected network capability. VTAM runs AOR. Application-owning region
under MVS (OS/VS1 and OS/VS2), VSE, and VM/SP
and supports direct control application programs and APPC. Advanced Program-to-Program
subsystems such as VSE/POWER. Communications

ACIF. (1) AFP conversion and indexing facility. (2) A APPN. Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking.
PSF utility program that converts a print file into AFP,
MO:DCA-P, creates an index file for input data, and ASCII (American Standard Code for Information
collects resources used by an AFP document into Interchange). The standard code, using a coded
separate file. character set consisting of 7-bit coded characters
(8-bit including parity check), that is used for
action message retention facility (AMRF). A facility information interchange among data processing
that, when active, retains all action messages except systems, data communication systems, and
those specified by the installation in the MPFLSTxx associated equipment. The ASCII set consists of
member in effect. control characters and graphic characters.

action message sequence number. A decimal audit. To review and examine the activities of a data
number assigned to action messages. processing system mainly to test the adequacy and
effectiveness of procedures for data security and data
Advanced Function Presentation (AFP). A set of accuracy.
licensed programs, together with user applications,
that use the all-points-addressable concept to print on authority. The right to access objects, resources, or
presentation devices. AFP includes creating, functions.
formatting, archiving, retrieving, viewing, distributing,
and printing information. authorization checking. The action of determining
whether a user is permitted access to a
Advanced Program-to-Program Communications RACF-protected resource.
(APPC). A set of inter-program communication
services that support cooperative transaction Authorized Program Analysis Report (APAR). A
processing in a SNA network. request for correction of problem caused by a defect
in a current unaltered release of a program.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 311

authorized program facility (APF)

authorized program facility (APF). A facility that

permits identification of programs authorized to use C
restricted functions.
cache structure. A coupling facility structure that
automated operations. Automated procedures to enables high-performance sharing of cached data by
replace or simplify actions of operators in both multisystem applications in a sysplex. Applications
systems and network operations. can use a cache structure to implement several
different types of caching systems, including a
AVR. Automatic volume recognition. store-through or a store-in cache.

carriage control character. An optional character in

B an input data record that specifies a write, space, or
skip operation.
banner page. A page printed before the data set is
printed. carriage return (CR). (1) A keystroke generally
indicating the end of a command line. (2) In text data,
basic mode. A central processor mode that does not the action that indicates to continue printing at the
use logical partitioning. Contrast with logically left margin of the next line. (3) A character that will
partitioned (LPAR) mode. cause printing to start at the beginning of the same
physical line in which the carriage return occurred.
batch message processing (BMP) program. An IMS
batch processing program that has access to online CART. Command and response token.
databases and message queues. BMPs run online,
but like programs in a batch environment, they are case-sensitive. Pertaining to the ability to distinguish
started with job control language (JCL). between uppercase and lowercase letters.

batch-oriented BMP program. A BMP program that catalog. (1) A directory of files and libraries, with
has access to online databases and message queues reference to their locations. (2) To enter information
while performing batch-type processing. A about a file or a library into a (3) The collection of all
batch-oriented BMP does not access the IMS message data set indexes that are used by the control program
queues for input or output. It can access online to locate a volume containing a specific data set.
databases, GSAM databases, and MVS files for both
input and output. CBPDO. Custom Built Product Delivery Offering.

BMP. Batch message processing (BMP) program. CEC. Synonym for central processor complex (CPC).

broadcast. (1) Transmission of the same data to all central processor (CP). The part of the computer that
destinations. (2) Simultaneous transmission of data contains the sequencing and processing facilities for
to more than one destination. instruction execution, initial program load, and other
machine operations.
binary data. (1) Any data not intended for direct
human reading. Binary data may contain unprintable central processor complex (CPC). A physical
characters, outside the range of text characters. (2) A collection of hardware that includes main storage, one
type of data consisting of numeric values stored in bit or more central processors, timers, and channels.
patterns of 0s and 1s. Binary data can cause a large
number to be placed in a smaller space of storage. CFRM. Coupling facility resource management.

BIND. In SNA, a request to activate a session channel-to-channel (CTC). Refers to the

between two logical units (LUs). communication (transfer of data between programs on
opposite sides of a channel-to-channel adapter (CTCA
buffer. A portion of storage used to hold input or
output data temporarily. channel-to-channel adapter (CTCA). An input/output
device that is used a program in one system to
buffered device. A device where the data is written communicate with a program in another system.
to a hardware buffer in the device before it is placed
on the paper (for example, IBM 3820). checkpoint. (1) A place in a routine where a check,
or a recording of data for restart purposes, is
burst. To separate continuous-forms paper into performed. (2) A point at which information about the
single sheets. status of a job and the system can be recorded so
that the job step can be restarted later.

checkpoint write. Any write to the checkpoint data

set. A general term for the primary, intermediate, and
final writes that update any checkpoint data set.

312 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 CICS

CICS. Customer Information Control System. console. That part of a computer used for
communication between the operator or user and the
CICSplex. A group of connected CICS regions. computer.

CICSPlex SM. CICSPlex System Manager console group. In MVS, a group of consoles defined
in CNGRPxx, each of whose members can serve as an
client. A functional unit that receives shared services alternate console in console or hardcopy recovery or
from a server. See also client-server. as a console to display synchronous messages.

client-server. In TCP/IP, the model of interaction in CONSOLxx. The SYS1.PARMLIB member used to
distributed data processing in which a program at one define message handling, command processing, and
site sends a request to a program at another site and MCS consoles.
awaits a response. The requesting program is called
a client; the answering program is called a server. control unit. Synonymous with device control unit.

CMOS. Complementary metal-oxide semiconductor. conversation. A logical connection between two

programs over an LU type 6.2 session that allows
CNGRPxx. The SYS1.PARMLIB member that defines them to communicate with each other while
console groups for the system or sysplex. processing a transaction.

code page. (1) A table showing codes assigned to conversational. Pertaining to a program or a system
character sets. (2) An assignment of graphic that carries on a dialog with a terminal user,
characters and control function meanings to all code alternately accepting input and then responding to the
points. (3) Arrays of code points representing input quickly enough for the user to maintain a train
characters that establish ordinal sequence (numeric of thought.
order) of characters. (4) A particular assignment of
hexadecimal identifiers to graphic elements. copy group. One or more copies of a page of paper.
Each copy can have modifications, such as text
code point. A 1-byte code representing one of 256 suppression, page position, forms flash, and overlays.
potential characters.
couple data set. A data set that is created through
coexistence. Two or more systems at different levels the XCF couple data set format utility and, depending
(for example, software, service or operational levels) on its designated type, is shared by some or all of the
that share resources. Coexistence includes the ability MVS systems in a sysplex. See also sysplex couple
of a system to respond in the following ways to a new data set.
function that was introduced on another system with
which it shares resources: ignore a new function, coupling facility. A special logical partition that
terminate gracefully, support a new function. provides high-speed caching, list processing, and
locking functions in a sysplex.
command and response token (CART). A parameter
on WTO, WTOR, MGCRE, and certain TSO/E coupling facility channel.. A high bandwidth fiber
commands and REXX execs that allows you to link optic channel that provides the high-speed
commands and their associated message responses. connectivity required for data sharing between a
coupling facility and the central processor complexes
command prefix facility (CPF). An MVS facility that directly attached to it.
allows you to define and control subsystem and other
command prefixes for use in a sysplex. coupling services. In a sysplex, the functions of XCF
that transfer data and status between members of a
COMMDS. Communications data set. group residing on one or more MVS systems in the
sysplex.
complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS).
A technology that combines the electrical properties CP. Central processor.
of positive and negative voltage requirements to use
considerably less power than other types of CPC. Central processor complex.
semiconductors.
CPF. Command prefix facility.
connection. In TCP/IP, the path between two protocol
applications that provides reliable data stream cross-system coupling facility (XCF). XCF is a
delivery service. In Internet communications, a component of MVS that provides functions to support
connection extends from a TCP application on one cooperation between authorized programs running
syste system to a TCP application on another system. within a sysplex.

cryptography. The transformation of data to conceal

its meaning.

Glossary 313
cryptographic key

cryptographic key. A parameter that determines DBCTL. IMS Database Control.

cryptographic transformations between plaintext and
ciphertext. DBRC. Database Recovery Control.

CTC. Channel-to-channel. DB2. DATABASE 2 for MVS/ESA.

Customer Information Control System (CICS). An DB2 data sharing group. A collection of one or more
IBM licensed program tha that enables transactions concurrent DB2 subsystems that directly access and
entered at remote terminals to be processed change the same data while maintaining data
concurrently by user-written application programs. It integrity.
includes facilities for building, using, and maintaining
databases. DB2 PM. DB2 Performance Monitor.

deallocate. To release a resource that is assigned to

D a specific task.

DAE. Dump analysis and elimination. default. A value, attribute, or option that is assumed
when no alternative is specified by the user.
daemon. A program that runs unattended to perform
a standard service. destination node. The node that provides application
services to an authorized external user.
DASD. Direct access storage device.
device control unit. A hardware device that controls
data definition name. The name of a data definition the reading, writing, or displaying of data at one or
(DD) statement, which corresponds to a data control more input/output devices or terminals.
block that contains the same name. Abbreviated as
ddname. device number. The unique number assigned to an
external device.
data definition (DD) statement. A job control
statement that describes a data set associated with a device type. The general name for a kind of device;
particular job step. for example, 3330.

data integrity. The condition that exists as long as DFSMS. Data Facility Storage Management
accidental or intentional destruction, alteration, or Subsystem.
loss of data does not occur.
direct access storage device (DASD). A device in
data set. The major unit of data storage and which the access time effectively independent of the
retrieval, consisting of a collection of data in one of location of the data.
several prescribed arrangements and described by
control information to which the system has access. directory. (1) A type of file containing the names and
controlling information for other files or other
data set label. (1) A collection of information that directories. Directories can also contain
describes the attributes of a data set and is normally subdirectories, which can contain subdirectories of
stored on the same volume as the data set. (2) A their own. (2) A file that contains directory entries.
general term for data set control blocks and tape data No two directory entries in the same directory can
set labels. have the same name. (POSIX.1). (3) A file that points
to files and to other directories. (4) An index used by
data set separator pages. Those pages of printed a control program to locate blocks of data that are
output that delimit data sets. stored in separate areas of a data set in direct access
storage.
data sharing. The ability of concurrent subsystems
(such as DB2 or IMS DB) or application programs to display console. In MVS, an MCS console whose
directly access and change the same data while input/output function you can control.
maintaining data integrity.
DLL filter. A filter that provides one or more of these
data stream. (1) All information (data and control functions in a dynamic load library - init(), prolog(),
commands) sent over a data link usually in a single process(), epilog(), and term(). See cfilter.h and
read or write operation. (2) A continuous stream of cfilter.c in the /usr/lpp/Printsrv/samples/ directory for
data elements being transmitted, or intended for more information. See also filter. Contrast with DLL
transmission, in character or binary-digit form, using filter.
a defined format.
DOM. An MVS macro that removes outstanding
DBCS. Double-byte character set. WTORs or action messages that have been queued to
a console end-of-tape-marker. A marker on a

314 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 dotted decimal notation

magnetic tape used to indicate the end of the

permissible recording area, for example, a F
photo-reflective strip a transparent section of tape, or
FMID. Function modification identifier. The IBM
a particular bit pattern.
release-specific product identifier such as HJE6610 for
dotted decimal notation. The syntactical OS/390 Release 1 JES2.
representation for a 32-bit integer that consists of four
FOR. File-owning region.
8-bit numbers written in base 10 with periods (dots)
separating them. It is used to represent IP addresses.
frame. For a System/390 microprocessor cluster, a
frame contains one or two central processor
double-byte character set (DBCS). A set of
complexes (CPCs), support elements, and AC power
characters in which each character is represented by
distribution.
a two-bytes code. Languages such as Japanese,
Chinese, and Korean, which contain more symbols
FSS. functional subsystem. An address space
than can be represented by 256 code points, require
uniquely identified as performing a specific function
double-byte character sets. Because each character
related to the JES. An example of an FSS is the
requires two bytes, the typing, display, and printing of
program Print Services Facility that operates the 3800
DBCS characters requires hardware and programs
Model 3 an 38xx printers.
that support DBCS. Contrast with single-byte
character set.
functional subsystem (FSS). An address space
uniquely identified as performing a specific function
drain. Allowing a printer to complete its current work
related to the JES.
before stopping the device.
functional subsystem application (FSA). The
E functional application program managed by the
functional subsystem.
entry area. In MVS, the part of a console screen
where operators can enter commands or command functional subsystem interface (FSI). The interface
responses. through which JES2 JES3 communicate with the
functional subsystem.
EMIF. ESCON Multiple Image Facility.

Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON). A set of

G
products and services that provides a dynamically
gateway node. A node that is an interface between
connected environment using optical cables as a
networks.
transmission medium.
generalized trace facility (GTF). Like system trace,
EPDM. IBM SystemView Enterprise Performance
gathers information used to determine and diagnose
Data Manager/MVS.
problems that occur during system operation. Unlike
system trace, however, GTF can be tailored to record
ESCD. ESCON Director.
very specific system and user program events.
ESCM. ESCON Manager. The licensed program
global access checking. The ability to allow an
System Automation for OS/390 includes all of the
installation to establish an in-storage table of default
function previosuly provided by ESCM.
values for authorization levels for selected resources.
ESCON. Enterprise Systems Connection.
global resource serialization. A function that
ETR. External Time Reference. See also Sysplex provides an MVS serialization mechanism for
Timer. resources (typically data sets) across multiple MVS
images.
extended MCS console. In MVS, a console other than
an MCS console from which operators or programs global resource serialization complex. One or more
can issue MVS commands and receive messages. A n MVS systems that use global resource serialization to
extended MCS console is defined through an serialize access to shared resources (such as data
OPERPARM segment. sets on shared DASD volumes).

group. A collection of RACF users who can share

access authorities for protected resources.

GTF. Generalized trace facility.

Glossary 315
hardcopy log

IRLM. Internal resource lock manager.

H
ISPF. Interactive System Productivity Facility.
hardcopy log. In systems with multiple console
support or a graphic console, a permanent record of
system activity. J
hardware. Physical equipment, as opposed to the JES common coupling services. A set of
computer program or method of use; for example, macro-driven services that provide the
mechanical, magnetic, electrical, or electronic communication interface between JES members of a
devices. Contrast with software. sysplex. Synonymous with JES XCF.

hardware configuration dialog. In MVS, a panel JESXCF. JES cross-system coupling services. The
program that is part of the hardware configuration MVS component, common to both JES2 and JES3, that
definition. The program allows an installation to provides the cross-system coupling services to either
define devices for MVS system configurations. JES2 multi-access spool members or JES3 complex
members, respectively.
Hardware Management Console. A console used to
monitor and control hardware such as the System/390 JES2. An MVS subsystem that receives jobs into the
microprocessors. system, converts them to internal format, selects
them for execution, processes their output, and
HCD. Hardware Configuration Definition. purges them from the system. In an installation with
more than one processor, each JES2 processor
highly parallel. Refers to multiple systems operating independently controls its job input, scheduling, and
in parallel, each of which can have multiple output processing.
processors. See also n-way.
JES2 multi-access spool configuration. A multiple
MVS system environment that consists of two or more
I JES2 processors sharing the same job queue and
spool
ICMF. Integrated Coupling Migration Facility.
JES3. An MVS subsystem that receives jobs into the
IMS. Information Management System.
system, converts them to internal format, selects
them for execution, processes their output, and
IMS DB. Information Management System Database
purges them from the system. In complexes that
Manager.
have several loosely-coupled processing units, the
IMS DB data sharing group. A collection of one or JES3 program manages processors so that the global
more concurrent IMS DB subsystems that directly processor exercises centralized control over the local
access and change the same data while maintaining processors and distributes jobs to them via a common
data integrity. job queue.

IMS TM. Information Management System JES3 complex. A multiple MVS system environment
Transaction Manager. that allows JES3 subsystem consoles and MCS
consoles with a logical association to JES3 to receive
initial program load (IPL). The initialization procedure messages and send commands across systems.
that causes an operating system to begin operation.
job entry subsystem (JES). A system facility for
instruction line. In MVS, the part of the console spooling, job queuing, and managing the scheduler
screen that contains messages about console control work area.
and input errors.
job separator page data area (JSPA). A data area
internal reader. A facility that transfers jobs to the that contains job-level information for a data set. This
job entry subsystem (JES2 or JES3). information is used to generate job header, job trailer
or data set header pages. The JSPA can be used by
IOCDS. Input/output configuration data set. an installation-defined JES2 exit routine to duplicate
the information currently in the JES2 separator page
IOCP. Input/output configuration program. exit routine.

IODF. Input/output definition file. job separator pages. Those pages of printed output
that delimit jobs.
IPL. Initial program load.

316 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 keyword

K M
keyword. A part of a command operand or MAS. Multi-access spool.
SYS1.PARMLIB statement that consists of a specific
character string (such as NAME= on the CONSOLE master console. In an MVS system or sysplex, the
statement of CONSOLxx). main console used for communication between the
operator and the system from which all MVS
commands can be entered. The first active console
L with AUTH(MASTER) defined becomes the master
console in a system or sysplex.
LIC. Licensed Internal Code.
master console authority. In a system or sysplex, a
list structure. A coupling facility structure that console defined with AUTH(MASTER) other than the
enables multisystem applications in a sysplex to master console from which all MVS commands can be
share information organized as a set of lists or entered.
queues. A list structure consists of a set of lists and
an optional lock table, which can be used for master trace. A centralized data tracing facility of
serializing resources in the list structure. Each list the master scheduler, used in servicing the message
consists of a queue of list entries. processing portions of MVS.

lock structure. A coupling facility structure that MCS. Multiple console support.
enables applications in a sysplex to implement
customized locking protocols for serialization of MCS console. A non-SNA device defined to MVS that
application-defined resources. The lock structure is locally attached to an MVS system and is used to
supports shared, exclusive, and application-defined enter commands and receive messages.
lock states, as well as generalized contention
management and recovery protocols. member. A specific function (one or more
modules/routines) of a multisystem application that is
logical partition (LP). A subset of the processor defined to XCF and assigned to a group by the
hardware that is defined to support an operating multisystem application. A member resides on one
system. See also logically partitioned (LPAR) mode. system in the sysplex and can use XCF services to
communicate (send and receive data) with other
logically partitioned (LPAR) mode. A central members of the same group.
processor complex (CPC) power-on reset mode that
enables use of the PR/SM feature and allows an message processing facility (MPF). A facility used to
operator to allocate CPC hardware resources control message retention, suppression, and
(including central processors, central storage, presentation.
expanded storage, and channel paths) among logical
partitions. Contrast with basic mode. message queue. A queue of messages that are
waiting to be processed or waiting to be sent to a
logical unit (LU). In SNA, a port through which an terminal.
end user accesses th SNA network in order to
communicate with another end user and through message text. The part of a message consisting of
which the end user accesses the functions provided the actual information that is routed to a user at a
by system services control points (SSCPs). terminal or to a program.

logical unit type 6.2. The SNA logical unit type that microprocessor. A processor implemented on one or
supports general communication between programs in a small number of chips.
a cooperative processing environment.
mixed complex. A global resource serialization
loosely coupled. A multisystem structure that complex in which one or more of the systems in the
requires a low degree of interaction and cooperation global resource serialization complex are not part of a
between multiple MVS images to process a workload. multisystem sysplex.
See also tightly coupled.
MP. Multiprocessor.
LP. Logical partition.
MPF. Message processing facility.
LPAR. Logically partitioned (mode).
MPFLSTxx. The SYS1.PARMLIB member that
controls the message processing facility for the
system.

MRO. Multiregion operation.

Glossary 317
multiple console support (MCS)

multiple console support (MCS). The operator nonstandard labels. Labels that do not conform to
interface in an MVS system. American National Standard or IBM System/370
standard label conventions.
multi-access spool (MAS). A complex of multiple
processors running MVS/JES2 that share a common nucleus initialization program (NIP). The stage of
JES2 spool and JES2 checkpoint data set. MVS that initializes the control program; it allows the
operator to request last minute changes to certain
multiprocessing. The simultaneous execution of two options specified during initialization.
or more computer programs or sequences of
instructions. See also parallel processing.
O
multiprocessor (MP). A CPC that can be physically
partitioned to form two operating processor offline. Pertaining to equipment or devices not under
complexes. control of the processor.

multisystem application. An application program that OLTP. Online transaction processing.

has various functions distributed across MVS images
in a multisystem environment. online. Pertaining to equipment or devices under
control of the processor.
multisystem console support. Multiple console
support for more than one system in a sysplex. OPC/ESA. Operations Planning and Control.
Multisystem console support allows consoles on
different systems in the sysplex to communicate with operating system (OS). Software that controls the
each other (send messages and receive commands) execution of programs and that may provide services
such as resource allocation, scheduling, input/output
multisystem environment. An environment in which control, and data management. Although operating
two or more MVS images reside in one or more systems are predominantly software, partial hardware
processors, and programs on one image can implementations are possible.
communicate with programs on the other images.
operations log. In MVS, the operations log is a
multisystem sysplex. A sysplex in which two or more central record of communications and system
MVS images are allowed to be initialized as part of problems for each system in a sysplex.
the sysplex.
OPERLOG. The operations log.
MVS image. A single occurrence of the MVS/ESA
operating system that has the ability to process work. OPERPARM. In MVS, a segment that contains
information about console attributes for extended
MVS router. The MVS router is a system service that MCS consoles running on TSO/E.
provides an installation with centralized control over
system security processing. OS/390. OS/390 is a network computing-ready,
integrated operating system consisting of more than
MVS system. An MVS image together with its 50 base elements and integrated optional features
associated hardware, which collectively are often delivered as a configured, tested system.
referred to simply as a system, or MVS system.
OS/390 Network File System. A base element of
MVS/ESA. Multiple Virtual Storage/ESA. OS/390, that allows remote access to MVS host
processor data from workstations, personal
MVSCP. MVS configuration program. computers, or any other system on a TCP/IP network
that is using client software for the Network File
System protocol.
N
OS/390 UNIX System Services (OS/390 UNIX). The
n-way. The number (n) of CPs in a CPC. For set of functions provided by the SHELL and UTILITIES,
example, a 6-way CPC contains six CPs. kernel, debugger, file system, C/C++ Run-Time
Library, Language Environment, and other elements
NIP. Nucleus initialization program. of the OS/390 operating system that allow users to
write and run application programs that conform to
NJE. Network job entry. UNIX standards.

no-consoles condition. A condition in which the

system is unable to access any full-capability console
device.

318 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 parallel processing

application program or indirectly through the Job

P Entry Subsystem (JES) of MVS.

parallel processing. The simultaneous processing of printer. (1) A device that writes output data from a
units of work by many servers. The units of work can system on paper or other media.
be either transactions or subdivisions of large units of
work (batch). See also highly parallel. processor controller. Hardware that provides support
and diagnostic functions for the central processors.
Parallel Sysplex. A sysplex that uses one or more
coupling facilities. Processor Resource/Systems Manager (PR/SM). The
feature that allows the processor to use several MVS
partitionable CPC. A CPC that can be divided into 2 images simultaneously and provides logical
independent CPCs. See also physical partition, partitioning capability. See also LPAR.
single-image mode, MP, side.
profile. Data that describes the significant
partitioned data set (PDS). A data set on direct characteristics of a user, a group of users, or one or
access storage that is divided into partitions, called more computer resources.
members, each of which can contain a program, part
of a program, or data. program function key (PFK). A key on the keyboard
of a display device that passes a signal to a program
partitioned data set extended (PDSE). A to call for a particular program operation.
system-managed data set that contains an indexed
directory and members that are similar to the program status word (PSW). A doubleword in main
directory and members of partitioned data sets. A storage used to control the order in which instructions
PDSE can be used instead of a partitioned data set. are executed, and to hold and indicate the status of
the computing system in relation to a particular
password. A unique string of characters known to a program.
computer system and to a user, who must specify the
character string to gain access to a system and to the pseudo-master console. A subsystem-allocatable
information stored within it. console that has system command authority like that
of an MCS master console.
permanent data set. A user-named data set that is
normally retained for longer than the duration of a job PSW. Program status word.
or interactive session. Contrast with temporary data
set.
R
PFK. Program function key.
RACF. See Resource Access Control Facility.
PFK capability. On a display console, indicates that
program function keys are supported and were RAID. See redundant array of independent disk.
specified at system generation.
RAMAC Virtual Array (RVA) system. An online,
PFKTABxx. The SYS1.PARMLIB member that random access disk array storage system composed
controls the PFK table settings for MCS consoles in a of disk storage and control unit combined into a single
system. frame.

physical partition. Part of a CPC that operates as a read access. Permission to read information.
CPC in its own right, with its own copy of the
operating system. recording format. For a tape volume, the format of
the data on the tape, for example, 18, 36, 128, or 256
physically partitioned (PP) configuration. A system tracks.
configuration that allows the processor controller to
use both central processor complex (CPC) sides as recovery. The process of rebuilding data after it has
individual CPCs. The A-side of the processor been damaged or destroyed, often by using a backup
controller controls side 0; the B-side of the processor copy of the data or by reapplying transactions
controller controls side 1. Contrast with single-image recorded in a log.
(SI) configuration.
redundant array of independent disk (RAID). A disk
PR/SM. Processor Resource/Systems Manager. subsystem architecture that combines two or more
physical disk storage devices into a single logical
Print Services Facility (PSF). The access method that device to achieve data redundancy.
supports the 3800 Printing Subsystem Models 3 and 8.
PSF can interface either directly to a user′ s remote operations. Operation of remote sites from a
host system.

Glossary 319
Resource Access Control Facility (RACF)

Resource Access Control Facility (RACF). An side. A part of a partitionable CPC that can run as a
IBM-licensed program or a base element of OS/390, physical partition and is typically referred to as the
that provides for access control by identifying and A-side or the B-side.
verifying the users to the system, authorizing access
to protected resources, logging the detected single point of control. The characteristic a sysplex
unauthorized attempts to enter the system and displays when you can accomplish a given set of
logging the detected accesses to protected resources. tasks from a single workstation, even if you need
multiple IBM and vendor products to accomplish that
restructured extended executor (REXX). A particular set of tasks.
general-purpose, procedural language for end-user
personal programming, designed for ease by both single system image. The characteristic a product
casual general users and computer professionals. It displays when multiple images of the product can be
is also useful for application macros. REXX includes viewed and managed as one image.
the capability of issuing commands to the underlying
operating system from these macros and procedures. single-image (SI) mode. A mode of operation for a
Features include powerful character-string multiprocessor (MP) system that allows it to function
manipulation, automatic data typing, manipulation of as one CPC. By definition, a uniprocessor (UP)
objects familiar to people, such as words, numbers, operates in single-image mode. Contrast with
and names, and built-in interactive debugging. physically partitioned (PP) configuration.

REXX. See restructured extended executor. single-system sysplex. A sysplex in which only one
MVS system is allowed to be initialized as part of the
RMF. Resource Measurement Facility. sysplex. In a single-system sysplex, XCF provides
XCF services on the system but does not provide
rmode. Residency mode. A program attribute that signalling services between MVS systems. See also
can be specified (or defaulted) for each CSECT, load multisystem sysplex, XCF-local mode.
module, and load module alias. RMODE states the
virtual storage location (either above 16 megabytes SLR. Service Level Reporter.
or anywhere in virtual storage) where the program
should reside. small computer system interface (SCSI). A standard
hardware interface that enables a variety of
roll mode. The MCS console display mode that peripheral devices to communicate with one another.
allows messages to roll of off the screen when a
specified time interval elapses. SMF. System management facilities.

roll-deletable mode. The console display mode that SMP/E. System Modification Program Extended.
allows messages to roll off the screen when a
specified time interval elapses. Action messages SMS. Storage Management Subsystem.
remain at the top of the screen where operators can
delete them. SMS communication data set. The primary means of
communication among systems governed by a single
routing. The assignment of the communications path SMS configuration. The SMS communication data set
by which a message will reach its destination. (COMMDS) is a VSAM linear data set that contains
the current utilization statistics for each
routing code. A code assigned to an operator system-managed volume, which SMS uses to help
message and used to route the message to the balance space usage among systems.
proper console.
SMS configuration. The SMS definitions and routines
RVA. See RAMAC Virtual Array system. that the Storage Management Subsystem uses to
manage storage.

S SMS system group. All systems in a sysplex that

share the same SMS configuration and
SCDS. Source control data set. communications data sets, minus any systems in the
sysplex that are defined individually in the SMS
SDSF. System Display and Search Facility. configuration.

shared DASD option. An option that enables software. (1) All or part of the programs, procedures,
independently operating computing systems to jointly rules, and associated documentation of a data
use common data residing on shared direct access processing system. (2) Contrast with hardware. A set
storage devices. of programs, procedures, and, possibly, associated
documentation concerned with the operation of a data
processing system. For example, compilers, library

320 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 spanned record

routines, manuals, circuit diagrams. Contrast with control to the supervisor so that it can perform a
hardware. specific service indicated by the instruction.

spanned record. A logical record contained in more support element. A hardware unit that provides
than one block. communications, monitoring, and diagnostic functions
to a central processor complex (CPC).
status-display console. An MCS console that can
receive displays of system status but from which an SVC routine. A control program routine that
operator cannot enter commands. performs or begins a contro program service
specified by a supervisor call instruction.
storage administrator. A person in the data
processing center who is responsible for defining, symmetry. The characteristic of a sysplex where all
implementing, and maintaining storage manageme systems, or certain subsets of the systems, have the
policies. same hardware and software configurations and
share the same resources.
storage class. A collection of storage attributes that
identify performance goals and availability synchronous messages. WTO or WTOR messages
requirements, defined by the storage administrator, issued by an MVS system during certain recovery
used to select a device that can meet those goals and situations.
requirements.
SYSLOG. The system log data set.
storage group. A collection of storage volumes and
attributes, defined the storage administrator. The sysplex. A set of MVS systems communicating and
collections can be a group of DASD volume or tape cooperating with each other through certain
volumes, or a group of DASD, optical, or tape multisystem hardware components and software
volumes treated as single object storage hierarchy. services to process customer workloads. See also
See tape storage group. MVS system, Parallel Sysplex.

storage management. The activities of data set sysplex couple data set. A couple data set that
allocation, placement, monitoring, migration, backup, contains sysplex-wide data about systems, groups,
recall, recovery, and deletion. These can be done and members that use XCF services. All MVS
either manually or by using automated processes. systems in a sysplex must have connectivity to the
cThe Storage Management Subsystem automates sysplex couple data set. See also couple data set.
these processes for you, while optimizing storage
resources. See also Storage Management Sysplex Timer. An IBM unit that synchronizes the
Subsystem. time-of-day (TOD) clocks in multiple processors or
processor sides. External Time Reference (ETR) is
Storage Management Subsystem (SMS). A the MVS generic name for the IBM Sysplex Timer
DFSMS/MVS facility used to automate and centralize (9037).
the management of storage. Using SMS, a storage
administrator describes data allocation system control element (SCE). Hardware that
characteristics, performance and availability goals, handles the transfer of data and control information
backup and retention requirements, and storage associated with storage requests between the
requirements to the system through data class, elements of the processor.
storage class, management class, storage group, and
ACS routine definitions. system console. In MVS, a console attached to the
processor controller used to initialize an MVS system.
storage subsystem. A storage control and its
attached storage devices. See also tape subsystem. system log (SYSLOG). In MVS, the system log data
set that includes all entries made by the WTL
structure. A construct used by MVS to map and (write-to-log) macro as well as the hardcopy log.
manage storage on a coupling facility. See cache SYSLOG is maintained by JES in JES SPOOL space.
structure, list structure, and lock structure.
system management facilities (SMF). An optional
subsystem-allocatable console. A console managed control program feature of OS/390 and MVS that
by a subsystem like JES3 or NetView used to provides the means for gathering and recording
communicate with an MVS system. information that can be used to evaluate system
usage.
subsystem interface (SSI). An MVS component that
provides communication between MVS and JES. System Modification Program Extended (SMP/E). In
addition to providing the services of SMP, SMP/E
supervisor call instruction (SVC). An instruction that consolidates installation data, allows more flexibility
interrupts a program being executed and passes in selecting changes to be installed, provides a dialog

Glossary 321
Systems Network Architecture (SNA)

interface, and supports dynamic allocation of data

sets. V
Systems Network Architecture (SNA). A description VM . Virtual Machine.
of the logical structure, formats, protocols, and
virtual telecommunications access method (VTAM). A
operational sequences for transmitting information
set of programs that maintain control of the
units through, and controlling the configuration and
communication between terminals and application
operation of networks.
programs running under DOS/VS, OS/VS1, and
system trace. A chronological record of specific OS/VS2 operating systems.
operating system events. The record is usually
volume. (1) That portion of a single unit of storage
produced for debugging purposes.
which is accessible to a single read/write mechanism,
for example, a drum, a disk pack, or part of a disk
T storage module. (2) A recording medium that is
mounted and demounted as a unit, for example, a reel
temporary data set. A data set that is created and of magnetic tape, a disk pack, a data cell.
deleted in the same job.
volume serial number. A number in a volume label
terminal. A device, usually equipped with a keyboard that is assigned when a volume is prepared for use in
and some kind of display, capable of sending and the system.
receiving information over a link.
volume table of contents (VTOC). A table on a direct
terminal user. In systems with time-sharing, anyone access volume that describes each data set on the
who is eligible to log on. volume.

tightly coupled. Multiple CPs that share storage and VSAM. Virtual Storage Access Method.
are controlled by a single copy of MVS. See also
loosely coupled, tightly coupled multiprocessor. VTAM. Virtual Telecommunications Access Method.

tightly coupled multiprocessor. Any CPU with VTOC. Volume table of contents.
multiple CPs.

Time Sharing Option (TSO). An option on the W

operating system; for OS/390 the option provides
wait state. Synonymous with waiting time.
interactive time sharing from remote terminals.

waiting time. (1) The condition of a task that depends

TOR. Terminal-owning region.
on one or more events in order to enter the ready
transaction. In APPC/MVS, a unit of work performed condition. (2) The condition of a processing unit when
by one or more transaction programs, involving a all operations are suspended.
specific set of input data and initiating a specific
WLM. MVS workload management.
process or job.

wrap mode. The console display mode that allows a

transaction program (TP). For APPC/MVS, any
separator line between old and new messages to
program on MVS that issues APPC/MVS or CPI
move down a full screen as new messages are added.
Communication calls, or is scheduled by the
When the screen is filled and a new message is
APPC/MVS transaction scheduler.
added, the separator line overlays the oldest
message and the newest message appears
U immediately before the line.

undelivered message. An action message or WTOR write-to-log (WTL) message. A message sent to
that cannot be queued for delivery to the expected SYSLOG or the hardcopy log.
console. MVS delivers these messages to any
console with the UD console attribute in a system or write-to-operator (WTO) message. A message sent to
sysplex. an operator console informing the operator of errors
and system conditions that may need correcting.
uniprocessor (UP). A CPC that contains one CP and
is not partitionable. write-to-operator-with-reply (WTOR) message. A
message sent to an operator console informing the
UP. Uniprocessor. operator of errors and system conditions that may
need correcting. The operator must enter a response.

322 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming

 WTL message

WTL message. Write-to-log message availability for multisystem applications in the

sysplex.
WTO message. Write-to-operator message
XCF-local mode. The state of a system in which XCF
WTOR message. Write-to-operator-with-reply provides limited services on one system and does not
message. provide signalling services between MVS systems.
See also single-system sysplex.

X XRF. Extended recovery facility.

XCF. Cross-system coupling facility.

XCF PR/SM policy. In a multisystem sysplex on

PR/SM, the actions that XCF takes when one MVS
system in the sysplex fails. This policy provides high

Glossary 323
324 ABCs of OS/390 System Programming
IBM Redbooks evaluation
ABCs of OS/390 System Programming Volume 1
SG24-5597-00

Your feedback is very important to help us maintain the quality of IBM Redbooks. Please complete this
questionnaire and return it using one of the following methods:
• Use the online evaluation form found at http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/
• Fax this form to: USA International Access Code + 1 914 432 8264
• Send your comments in an Internet note to redbook@us.ibm.com

Which of the following best describes you?

__Customer __Business Partner __Solution Developer __IBM employee
__None of the above

Please rate your overall satisfaction with this book using the scale:
(1 = very good, 2 = good, 3 = average, 4 = poor, 5 = very poor)
Overall Satisfaction ____________

Please answer the following questions:

Was this redbook published in time for your needs? Yes____ No____

If no, please explain:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

What other redbooks would you like to see published?

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Comments/Suggestions: (THANK YOU FOR YOUR FEEDBACK!)

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000 325

ABCs of OS/390 System Programming Volume 1 SG24-5597-00
Printed in the U.S.A.

IBML 
SG24-5597-00